Owner’sIdentification - Hondaowners.honda.com/assets/OWNERLINK/Model/own_man/2002Accord… · Owner’sIdentification SiprefiereesteManualdel Propietarioenespañol,comuníquese

This Owner’s Manual should be considereda permanent part of the vehicle, and shouldremain with the vehicle when it is sold.

This Owner’s Manual covers all models ofthe Accord Sedan. You may finddescriptions of equipment and features thatare not on your particular model.

The information and specifications includedin this publication were in effect at the timeof approval for printing. Honda Motor Co.,Ltd. reserves the right, however, todiscontinue or change specifications ordesign at any time without notice andwithout incurring any obligation whatsoever.

Owner’s Identif ication

Si prefiere este Manual delPropietario en español, comuníquesecon el concesionario Honda.

POUR CLIENTS CANADIENAVIS IMPORTANT: Si vous avezbesoin d’un Manuel du Conducteur enfrançais, veuillez demander à votreconcessionnaire de commander lenuméro de pièce 38S84640 .

OWNER

ADDRESS

V. I. N.

DELIVERY DATE

DEALER NAME DEALER NO.

ADDRESS

OWNER’S SIGNATURE

DEALER’S SIGNATURE

STREET

CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/POSTAL CODE

(Date sold to original retail purchaser)

STREET

CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/POSTAL CODE

01/04/26 21:43:56 31S84640_001

As you read this manual, you willfind information that is preceded bya symbol. Thisinformation is intended to help youavoid damage to your Honda, otherproperty, or the environment.

Several warranties protect your new Honda. Read the warranty bookletthoroughly so you understand the coverages and are aware of your rightsand responsibilities.

One of the best ways to enhance the enjoyment of your new Honda is toread this manual. In it, you will learn how to operate its driving controls andconvenience items. Afterwards, keep this owner’s manual in your car so youcan refer to it at any time.

Maintaining your car according to the schedules given in this manual helpsto keep your driving trouble-free while it preserves your investment. Whenyour car needs maintenance, keep in mind that your Honda dealer’s staff isspecially trained in servicing the many systems unique to your Honda. YourHonda dealer is dedicated to your satisfaction and will be pleased to answerany questions and concerns.

Congratulations! Your selection of a 2002 Honda Accord was a wiseinvestment. It will give you years of driving pleasure.

California Proposition 65 Warning

This product contains or emits chemicals known to the State ofCalifornia to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.

Introduction

WARNING:

i

01/04/26 21:44:05 31S84640_002

－

－

－

－

－

－

To help you make informeddecisions about safety, we haveprovided operating procedures andother information on labels and inthis manual. This information alertsyou to potential hazards that couldhurt you or others.

You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms,including:

preceded by a safety alert symbol and one ofthree signal words: , , or .These signal words mean:

such as Driver and Passenger Safety.

This entire book is filled with important safety information please read itcarefully.

such as Important Safety Reminders or ImportantSafety Precautions.

Your safety, and the safety of others,is very important. And operating thiscar safely is an importantresponsibility.

Of course, it is not practical orpossible to warn you about all thehazards associated with operating ormaintaining your car. You must useyour own good judgement.

on the car.

how to use this car correctly and safely.

A Few Words About Safety

Safety Messages

Safety Section

Safety Headings

Safety Labels

Instructions

DANGER WARNING CAUTION

ii

You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLYHURT if you don’t follow instructions.

You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLYHURT if you don’t follow instructions.

You CAN be HURT if you don’t followinstructions.

01/04/26 21:44:17 31S84640_003

Turn to the beginning of each section for a complete list of subjects.

This section covers severalproblems motorists sometimesexperience, and details how to

handle them.

Tips on cleaning and protectingyour car. Also some things to lookfor if your car ever needs bodyrepairs.

The Maintenance Schedule showsyou when you need to take yourcar to the dealer. There is also alist of things to check andinstructions on how to check them.

The proper way to start the engine,shift the transmission, and park;plus what you need to know ifyou’re planning to tow a trailer.

What gasoline to use, how to

break-in your new car, and how toload luggage and other cargo.

How to operate the heating and airconditioning system, the audiosystem, and other conveniencefeatures.

Explains the purpose of eachinstrument panel indicator andgauge, and how to use the controlson the dashboard and steeringcolumn.

Important information about theproper use and care of your car’sseat belts, an overview of theSupplemental Restraint System,and valuable information on howto protect children with childrestraints.

A summary of information youneed when you pull up to the fuelpump.

How to order manuals and othertechnical literature.

A summary of the warrantiescovering your new Honda, andhow to contact us for any reason.Refer to your warranty manual fordetailed information.

ID numbers, dimensions, capaci-ties, and technical information.

Contents

Taking Care of the.......................Unexpected . 311

................Appearance Care . 303

......................Maintenance . 235

..............................Driving . 207

...................Before Driving . 193

Comfort and Convenience............................Features . 103

.....Instruments and Controls . 53

...............Your Car at a Glance . 2

....Driver and Passenger Safety . 5

Service Information Summary

.....................................Index . I

Authorized Manuals.........................(U.S. only) . 359

Warranty and CustomerRelations

........(U.S. and Canada only) . 355

.........Technical Information . 339

1

01/04/26 21:44:37 31S84640_004

Your Car at a Glance

2

DDOOOORR LLOOCCKKSSWWIITTCCHH

PPOOWWEERR WWIINNDDOOWWSSWWIITTCCHHEESS

HHOOOODD RREELLEEAASSEEHHAANNDDLLEE

MMIIRRRROORRCCOONNTTRROOLLSS

DDIIGGIITTAALL CCLLOOCCKK HHEEAATTIINNGG//CCOOOOLLIINNGGCCOONNTTRROOLL

AAUUDDIIOO SSYYSSTTEEMM

TTRRUUNNKK RREELLEEAASSEEHHAANNDDLLEE//FFUUEELL FFIILLLL DDOOOORR

((PP..7744))

((PP..9911))

((PP..9944))((PP..9966))

((PP..110044))

((PP..111199))

((PP..7799,, 119944)) ((PP..119966))

01/04/26 21:44:41 31S84640_005

Your Car at a Glance

3

WWIINNDDSSHHIIEELLDDWWIIPPEERRSS//WWAASSHHEERRSS

TTIILLTT AADDJJUUSSTTMMEENNTT HHOORRNN

HHAAZZAARRDD WWAARRNNIINNGG LLIIGGHHTTSS

CCRRUUIISSEE CCOONNTTRROOLLSS

RREEAARR WWIINNDDOOWW DDEEFFOOGGGGEERRIINNSSTTRRUUMMEENNTT PPAANNEELL BBRRIIGGHHTTNNEESSSS

MMOOOONNRROOOOFF SSWWIITTCCHH

CCRRUUIISSEE CCOONNTTRROOLL

HHEEAADDLLIIGGHHTTSS//TTUURRNN SSIIGGNNAALLSS

TTRRAACCTTIIOONN CCOONNTTRROOLLSSYYSSTTEEMM

((PP.. 6655))

((PP.. 9922))

((PP.. 222222))

((PP.. 118855))

((PP.. 6644,, 6666))

((PP.. 6666,, 6677,, 6688))((PP.. 6688))

((PP.. 6688))

((PP.. 118855))

((PP.. 6699)) ((PP.. 6633))

01/04/26 21:44:47 31S84640_006

4

01/04/26 21:44:49 31S84640_007

This section gives you importantinformation about how to protectyourself and your passengers. Itshows you how to use seat beltsproperly. It explains your Supple-mental Restraint System. And it tellsyou how to properly restrain infantsand children in your car.

.........Important Safety Precautions . 6.............Your Car’s Safety Features . 7

.......................................Seat Belts . 8...........................................Airbags . 9

.....................Seats & Seat-Backs . 10..........................Head Restraints . 10

..................................Door Locks . 10........Pre-Drive Safety Checklist . 11

............................Protecting Adults . 12.....1. Close and Lock the Doors . 12

...........2. Adjust the Front Seats . 13............3. Adjust the Seat-Backs . 14

...4. Adjust the Head Restraints . 155. Fasten and Position the Seat

.....................................Belts . 15....6. Adjust the Steering Wheel . 18

7. Maintain a Proper Sitting................................Position . 18

.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 19...Additional Safety Precautions . 20

........................Protecting Children . 21All Children Must Be

...............................Restrained . 21Children Should Sit in the Back

...........................................Seat . 22The Passenger’s Front Airbag

Poses Serious Risks to...............................Children . 22

If You Must Drive with Several...................................Children . 24

If a Child Requires Close..................................Attention . 25

...Additional Safety Precautions . 25General Guidelines for Using

...............................Child Seats . 26.......................Protecting Infants . 30

.........Protecting Small Children . 33.......Protecting Larger Children . 36

Using Child Seats with.....................................Tethers . 39

.............................Using LATCH . 40Additional Information About Your

.................................Seat Belts . 42..Seat Belt System Components . 42

......................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 42Automatic Seat Belt

...............................Tensioners . 43...............Seat Belt Maintenance . 44

Additional Information About...........................Your Airbags . 45

........................SRS Components . 45How Your Front Airbags

.........................................Work . 45...How Your Side Airbags Work . 47

How the SRS Indicator Light.......................................Works . 47

How the Side Airbag Off...........Indicator Light Works . 48

.............................Airbag Service . 50...Additional Safety Precautions . 50

.............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 51...................................Safety Labels . 52

Driver and Passenger Safety


5

01/04/26 21:44:55 31S84640_008

Excessive speed is a major factor incrash injuries and deaths. Generally,the higher the speed the greater therisk, but serious accidents can alsooccur at lower speeds. Never drivefaster than is safe for currentconditions, regardless of themaximum speed posted.

While airbags can save lives, theycan cause serious or fatal injuries tooccupants who sit too close to them,or are not properly restrained.Infants, young children, and shortadults are at the greatest risk. Besure to follow all instructions andwarnings in this manual. (See page

.)

Children are safest when they areproperly restrained in the back seat,not the front seat. A child who is toosmall for a seat belt must be properlyrestrained in a child safety seat. (Seepage .)

Having a tire blowout or amechanical failure can be extremelyhazardous. To reduce the possibilityof such problems, check your tirepressures and condition frequently,and perform all regularly scheduledmaintenance. (See page .)

You’ll find many safetyrecommendations throughout thissection, and throughout this manual.The recommendations on this pageare the ones we consider to be themost important.

A seat belt is your best protection inall types of collisions. Airbagssupplement seat belts, but airbagsare designed to inflate only in amoderate to severe frontal collision.So even though your car is equippedwith airbags, make sure you andyour passengers always wear yourseat belts, and wear them properly.(See page .)

Alcohol and driving don’t mix. Evenone drink can reduce your ability torespond to changing conditions, andyour reaction time gets worse withevery additional drink. So don’t drinkand drive, and don’t let your friendsdrink and drive, either.

7

15

21

240


Important Safety Precautions

Always Wear Your Seat Belt

Be Aware of Airbag Hazards Control Your Speed

Restrain All Children

Keep Your Car in Safe ConditionDon’t Drink and Drive

6

01/04/26 21:45:07 31S84640_009

＊＊

＊＊

Your car is equipped with manyfeatures that work together toprotect you and your passengersduring a crash.

Some safety features do not requireany action on your part. Theseinclude a strong steel frameworkthat forms a safety cage around thepassenger compartment; front andrear crush zones that are designed tocrumple and absorb energy during acrash; a collapsible steering column;and seat belt tensioners thatautomatically tighten the front seatbelts in the event of a crash.


Your Car’s Safety Features

7

((11)) ((44))

((55))((77))

((66))

((33))

((22))

((22))

((88))

((99)) ((88))

((77))

((1100))

:: IIff eeqquuiippppeedd

((11)) SSaaffeettyy CCaaggee((22)) CCrruusshh ZZoonneess((33)) SSeeaattss && SSeeaatt--BBaacckkss((44)) HHeeaadd RReessttrraaiinnttss((55)) CCoollllaappssiibbllee SStteeeerriinngg CCoolluummnn((66)) SSeeaatt BBeellttss((77)) FFrroonntt AAiirrbbaaggss((88)) SSiiddee AAiirrbbaaggss((99)) DDoooorr LLoocckkss((1100)) SSeeaatt BBeelltt TTeennssiioonneerrss

01/04/26 21:45:15 31S84640_010

In addition, most states and allCanadian provinces require you towear seat belts.

When properly worn, seat belts:

Keep you connected to the vehicleso you can take advantage of thecar’s built-in safety features.

Help protect you in almost everytype of crash, including frontal,side, and rear impacts androllovers.

For your safety, and the safety ofyour passengers, your car isequipped with seat belts in all seatingpositions.

Seat belts are the single mosteffective safety device for adults andlarger children. (Infants and smallerchildren must be properly restrainedin child seats.)

Not wearing a seat belt properlyincreases the chance of seriousinjury or death in a crash, eventhough your car has airbags.

Your seat belt system alsoincludes a light on the

instrument panel to remind you andyour passengers to fasten your seatbelts.

These safety features are designedto reduce the severity of injuries in acrash. However, you and yourpassengers can’t take full advantageof these safety features unless youremain sitting in a proper positionand

In fact, some safetyfeatures can contribute to injuries ifthey are not used properly.



Seat Belts

Why Wear Seat Belts

always wear your seat beltsproperly.

8

Not wearing a seat belt properlyincreases the chance of seriousinjury or death in a crash, evenif you have airbags.

Be sure you and yourpassengers always wear seatbelts and wear them properly.

01/04/26 21:45:26 31S84640_011

Your car also has side airbags to helpprotect the upper torso of the driveror a front seat passenger during amoderate to severe side impact.

The most important things you needto know about your airbags are:

Your car has a SupplementalRestraint System (SRS) with frontairbags to help protect the heads andchests of the driver and a front seatpassenger during a moderate tosevere frontal collision.

Of course, seat belts cannotcompletely protect you in everycrash. But in most cases, seat beltscan reduce your risk of seriousinjury.

Always wearyour seat belt, and make sure youwear it properly.

Help keep you from being thrownagainst the inside of the vehicleand against other occupants.

Keep you from being thrown outof the vehicle.

Help keep you in a good positionshould the airbags ever deploy. Agood position reduces the risk ofinjury from an inflating airbag, andallows you to get the bestadvantage from the airbag.

CONTINUED

Standard on V-6 and U.S. EX models.Optional on the U.S. DX, Value Package,LX, and SE models



Airbags

What you should do:

9

01/04/26 21:45:36 31S84640_012

Keeping your doors locked reducesthe chance of being thrown out ofthe car during a crash. It also helpsprevent occupants from accidentallyopening a door and falling out, andoutsiders from unexpectedly openingyour doors.

Head restraints can help protect youfrom whiplash and other injuries. Formaximum protection, the back ofyour head should rest against thecenter of the head restraint.

Move the frontseats as far back as possible, andkeep adjustable seat-backs in anupright position whenever the car ismoving.

Your car’s seats are designed to keepyou in a comfortable, uprightposition so you can take fulladvantage of the protection offeredby seat belts and the energyabsorbing materials in the seats.

How you adjust your seats and seat-backs can also affect your safety. Forexample, sitting too close to thesteering wheel or dashboardincreases the risk of you or yourpassenger being injured by strikingthe inside of the car, or by aninflating airbag.

Reclining a seat-back too far reducesthe seat belt’s effectiveness andincreases the chance that the seat’soccupant will slide under the seatbelt in a crash and be seriouslyinjured.

They are designed to supplementthe seat belts.

To do their job, airbags mustinflate with tremendous force andspeed. So while airbags help savelives, they can cause minor injuries,or more serious or even fatalinjuries if occupants are notproperly restrained or sittingproperly.

Always wearyour seat belt properly, and situpright and as far back as possiblefrom the steering wheel ordashboard.



Door Locks

Head Restraints

Seats & Seat-Backs What you should do:Airbags do not replace seat belts.

Airbags offer no protection in rearimpacts, rollovers, or minorfrontal or side collisions.

Airbags can pose serious hazards.

What you should do:

10

01/04/26 21:45:48 31S84640_013

All adults, and children who haveoutgrown child safety seats, arewearing their seat belts andwearing them properly (see page

).

Any infant or small child isproperly restrained in a child seatin the back seat (see page ).

To make sure you and yourpassengers get the maximumprotection from your car’s safetyfeatures, check the following eachtime before you drive away:

The rest of this section gives moredetailed information about how youcan maximize your safety.

Remember, however, that no safetysystem can prevent all injuries ordeaths that can occur in severecrashes, even when seat belts areproperly worn and the airbags deploy.

All cargo is properly stored orsecured (see page ).

All doors are closed and locked(see page ).

Head restraints are properlyadjusted (see page ).

Seat-backs are upright (see page).

Front seat occupants are sittingupright and as far back as possiblefrom the steering wheel anddashboard (see page ).

1215

21

13

14

15

204


Pre-Drive Safety Checklist


11

01/04/26 21:45:59 31S84640_014

The following pages provideinstructions on how to properlyprotect the driver and other adultoccupants.

These instructions also apply tochildren who have outgrown childseats and are large enough to wearlap/shoulder belts. (See page forimportant additional guidelines onhow to properly protect largerchildren.)

For security, locked doors canprevent an outsider fromunexpectedly opening a door whenyou come to a stop.

See page for how to lock thedoors.

For safety, locking the doors reducesthe chance that a passenger,especially a child, will open a doorwhile the car is moving andaccidentally fall out. It also reducesthe chance of someone being thrownout of the car during a crash.

Your car has a door monitor light onthe instrument panel to indicatewhen a specific door is not tightlyclosed.

After everyone has entered the car,be sure the doors are closed andlocked.

36

73


Protecting Adults

Introduction Close and Lock the Doors1.

12

01/04/26 21:46:10 31S84640_015

Any driver who sits too close to thesteering wheel is at risk of beingseriously injured or killed by strikingthe steering wheel or from beingstruck by an inflating front airbagduring a crash.

To reduce the chance of injury, wearyour seat belt properly, sit uprightwith your back against the seat andmove the seat away from thesteering wheel to the farthestdistance that allows you to maintainfull control of the car.

The National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration and TransportCanada recommend that driversadjust the seat so the center of thechest is at least 10 inches away fromthe center of the steering wheel.Also make sure your front seatpassenger moves the seat as far tothe rear as possible.

Most shorter drivers can get farenough away from the steeringwheel and still reach the pedals.However, if you are concerned aboutsitting too close, we recommend thatyou investigate whether some typeof adaptive equipment may help.

Once your seat is adjusted correctly,rock it back and forth to make surethe seat is locked in position.

See page for how to adjust thefront seats.

82

Protecting Adults

Adjust the Front Seats2.

Driver and Passenger Safety 13

Sitting too close to a frontairbag can result in seriousinjury or death if the frontairbags inflate.

Always sit as far back from thefront airbags as possible.

01/04/26 21:46:20 31S84640_016

A front passenger should also adjustthe seat-back to an upright position,but as far from the dashboard aspossible. A passenger who sits tooclose to the dashboard could beinjured if the front airbag inflates.

Reclining a seat-back so that theshoulder part of the belt no longerrests against the occupant’s chestreduces the protective capability ofthe belt. It also increases the chanceof sliding under the belt in a crashand being seriously injured. Thefarther a seat-back is reclined, thegreater the risk of injury.

See page for how to adjust seat-backs.

Adjust the driver’s seat-back to acomfortable, upright position,leaving ample space between yourchest and the airbag cover in thecenter of the steering wheel. If yousit too close to the steering wheel,you could be injured if the frontairbag inflates.

82

Protecting Adults


Adjust the Seat-Backs3.

14

Reclining the seat-back too farcan result in serious injury ordeath in a crash.

Adjust the seat-back to anupright position and sit wellback in the seat.

01/04/26 21:46:29 31S84640_017

Before driving, make sure everyonewith an adjustable head restraint hasproperly positioned the headrestraint. The restraint should bepositioned so the back of theoccupant’s head rests against thecenter of the restraint. A tallerperson should adjust the restraint ashigh as possible.

Insert the latch plate into the buckle,then tug on the belt to make sure thebelt is securely latched. Also checkthat the belt is not twisted, because atwisted belt can cause seriousinjuries in a crash.

Properly adjusted head restraintswill help protect occupants fromwhiplash and other crash injuries.

See page for how to adjust thehead restraints.

86

CONTINUED

Adjust the Head Restraints Fasten and Position the SeatBelts

4. 5.


Protecting Adults

15

Improperly positioning headrestraints reduces theireffectiveness and you can beseriously injured in a crash.

Make sure head restraints arein place and positioned properlybefore driving.

01/04/26 21:46:38 31S84640_018

Position the lap part of the belt aslow as possible across your hips,then pull up on the shoulder part ofthe belt so the lap part fits snugly.This lets your strong pelvic bonestake the force of a crash and reducesthe chance of internal injuries.

If necessary, pull up on the belt againto remove any slack from theshoulder part, then check that thebelt rests across the center of yourchest and over your shoulder. This

spreads the forces of a crash overthe strongest bones in your upperbody.

If the seat belt touches or crossesyour neck, or if it crosses your arminstead of your shoulder, you need toadjust the seat belt anchor height.

Protecting Adults

Driver and Passenger Safety16

Improperly positioning the seatbelts can cause serious injuryor death in a crash.

Make sure all seat belts areproperly positioned beforedriving.

01/04/26 21:46:46 31S84640_019

To adjust the height of a front seatbelt anchor, squeeze the two releasebuttons and slide the anchor up ordown as needed (it has fourpositions).

This could causevery serious injuries in a crash.

If a seat belt does not seem to workas it should, it may not protect theoccupant in a crash.

Anyone using a seat belt that isnot working properly can beseriously injured or killed. Have yourHonda dealer check the belt as soonas possible.

See page for additionalinformation about your seat beltsystem and how to take care of yourbelts.

42

Protecting Adults


Never place the shoulder portion of alap/shoulder belt under your arm orbehind your back.

No one shouldsit in a seat with an inoperative seatbelt.

17

01/04/26 21:46:53 31S84640_020

Adjust the steering wheel, if needed,so that the wheel points toward yourchest, not toward your face.

Pointing the steering wheel towardyour chest provides optimalprotection from the airbag.

See page for how to adjust thesteering wheel.

After all occupants have adjustedtheir seats and put on seat belts, it isvery important that they continue tosit upright, well back in their seats,with their feet on the floor, until thecar is parked and the engine is off.

Sitting improperly can increase thechance of injury during a crash. Forexample, if an occupant slouches,lies down, turns sideways, sitsforward, leans forward or sideways,or puts one or both feet up, thechance of injury during a crash isgreatly increased.

In addition, an occupant who is out ofposition in the front seat can beseriously or fatally injured bystriking interior parts of the car, orby being struck by an inflating frontairbag. Being struck by an inflatingside airbag can result in possiblyserious injuries.

69


Protecting Adults

Adjust the Steering Wheel Maintain a Proper SittingPosition

6. 7.

18

Sitting improperly or out ofposition can result in seriousinjury or death in a crash.

Always sit upright, well back inthe seat, with your feet on thefloor.

01/04/26 21:47:05 31S84640_021

Each time you have a check-up, askyour doctor if it’s okay for you todrive.

Remember to keep the lap portion ofthe belt as low as possible acrossyour hips.

Because protecting the mother is thebest way to protect her unborn child,a pregnant woman should alwayswear a seat belt whenever she drivesor rides in a vehicle.

Pregnant women should also situpright and as far back as possiblefrom the steering wheel ordashboard. This will reduce the riskof injuries to both the mother andher unborn child that can be causedby a crash or an inflating airbag.

Remember, to get the bestprotection from your car’s airbagsand other safety features, you mustsit properly and wear your seat beltproperly.

Protecting Adults

Advice for Pregnant Women


01/04/26 21:47:13 31S84640_022

If they do, theycould be very seriously injured in acrash.

Devices intended to improveoccupant comfort or reposition theshoulder part of a seat belt canseverely compromise theprotective capability of the seatbelt and increase the chance ofserious injury in a crash.

Carrying hard or sharpobjects on your lap, or driving witha pipe or other sharp object inyour mouth, can result in injuriesif your front airbag inflates.

Any objectattached to or placed on the coversmarked ‘‘SRS AIRBAG’’ in thecenter of the steering wheel andon top of the dashboard couldinterfere with the proper operationof the airbags. Or, if the airbagsinflate, the objects could bepropelled inside the car and hurtsomeone.

If yourhands or arms are close to theairbag cover in the center of thesteering wheel or on top of thedashboard, they could be injured ifthe front airbags inflate.

If a side airbaginflates, a cup holder or other hardobject attached on or near thedoor could be propelled inside thecar and hurt someone.

Protecting Adults


Additional Safety PrecautionsTwo people should never use thesame seat belt.

Do not put any accessories on seatbelts.

Do not place hard or sharp objectsbetween yourself and a frontairbag.

Do not attach or place objects onthe front airbag covers.

Keep your hands and arms awayfrom the airbag covers.

On models with side airbags, donot attach hard objects on or neara front door.

20

01/04/26 21:47:21 31S84640_023

(See page.)

To reduce the number of childdeaths and injuries, every state andCanadian province requires thatinfants and children be restrainedwhenever they ride in a vehicle.

Each year, many children are injuredor killed in vehicle crashes becausethey are either unrestrained or notproperly restrained. In fact, vehicleaccidents are the number one causeof death of children ages 12 andunder.

Children depend on adults to protectthem. However, despite their bestintentions, many parents and otheradults may not know how toprotect young passengers.

So if you have children, or if you everneed to drive with a grandchild orother children in your car, be sure toread this section.

(See page.)

26

36

properly

CONTINUED


Protecting Children

All Children Must Be Restrained

Any child who is too small to wear aseat belt should be properlyrestrained in a child seat.

A larger child should always berestrained with a seat belt.

21

Children who are unrestrainedor improperly restrained can beseriously injured or killed in acrash.

Any child too small for a seatbelt should be properlyrestrained in a child seat. Alarger child should be properlyrestrained with a seat belt.

01/04/26 21:47:33 31S84640_024

If you are not wearing aseat belt in a crash, you could bethrown forward into thedashboard and crush the child.

If you are wearing a seat belt, thechild can be torn from your armsduring a crash. For example, ifyour car crashes into a parkedvehicle at 30 mph (48 km/h), a20-lb (9 kg) infant will become a600-lb (275 kg) force, and you willnot be able to hold on.

During acrash, the belt could press deepinto the child and cause veryserious injuries.

According to accident statistics,children of all ages and sizes aresafer when they are restrained in theback seat, not the front seat. TheNational Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration and TransportCanada recommend that all childrenages 12 and under be properlyrestrained in the back seat.

In the back seat, children are lesslikely to be injured by striking hardinterior parts during a collision orhard braking. Also, children cannotbe injured by an inflating airbagwhen they ride in the back.

Front airbags have been designed tohelp protect adults in a moderate tosevere frontal collision. To do this,the passenger’s front airbag is quitelarge, and it inflates with tremendousspeed.

Ifthe airbag inflates, it can hit the backof the child seat with enough forceto kill or very seriously injure aninfant.


Protecting Children

Additional Precautions to ParentsNever hold an infant or child onyour lap.

Never put a seat belt over yourselfand an infant or child.

InfantsNever put a rear-facing child seat inthe front seat of a vehicle equippedwith a passenger’s front airbag.

Children Should Sit in the BackSeat

The Passenger’s Front AirbagPoses Serious Risks to Children

22

01/04/26 21:47:46 31S84640_025

If the vehicle seat istoo far forward, or the child’s head isthrown forward during a collision, aninflating front airbag can strike thechild with enough force to kill orvery seriously injure a small child.

Whenever possible,larger children should sit in the backseat, properly restrained with a seatbelt. (See page for importantinformation about protecting largerchildren.)

To remind you of the passenger’sfront airbag hazards, and thatchildren must be properly restrainedin the back seat, your car haswarning labels on the dashboard andon the driver’s and front passenger’svisors. Please read and follow theinstructions on these labels.

36

Small ChildrenPlacing a forward-facing child seat inthe front seat of a vehicle equippedwith a passenger’s front airbag canbe hazardous.

Larger ChildrenChildren who have outgrown childseats are also at risk of being injuredor killed by an inflating passenger’sfront airbag.

U.S. Models

Protecting Children


01/04/26 21:47:58 31S84640_026

To remind you of the front airbaghazards, your car has warning labelson the driver’s and front passenger’svisors. Please read and follow theinstructions on these labels.

Your car has three seating positionsin the back seat where children canbe properly restrained.

If you ever have to carry more thanthree children in your car:

Place the largest child in the frontseat, provided the child is largeenough to wear a seat beltproperly (see page ).

Move the vehicle seat as far to therear as possible (see page ).

Have the child sit upright and wellback in the seat (see page ).

Make sure the seat belt is properlypositioned and secured (see page

).

36

13

18

15

Protecting Children


If You Must Drive with SeveralChildren

Canadian Models

24

01/04/26 21:48:13 31S84640_027

Many parents say they prefer to putan infant or small child in the frontpassenger seat so they can watch thechild, or because the child requiresattention.

Placing a child in the front seatexposes the child to hazards fromthe passenger’s front airbag, andpaying close attention to a childdistracts the driver from theimportant tasks of driving, placingboth of you at risk.

If a child requires physical attentionor frequent visual contact, westrongly recommend that anotheradult ride with the child in the backseat. The back seat is far safer for achild than the front.

Using this feature willprevent children from opening thedoors and accidentally falling out(see page ).

Usingthis feature will prevent childrenfrom playing with the windows,which could expose them tohazards or distract the driver (seepage ).

Leaving children withoutadult supervision is illegal in moststates and Canadian provinces,and can be very hazardous. Forexample, infants and smallchildren left in a vehicle on a hotday can die from heatstroke. Andchildren left alone with the key inthe ignition can accidentally setthe vehicle in motion, possiblyinjuring themselves or others.

79

91

CONTINUED

Protecting Children


If a Child Requires CloseAttention

Additional Safety PrecautionsUse childproof door locks toprevent children from opening thedoors.

Use the main power windowswitch to prevent children fromopening the rear windows.

Do not leave children alone in yourvehicle.

25

01/04/26 21:48:23 31S84640_028

Children up to about oneyear old should be restrained in arear-facing, reclining child seat. Onlya rear-facing seat provides theproper support to protect an infant’shead, neck, and back. See page

for additional information onprotecting infants.

The following pages give generalguidelines for selecting and installingchild seats for infants and smallchildren.

To provide proper protection, a childseat should meet threerequirements:

The child seat shouldmeet Federal Motor VehicleSafety Standard 213 (FMVSS 213)or Canadian Motor Vehicle SafetyStandard 213 (CMVSS 213). Lookfor the manufacturer’s statementof compliance on the box and seat.

Childrenwho play in cars can accidentallyget trapped inside the trunk.Teach your children not to play inor around cars. Know how tooperate the emergency trunkopener (US models only) anddecide if your children should beshown how to use this feature (seepage ).

Even very youngchildren learn how to unlockvehicle doors, turn on the ignition,and open the trunk, which canlead to accidental injury or death.

80

30

The child seat should be of theproper type and size to fit the child.

Infants:

Selecting a Child Seat

The child seat should meet safetystandards.

Lock all doors and the trunk whenyour car is not in use.

Keep car keys and remotetransmitters out of the reach ofchildren.

2.1.

General Guidelines for UsingChild Seats

Protecting Children


01/04/26 21:48:34 31S84640_029

Before purchasing a child seat, werecommend that parents test thechild seat in the specific vehicleseating position (or positions) wherethey intend to use the seat. If apreviously purchased child seat doesnot fit, you may need to buy adifferent one that will fit.

Due to variations in the design ofchild seats, vehicle seats, and seatbelts, all child seats will not fit allvehicle seating positions.

A child who is toolarge for a rear-facing child seat, andwho can sit up without support,should be restrained in a forward-facing child seat. See page foradditional information on protectingsmall children.

However, Honda is confident thatone or more child seat models can fitand be properly installed in allrecommended seating positions inyour car.

33

The child seat should fit thevehicle seating position (orpositions) where it will be used.

Small Children:

3.

Protecting Children


01/04/26 21:48:43 31S84640_030

This page briefly summarizesHonda’s recommendations on whereto place rear-facing and forward-facing child seats in your car.

Never in the front seat, dueto the front airbag hazard.

Not recommended,due to the front airbag hazard. If asmall child must ride in front,move the vehicle seat to the rear-most position and secure a front-facing child seat with the seat belt.(see page ).

The passenger’s front airbaginflates with enough force to killor seriously injure an infant in arear-facing child seat.

A small child in a forward-facingchild seat is also at risk. If thevehicle seat is too far forward,or the child’s head is thrownforward during a collision, aninflating front airbag can kill orseriously injure the child.

If a small child must ride in thefront, follow the instructionsprovided in this section.

Recommended positions.Properly secure a rear-facingchild seat (see page ).

Recommendedpositions. Properly secure a front-facing child seat (see page ).

33

30

33

Placing a Child Seat Front Passenger’s SeatInfants:

Small children:

Back SeatsInfants:

Small children:

Airbags Pose SeriousRisks to Children

Protecting Children


01/04/26 21:48:55 31S84640_031

After selecting a proper child seat,and a good position to install the seat,there are three main steps ininstalling the seat:

When you are not using a child seat,either remove it and store it in a safeplace, or make sure it is properlysecured. An unsecured child seat canbe thrown around the car during acrash or sudden stop and injuresomeone.

Make sure the child is properlystrapped in the child seataccording to the child seat maker’sinstructions. A child who is notproperly secured in a child seatcan be thrown out of the seat in acrash and be seriously injured.

If the child seat is not secure, tryinstalling it in a different seatingposition, or use a different style ofchild seat that can be firmly securedin the desired seating position.

However, a child seat does not needto be ‘‘rock solid.’’ In some vehiclesor seating positions, it may bedifficult to install a child seat so thatit does not move at all. Some side-to-side or back-and-forth movement canbe expected and should not reducethe child seat’s effectiveness.

To provide security during normaldriving maneuvers as well as duringa collision, we recommend thatparents secure a child seat as firmlyas possible.

After installing a childseat, push and pull the seatforward and from side to side toverify that it is secure.

All child seats aredesigned to be secured to the carwith the lap part of a lap/shoulderbelt. Some child seats can besecured to the vehicle’s LATCHanchorage system instead. A childwhose seat is not properly securedto the car can be endangered in acrash. See pages , and forinstructions on how to properlysecure child seats in this car.

31 34 40

Installing a Child Seat

Storing a Child Seat

Secure the child in the child seat.

Make sure the child seat is firmlysecured.

Properly secure the child seat tothe car.

1.

2.

3.

Protecting Children


01/04/26 21:49:07 31S84640_032

Only a rear-facing child seat providesproper support for a baby’s head,neck, and back. Infants up to aboutone year of age must be restrained ina rear-facing child seat.

In this car, a rear-facing child seatcan be placed in any seating positionin the back seat, but not in the frontseat.

Two types of seats may be used: aseat designed exclusively for infants,or a convertible seat used in the rear-facing, reclining mode.

We recommend that an infant berestrained in a rear-facing child seatuntil the infant reaches the seatmaker’s weight or height limit and isable to sit up without support.

If the passenger’sfront airbag inflates, it can hit theback of the child seat with enoughforce to kill or seriously injure aninfant. If an infant must be closelywatched, we recommend thatanother adult sit in the back seatwith the baby.

If placedfacing forward, an infant could bevery seriously injured during afrontal collision.

Protecting Infants

Child Seat Type

Rear-Facing Child Seat Placement

Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front seat.

Do not put a rear-facing child seat ina forward-facing position.

Protecting Children


Placing a rear-facing child seatin the front seat can result inserious injury or death if thepassenger’s front airbag inflates.

Always place a rear-facing childseat in the back seat, not thefront.

01/04/26 21:49:18 31S84640_033

With the child seat in the desiredback seating position, route thebelt through the child seataccording to the seat maker’sinstructions, then insert the latchplate into the buckle.

When properly installed, a rear-facing child seat may prevent thedriver or a front-seat passenger frommoving the seat as far back asrecommended (see page ). Or itmay prevent them from locking theseat-back in the desired uprightposition (see page ).

In either case, we recommend thatyou place the child seat directlybehind the front passenger seat,move the front seat as far forward asneeded, and leave it unoccupied. Oryou may wish to get a smaller childseat that allows you to safely carry afront passenger.

The lap/shoulder belts in the backseats have a locking mechanism thatmust be activated to secure a childseat.

The following pages provideinstructions and tips on how tosecure a rear-facing child seat withthis type of seat belt.

If you have a child seat designed toattach to the vehicle’s LATCHanchorage system, follow theinstructions on page .

1.

13

14

40

CONTINUED

Protecting Children


Rear-Facing Child Seat Installation

31

01/04/26 21:49:29 31S84640_034

To activate the lockable retractor,slowly pull the shoulder part of thebelt all the way out until it stops,then let the belt feed back into theretractor (you might hear aclicking noise as the belt retracts).

After the belt has retracted, tug onit. If the belt is locked, you will notbe able to pull it out. If you can pullthe belt out, it is not locked andyou will need to repeat these steps.

After confirming that the belt islocked, grab the shoulder part ofthe belt near the buckle and pullup to remove any slack from thelap part of the belt. Remember, ifthe lap part of the belt is not tight,the child seat will not be secure.To remove slack, it may help toput weight on the child seat, orpush on the back of the seat, whilepulling up on the belt.

Push and pull the child seatforward and from side to side toverify that it is secure enough tostay upright during normal drivingmaneuvers. If the child seat is notsecure, unlatch the belt, allow it toretract fully, then repeat thesesteps.

To deactivate the lockingmechanism and remove a child seat,unlatch the buckle, unroute the seatbelt, and let the belt fully retract.

2.

3.

4. 5.

Protecting Children


01/04/26 21:49:38 31S84640_035

CONTINUED

To achieve the desired recliningangle, it may help to put a rolled uptowel under the toe of the child seat,as shown.

For proper protection, an infant mustride in a reclined, or semi-reclinedposition. To determine the properreclining angle, check with the baby’sdoctor or follow the seat maker’srecommendations.

We also recommend that a smallchild stay in the child seat as long aspossible, until the child reaches theweight or height limit for the seat.

In this car, the best place to install aforward-facing child seat is in one ofthe seating positions in the back seat.

If the vehicle seat istoo far forward, or the child’s head isthrown forward during a collision, aninflating front airbag can strike thechild with enough force to causevery serious or fatal injuries. If asmall child must be closely watched,we recommend that another adult sitin the back seat with the child.

A child who can sit up withoutsupport, and who fits within the childseat maker’s weight and heightlimits, should be restrained in aforward-facing, upright child seat.

Of the different seats available, werecommend those that have a five-point harness system as shown.

Protecting Children


Rear-Facing Child Seat InstallationTips

Child Seat Placement

Placing a forward-facing child seat inthe front seat of a vehicle equippedwith a passenger’s front airbag canbe hazardous.

Child Seat Type

Protecting Small Children

33

01/04/26 21:49:51 31S84640_036

If it is necessary to put a forward-facing child seat in the front, movethe vehicle seat as far to the rear aspossible, be sure the child seat isfirmly secured to the car, and thechild is properly strapped in the seat.

The lap/shoulder belts in the backand front passenger seating positionshave a locking mechanism that mustbe activated to secure a child seat.

With the child seat in the desiredseating position, route the beltthrough the child seat accordingto the seat maker’s instructions,then insert the latch plate into thebuckle.

The following pages provideinstructions on how to secure aforward-facing child seat with thistype of seat belt.

If you have a child seat designed toattach to the vehicle’s LATCHanchorage system, follow theinstructions on page .

1.40

Child Seat Installation

Protecting Children


Improperly placing a forward-facing child seat in the frontseat can result in serious injuryor death if the front airbagsinflate.

If you must place a forward-facing child seat in front, movethe vehicle seat as far back aspossible and properly restrainthe child.

01/04/26 21:50:01 31S84640_037

To activate the lockable retractor,slowly pull the shoulder part of thebelt all the way out until it stops,then let the belt feed back into theretractor (you might hear aclicking noise as the belt retracts).

After the belt has retracted, tug onit. If the belt is locked, you will notbe able to pull it out. If you can pullthe belt out, it is not locked andyou will need to repeat these steps.

After confirming that the belt islocked, grab the shoulder part ofthe belt near the buckle and pullup to remove any slack from thelap part of the belt. Remember, ifthe lap part of the belt is not tight,the child seat will not be secure. Itmay help to put weight on thechild seat, or push on the back ofthe seat, while pulling up on thebelt.

Push and pull the child seatforward and from side to side toverify that it is secure enough tostay upright during normal drivingmaneuvers. If the child seat is notsecure, unlatch the belt, allow it toretract fully, then repeat thesesteps.

To deactivate the lockingmechanism in order to remove achild seat, unlatch the buckle,unroute the seat belt, and let the beltfully retract.

2.

3.

4. 5.

Protecting Children


01/04/26 21:50:11 31S84640_038

When a child reaches therecommended weight or height limitfor a forward-facing child seat, thechild should sit in the back seat andwear a lap/shoulder belt.

If a child is too short for the shoulderpart of the belt to properly fit, werecommend that the child use abooster seat until the child is tallenough to use the seat belt without abooster.

The following pages giveinstructions on how to check properseat belt fit, what kind of boosterseat to use if one is needed, andimportant precautions for a childwho must sit in the front seat.

To determine if a lap/shoulder beltproperly fits a child, have the childput on the seat belt. Follow theinstructions on page . Then checkhow the belt fits.

If the shoulder part of the belt restsover the child’s collarbone andagainst the center of the chest, asshown, the child is large enough towear the seat belt.

16

Checking Seat Belt Fit

Protecting Children


Protecting Larger Children

36

Allowing a larger child to sitimproperly in the front seat canresult in injury or death if thepassenger’s front airbag inflates.

If a larger child must sit in front,make sure the child moves theseat as far back as possibleand wears the seat belt properly.

01/04/26 21:50:22 31S84640_039

CONTINUED

Whichever style you select, followthe booster seat maker’s instructions.

However, if the belt touches orcrosses the child’s neck, the childneeds to use a booster seat.

This could result inserious neck injuries during a crash.

If a child needs a booster seat, werecommend choosing a style thatallows the child to use the lap/shoulder belt directly, without ashield, as shown.

This could causevery serious injuries during a crash.It also increases the chance that thechild will slide under the belt in acrash and be injured.

Devices intended to improveoccupant comfort or reposition theshoulder part of a seat belt, severelycompromise the protective capabilityof the seat belt and increase thechance of serious injury in a crash.

If they do, they couldbe very seriously injured in a crash.

Protecting Children


Using a Booster Seat

Do not let a child wear a seat beltacross the neck.

Do not let a child put the shoulderpart of a seat belt behind the back orunder the arm.

Do not put any accessories on a seatbelt.

Two children should never use thesame seat belt.

37

01/04/26 21:50:33 31S84640_040

The National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration and TransportCanada recommend that all childrenages 12 and under be properlyrestrained in a back seat.

The back seat is the safest place fora child of any age or size.

A child may continue using a boosterseat until the tops of the ears areeven with the top of the seat-back. Achild of this height should be tallenough to use the lap/shoulder beltwithout a booster.

Physically, a child must be largeenough for the lap/shoulder belt toproperly fit over the hips, chest, andshoulder (see pages and ). Ifthe seat belt does not fit properly,the child should not sit in the front.

To safely ride in front, a child mustbe able to follow the rules, includingsitting properly and wearing the seatbelt properly throughout a ride.

Of course, children vary widely. Andwhile age may be one indicator ofwhen a child can safely ride in thefront, there are other importantfactors you should consider.

In addition, the passenger’s frontairbag poses serious risks to children.If the seat is too far forward, or thechild’s head is thrown forwardduring a collision, or the child isunrestrained or out of position, aninflating front airbag can kill orseriously injure the child.

The side airbag also poses risks. Ifany part of a larger child’s body is inthe path of a deploying airbag, thechild could receive possibly seriousinjuries.

16 36


Protecting Children

When Can a Larger Child Sit in Front

Maturity

Physical Size

38

01/04/26 21:50:44 31S84640_041

Move the vehicle seat to the rear-most position.

Check that the child’s seat belt isproperly positioned and secured.

If you decide that a child can safelyride up front, be sure to:

Carefully read the owner’s manualand make sure you understand allseat belt instructions and all safetyinformation.

Have the child sit up straight, backagainst the seat, and feet on ornear the floor.

Supervise the child. Even maturechildren sometimes need to bereminded to fasten the seat beltsor sit properly.

Your car has three tether anchoragepoints under the rear window forsecuring a tether-style child seat tothe car.

Since a tether can provide additionalsecurity, we recommend using atether whenever one is required oravailable.

CONTINUED

Using Child Seats with Tethers

Protecting Children


01/04/26 21:50:55 31S84640_042

Attach the tether strap hook to thetether anchorage point and tightenthe strap according to the child seatmaker’s instructions.

Your car is equipped with LATCH(Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren) at the outer rear seats.The lower anchors are locatedbetween the seat-back and seatbottom and are only to be used witha child seat designed for use withLATCH.

The exact location of each loweranchor is marked with a small circleabove the lower anchor point.

To install a LATCH-compatible childseat:

Move the seat belt buckle orcenter seat belt away from thelower anchor.

Make sure there are no foreignobjects around the anchors.Foreign objects could get in theway of a secure connectionbetween the child seat and theanchors.

1.

2.

Protecting Children


Using LATCH

40

LLOOWWEERR AANNCCHHOORRSS

01/04/26 21:51:05 31S84640_043

Put the child seat in the rear leftor right vehicle seat and attach thechild seat to the lower anchoragesaccording to the child seat maker’sinstructions.

Attach the tether strap hook to thetether anchorage point and tightenthe strap according to the childseat maker’s instructions.

Push and pull the child seatforward and from side to side toverify that it is secure enough tostay upright during normal drivingmaneuvers.

Follow the child seat maker’sinstructions for any additionaladvice on adjusting or tighteningthe fit.

3. 4. 5.

6.

Protecting Children


FFlleexxiibbllee ttyyppeeRRiiggiidd ttyyppee

01/04/26 21:51:14 31S84640_044

This seat belt has a single belt thatgoes over your shoulder, across yourchest and across your hips. The seat belts in all seating positions

except the driver’s have an additionallocking mechanism that must beactivated to secure a child seat. (Seepages and for instructions onhow to secure child seats with thistype of seat belt.)

All seat belts have an emergencylocking retractor. In normal driving,the retractor lets you move freely inyour seat while it keeps sometension on the belt. During a collisionor sudden stop, the retractorautomatically locks the belt to helprestrain your body.

Guide the belt across your body tothe door pillar. After exiting the car,be sure the belt is out of the way andwill not get closed in the door.

To unlock the belt, push the redPRESS button on the buckle.

To fasten the belt, insert the latchplate into the buckle, then tug on thebelt to make sure the buckle islatched.

Your seat belt system includes lap/shoulder belts in all five seatingpositions. The front seat belts arealso equipped with automatic seatbelt tensioners.

The seat belt system alsoincludes a light on the

instrument panel to remind you andyour passengers to fasten your belts.If the driver’s seat belt is notfastened before the ignition is turnedON (II), the light will come on and abeeper will also sound. The beeperwill stop after a few seconds, but thelight will stay on until the driver’sseat belt is fastened.

31 34

Seat Belt System Components Lap/Shoulder Belt

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts


01/04/26 21:51:24 31S84640_045

See page for instructions on howto wear the lap/shoulder beltproperly.

To deactivate the lockingmechanism, unlatch the buckle andlet the seat belt fully retract. Torefasten the belt, pull it out only asfar as needed.

If the shoulder part of the belt ispulled all the way out, the lockingmechanism will activate. The beltwill retract, but it will not allow thepassenger to move freely.

For added protection, the front seatbelts are equipped with automaticseat belt tensioners. When activated,the tensioners immediately tightenthe belts to help hold the driver anda front passenger in place.

The tensioners are designed toactivate primarily in frontal collisions.The tensioners are independent ofthe airbag system, so they can beactivated during a collision that

might not cause the airbags todeploy. In this case, the airbagswould not be needed but theadditional seat belt tension can behelpful.

The tensioners will be activated in acollision severe enough to cause thefront airbags to inflate.

When the tensioners are activated,the seat belts will remain tight untilthey are unbuckled in the normalway.

The SRS indicator light willcome on if there is a

problem with your automatic seatbelt tensioners (see page ).

15

47



Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners

43

01/04/26 21:51:35 31S84640_046

For safety, you should check thecondition of your seat belts regularly.

Pull each belt out fully and look forfrays, cuts, burns, and wear. Checkthat the latches work smoothly andthat the lap/shoulder belts retracteasily. Any belt not in good conditionor not working properly will notprovide good protection and shouldbe replaced as soon as possible.

Honda provides a lifetime warrantyon seat belts. Honda will repair orreplace any seat belt component thatfails to function properly duringnormal use. Please see your

booklet fordetails.

Automatic seat belt tensioners thatdeployed during a crash must bereplaced.

For information on how to clean yourseat belts, see page .

If a seat belt is worn during a crash,it must be replaced by the dealer. Abelt that has been worn during acrash may not provide the same levelof protection in a subsequent crash.The dealer should also inspect theanchors for damage and replacethem if needed.

293

HondaWarranty Information



Seat Belt Maintenance

U.S. Models

44

Not checking or maintainingseat belts can result in seriousinjury or death if the seat beltsdo not work properly whenneeded.

Check your seat belts regularlyand have any problemcorrected as soon as possible.

01/04/26 21:51:46 31S84640_047

Your Supplemental Restraint System(SRS) includes:

Two front airbags. The driver’sairbag is stored in the center ofthe steering wheel; the frontpassenger’s airbag is stored in thedashboard. Both are marked ‘‘SRSAIRBAG.’’

If you ever have a moderate tosevere frontal collision, the sensorswill detect the vehicle’s rapiddeceleration. If the rate ofdeceleration is high enough, thecontrol unit will instantly inflate thefront airbags.

Emergency backup power in caseyour car’s electrical system isdisconnected in a crash.

An indicator light on theinstrument panel that alerts you toa possible problem with thesystem (see page ).

A sophisticated electronic systemthat continually monitors andrecords information about thesensors, the control unit, theairbag activators, and driver andpassenger seat belt use when theignition is ON (II).

Automatic seat belt tensionersthat tighten the front seat beltsduring a moderate to severefrontal collision.

Sensors that can detect amoderate to severe frontalcollision.

47

CONTINUED

SRS Components How Your Front Airbags Work


Additional Information About Your Airbags

45

01/04/26 21:51:59 31S84640_048

The total time for inflation anddeflation is approximately one-tenthof a second, so fast that mostoccupants are not aware that theairbags deployed until they see themlying in their laps.

After a crash, you may see whatlooks like smoke. This is actuallypowder from the airbag’s surface.Although the powder is not harmful,people with respiratory problemsmay experience some temporarydiscomfort. If this occurs, get out ofthe car as soon as it is safe to do so.

For additional information on howyour airbags work, see the booklettitled

that came with yourowner’s manual.

U.S. Owners:

Canadian Owners:For additional information on howyour airbags work, ask your dealerfor a copy of the booklet titled

This can occur when the severity ofa collision is at the margin, orthreshold, that determines whetheror not the airbags will deploy. Insuch cases, the seat belt will providesufficient protection, and thesupplemental protection offered bythe airbag would be minimal.

Since both airbags use the samesensors, both airbags normallyinflate at the same time. However, itis possible for only one airbag toinflate.

After inflating, the front airbagsimmediately deflate, so they won’tinterfere with the driver’s visibility,or the ability to steer or operateother controls.

During a frontal crash, your seatbelts help restrain your lower bodyand torso. Your airbag provides acushion to help restrain and protectyour head and chest.

SRS: What You Need to KnowAbout Airbags

SRS:What You Need to Know About Airbags.



46

01/04/26 21:52:10 31S84640_049

Some models are equipped with sideairbags for the driver and a frontseat passenger. The airbags arestored in the outer edges of the frontseat-backs, and both are marked‘‘SIDE AIRBAG.’’

If you ever have a moderate tosevere side impact, the sensors willdetect rapid deceleration and signalthe control unit to instantly inflateeither the driver’s or the passenger’sside airbag.

Only one airbag will deploy during aside impact. If the impact is on thepassenger’s side, the passenger’sside airbag will deploy even if thereis no passenger.

To get the best protection from theside airbags, front seat occupantsshould wear their seat belts and situpright and well back in their seats.

When you turn the ignition ON (II),this indicator will light briefly thengo out. This tells you that the systemis working properly.

The purpose of the SRSindicator light is to alert

you to a potential problem with yourfront airbags. On cars with sideairbags, this light will also alert youto a potential problem with yourautomatic seat belt tensioners (page

); or your side airbags orpassenger’s side airbag automaticcutoff system (page ).

43

48

CONTINUED

How Your Side Airbags Work How the SRS Indicator LightWorks



01/04/26 21:52:22 31S84640_050

If the light comes on at any othertime, or does not come on at all, youshould have the system checked byyour dealer. For example:

If the SRS indicator light does notcome on after you turn the ignitionON (II).

If the light stays on after theengine starts.

If the light comes on or flashes onand off while you drive.

If you see any of these indications,your front or side airbags may notdeploy, your passenger’s side airbagautomatic cutoff system may notwork properly, or your seat belttensioners may not work when youneed them. See your Honda dealeras soon as possible.

This light alerts you thatthe passenger’s side airbag

has been automatically shut off.

To reduce the risk of injury from aninflating side airbag, your car has anautomatic cutoff system for thepassenger’s side airbag.

Although Honda does not encouragechildren to ride in the front, thissystem is designed to shut off theside airbag if a child leans sidewaysand the child’s head is in the sideairbag deployment path.



How the Side Airbag OffIndicator Light Works

48

Ignoring the SRS indicator lightcan result in serious injury ordeath if the airbags, cutoffsystem, or tensioners do notwork properly.

Have your vehicle checked by adealer as soon as possible ifthe SRS light alerts you to apotential problem.

01/04/26 21:52:32 31S84640_051

If a small-statured adult leanssideways, or larger adult slouchesand leans sideways into thedeployment path of the side airbag,the system may also shut off the sideairbag.

If the side airbag indicator lightcomes on, you should have thepassenger sit upright. Once thepassenger is out of the deploymentpath of the side airbag, the systemwill turn the airbag back on and thelight will go out.

A front seat passenger should notuse a cushion or other object as abackrest. It may prevent the cutoffsystem from working properly.

When you turn the ignition ON (II),the indicator should light briefly andgo out (see page ). If it doesn’tlight, stays on, or comes on whiledriving without a passenger in thefront seat, have the system checked.

57



01/04/26 21:52:39 31S84640_052

Together, airbags andseat belts provide the bestprotection.

Tampering could causethe airbags to deploy, possiblycausing very serious injury.

See page for further informationand precautions relating to yourairbags.

If rain or spilled watersoaks into a seat-back, it canprevent the side airbag systemfrom working properly.

Improperlyreplacing or covering front seat-back covers can prevent your sideairbags from inflating during acollision.

Your front and side airbag systems(if equipped) are virtuallymaintenance-free, and there are noparts you can safely service.However, you must have your carserviced if:

Take your car to anauthorized Honda dealer as soonas possible. If you ignore thisindication, the airbags might notinflate when you need them.

Anyairbag that has deployed must bereplaced along with the controlunit, automatic seat belttensioners, and other related parts.Do not try to remove or replaceany airbag by yourself. This mustbe done by a Honda dealer or aknowledgeable body shop.

203

Airbag Service Additional Safety PrecautionsDo not attempt to deactivate yourairbags.

Do not tamper with airbagcomponents or wiring for anyreason.

Do not expose the front seat-backsto water.

Do not cover or replace front seat-back covers without consulting aHonda dealer.

The SRS indicator light alerts youto a problem.

Your airbags ever inflate.



01/04/26 21:52:50 31S84640_053

Push the button.Select the mode.Turn the fan on high speed.Set the temperature control to acomfortable setting.

High levels of carbon monoxide cancollect rapidly in enclosed areas,such as a garage. Do not run theengine with the garage door closed.Even with the door open, run theengine only long enough to move thevehicle out of the garage.

Your car’s exhaust contains carbonmonoxide gas. You should have noproblem with carbon monoxideentering the car in normal driving ifyou maintain your car properly.Have the exhaust system inspectedfor leaks whenever:

The car is raised for an oil change.You notice a change in the soundof the exhaust.The car was in an accident thatmay have damaged the underside.

If you must sit in your parked car,even in an unconfined area, with theengine running, adjust the heatingand cooling system as follows:

With the trunk lid open, air flow canpull exhaust gas into your car’sinterior and create a hazardouscondition. If you must drive with thetrunk lid open, open all the windowsand set the heating and coolingsystem as shown below.

1.2.3.4.


Carbon Monoxide Hazard

51

Carbon monoxide gas is toxic.Breathing it can causeunconsciousness and even killyou.

Avoid any enclosed areas oractivities that expose you tocarbon monoxide.

01/04/26 21:52:59 31S84640_054

These labels are in the locationsshown. They warn you of potentialhazards that could cause seriousinjury. Read these labels carefully.

If a label comes off or becomes hardto read, contact your Honda dealerfor a replacement.

U.S. models only

U.S. models

Canadian models

Safety Labels


HOOD RADIATOR CAP

DASH BOARD

SUN VISOR

01/04/26 21:53:16 31S84640_055

This section gives information aboutthe controls and displays thatcontribute to the daily operation ofyour Honda. All the essentialcontrols are within easy reach.

...........................Control Locations . 54...............................Indicator Lights . 55

.............................................Gauges . 60...............................Speedometer . 60

.................................Tachometer . 60.....................................Odometer . 60...................................Trip Meter . 61

...................Temperature Gauge . 61..................................Fuel Gauge . 61

Maintenance Required...................................Indicator . 62

Controls Near the Steering.......................................Wheel . 63

...................................Headlights . 64

Automatic Lighting Off.....................................Feature . 65

............Daytime Running Lights . 65....Instrument Panel Brightness . 65

................................Turn Signals . 66.....................Windshield Wipers . 66

..................Windshield Washers . 68..........................Hazard Warning . 68

.............Rear Window Defogger . 68......Steering Wheel Adjustment . 69

...............................Keys and Locks . 70..............................................Keys . 70

....................Immobilizer System . 71............................Ignition Switch . 72

..................................Door Locks . 73......................Power Door Locks . 74

...................Remote Transmitter . 75..............Childproof Door Locks . 79

...........................................Trunk . 79........Emergency Trunk Opener . 80

....................................Glove Box . 81............................Seat Adjustments . 82

.............Front Seat Adjustments . 82Driver’s Seat Manual Height

..............................Adjustment . 83

Driver’s Seat Power Height..............................Adjustment . 83

Driver’s Seat Full Power............................Adjustments . 84

...........Driver’s Lumbar Support . 85Front Passenger’s Seat

............................Adjustments . 86..........................Head Restraints . 86

.......................Folding Rear Seat . 87......................Rear Seat Armrest . 88

....................................Seat Heaters . 90..............................Power Windows . 91

.........................................Moonroof . 92.............................................Mirrors . 93

....Adjusting the Power Mirrors . 94.................................Parking Brake . 95

....................................Digital Clock . 96...................Console Compartment . 97

..........................................Coin Box . 97.............................Beverage Holder . 98

..........................................Sun Visor . 99..................................Vanity Mirror . 99

........................Sunglasses Holder . 100.............Accessory Power Socket . 100

...............................Interior Lights . 101

Instruments and Controls

Instruments and Controls 53

01/04/26 21:53:22 31S84640_056


Control Locations

54

DDOOOORR LLOOCCKKSSWWIITTCCHH

PPOOWWEERR WWIINNDDOOWWSSWWIITTCCHHEESS

HHOOOODD RREELLEEAASSEEHHAANNDDLLEE

MMIIRRRROORRCCOONNTTRROOLLSS

DDIIGGIITTAALL CCLLOOCCKK HHEEAATTIINNGG//CCOOOOLLIINNGGCCOONNTTRROOLL

AAUUDDIIOO SSYYSSTTEEMM

TTRRUUNNKK RREELLEEAASSEEHHAANNDDLLEE//FFUUEELL FFIILLLL DDOOOORR

((PP..7744))

((PP..9911))

((PP..9944))((PP..9966))

((PP..110044))

((PP..111199))

((PP..119966))((PP..7799,, 119944))

01/04/26 21:53:28 31S84640_057

＊

＊＊

＊＊

The U.S. instrument panel is shown. Differences for the Canadian models are noted in the text.

Indicator Lights


MMAALLFFUUNNCCTTIIOONN IINNDDIICCAATTOORR LLAAMMPP

LLOOWW FFUUEELLIINNDDIICCAATTOORR

SSEEAATT BBEELLTT RREEMMIINNDDEERRLLIIGGHHTT

CCHHAARRGGIINNGG SSYYSSTTEEMM IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

DDOOOORR AANNDD BBRRAAKKEE LLAAMMPP MMOONNIITTOORR

PPAARRKKIINNGG BBRRAAKKEE AANNDDBBRRAAKKEE SSYYSSTTEEMM IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

AANNTTII--LLOOCCKK BBRRAAKKEE SSYYSSTTEEMMIINNDDIICCAATTOORR

SSUUPPPPLLEEMMEENNTTAALL RREESSTTRRAAIINNTTSSYYSSTTEEMM IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

TTRRAACCTTIIOONN CCOONNTTRROOLLSSYYSSTTEEMM IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

CCRRUUIISSEE CCOONNTTRROOLLIINNDDIICCAATTOORR

IIMMMMOOBBIILLIIZZEERRSSYYSSTTEEMMIINNDDIICCAATTOORR

HHIIGGHH BBEEAAMM IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

LLOOWW OOIILL PPRREESSSSUURREE IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

((PP.. 5588))((PP.. 5599)) ((PP.. 5577))

((PP.. 5599))

((PP.. 5577))

((PP.. 5577))

SSIIDDEE AAIIRRBBAAGG OOFFFF IINNDDIICCAATTOORR((PP.. 5577))

((PP.. 5599))((PP.. 5566))

((PP.. 5588))

((PP.. 5599))

((PP.. 331111))

((PP.. 331122))

((PP.. 332277))

01/04/26 21:53:35 31S84640_058

The instrument panel has manyindicators to give you importantinformation about your car. The engine can be severely damaged

if this light flashes or stays on whenthe engine is running. For completeinformation, see page .

If this light comes on when theengine is running, the battery is notbeing charged. For completeinformation, see page .

This indicator lights when you turnthe ignition switch ON (II). It is areminder to you and your passengersto protect yourselves by fasteningthe seat belts. A beeper also soundsif you have not fastened your seatbelt.

If you do not fasten your seat belt,the beeper will stop after a fewseconds but the light stays on untilyou do. Both the light and the beeperstay off if you fasten your seat beltbefore turning on the ignition.

See page .

325

326

327

Indicator Lights


Low Oil PressureIndicator

Charging SystemIndicator

Seat Belt Reminder Light

Malfunction IndicatorLamp

56

01/04/26 21:53:46 31S84640_059

If the indicator remains lit afteryou have fully released theparking brake while the engine isrunning, or if it comes on whiledriving, it can indicate a problemin the brake system. For completeinformation, see page .

This indicator comes on when youturn the ignition switch ON (II). Itis a reminder to check the parkingbrake. Driving with the parkingbrake not fully released candamage the brakes and tires.

This light has two functions:

This indicator lights when you turnthe ignition switch ON (II). If itcomes on at any other time, itindicates a potential problem withyour front airbags. This light willalso alert you to a potential problemwith your side airbags or passenger’sside airbag automatic cutoff system.For complete information, see page

.

This indicator lights when you turnthe ignition switch ON (II). If itcomes on at any other time, itindicates that the passenger’s sideairbag has automatically shut off.For complete information, see page

.

This light normally comes on for afew seconds when you turn theignition switch ON (II), and whenthe ignition switch is turned toSTART (III). If this light comes on atany other time, there is a problem inthe ABS. If this happens, take thecar to your dealer to have it checked.With the light on, your car still hasnormal braking ability but no anti-lock. For complete information, seepage .

47

1.

2.

48

329

221

Only on models equipped with ABS (seepage )

Only on models equipped with sideairbags

220

Indicator Lights


Supplemental RestraintSystem Indicator

Parking Brake and Brake SystemIndicator

Side Airbag Cut-offIndicator

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)Indicator

57

U.S. CanadaU.S. Canada

01/04/26 21:53:58 31S84640_060

The left or right turn signal lightblinks when you signal a lane changeor turn. If the light does not blink orblinks rapidly, it usually means oneof the turn signal bulbs is burned out(see page ). Replace the bulb assoon as possible, since other driverscannot see that you are signalling.

When you turn on the HazardWarning switch, both turn signallights blink. All turn signals on theoutside of the car should flash.

The appropriate light comes on inthis display if the trunk or any dooris not closed tightly. If a brake lightdoes not work, theindicator comes on when you pushthe brake pedal with the ignitionswitch ON (II).

A burned out brake light is a hazardwhen drivers behind you cannot tellyou are braking. Have your brakelights repaired right away.

All the lights in the monitor displaycome on for a few seconds when youturn the ignition switch ON (II).

This indicator has three functions:

It comes on as a reminder that youhave turned off the TractionControl System.

It flashes when the TCS isregulating wheelspin.

If it comes on and stays on whenthe Traction Control System is on,it indicates that there is a problemin the TCS.

This light also comes on when youturn the ignition ON (II) and goes offafter the engine starts. See page

for more information on theTCS.

1.

2.

3.

222

293

On all V6 models

Indicator Lights


Turn Signal andHazard WarningIndicators

Door and Brake Lamp MonitorTraction Control System(TCS) Indicator

58

BRAKE LAMP

01/04/26 21:54:13 31S84640_061

This indicator comes on for a fewseconds when you turn the ignitionswitch ON (II). It will then go off ifyou have inserted a properly-codedignition key. If it is not a properly-coded key, the indicator will blinkand the engine will not start (seepage ).

This indicator also blinks severaltimes when you turn the ignitionswitch from ON (II) to ACCESSORY(I) or LOCK (0).

This light comes on when thewasher fluid level is low. Add washerfluid when you see this light come on(see page ).

This indicator lights when you turnthe ignition switch to ON (II) withthe headlight switch off and theparking brake set. It should go off ifyou turn on the headlights or releasethe parking brake. If it comes on atany other time, it means there is aproblem with the DRL. There mayalso be a problem with the highbeam headlights.

This light comes on with the highbeam headlights. See page forinformation on the headlightcontrols.

On Canadian models, this indicatorcomes on with reduced brightnesswhen the Daytime Running Lights(DRL) are on (see page ).

This lights when you set the cruisecontrol. See page for informationon operating the cruise control.

This light comes on as a reminderthat you must refuel soon.

64

65

185

71

262

Canadian models only

Only on models equipped with CruiseControl System

Canadian models only

Indicator Lights


Immobilizer SystemIndicator

Washer Level Indicator

‘‘Daytime RunningLights’’ Indicator

High Beam Indicator

Cruise Control Indicator

Low Fuel Indicator

59

01/04/26 21:54:28 31S84640_062

The tachometer shows the enginespeed in revolutions per minute(rpm). To protect the engine fromdamage, never drive with thetachometer needle in the red zone.

This shows your speed in miles perhour (mph). The smaller innernumbers are the speed in kilometersper hour (km/h).

This shows your speed in kilometersper hour (km/h). The smaller innernumbers are the speed in miles perhour (mph).

The odometer shows the total dis-tance your car has been driven. Itmeasures miles in U.S. models andkilometers in Canadian models.It is illegal under U.S. federal law andCanadian provincial regulations todisconnect, reset, or alter theodometer with the intent to changethe number of miles or kilometersindicated.

U.S. Models

Canadian Models

Speedometer

Odometer

Tachometer

Gauges

Instruments and Controls60

SSPPEEEEDDOOMMEETTEERR

MMAAIINNTTEENNAANNCCEERREEQQUUIIRREEDD IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

OODDOOMMEETTEERR

TTEEMMPPEERRAATTUURREEGGAAUUGGEE

TTRRIIPP MMEETTEERR

TTAACCHHOOMMEETTEERR FFUUEELL GGAAUUGGEE

SSEELLEECCTT//RREESSEETTBBUUTTTTOONN

01/04/26 21:54:42 31S84640_063

4-cylinder models

6-cylinder models

The gauge stays at the same fuellevel reading after you turn off theignition. When you add fuel, thegauge slowly changes to the newreading after you turn the ignitionswitch back ON (II).

The needle returns to the bottomafter you turn off the ignition. Thegauge shows the fuel level readingimmediately after you turn theignition switch back ON (II).

This meter shows the number ofmiles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada)driven since you last reset it.

There are two trip meters: Trip Aand Trip B. Switch between thesedisplays by pressing the Select/Reset button repeatedly. Each tripmeter works independently, so youcan keep track of two differentdistances.

To reset a trip meter, display it andthen press and hold the Select/Resetbutton until the number resets to‘‘0.0’’. Both trip meters will reset ifthe vehicle’s battery goes dead or isdisconnected.

This shows the temperature of theengine’s coolant. During normaloperation, the pointer should risefrom the bottom white mark to aboutthe middle of the gauge. In severedriving conditions, such as very hotweather or a long period of uphilldriving, the pointer may rise to nearthe upper grey zone. If it reaches thered (Hot) mark, pull safely to theside of the road. Turn to page forinstructions and precautions onchecking the engine’s coolingsystem.

This shows how much fuel you have.It is most accurate when the car is onlevel ground. It may show slightlymore or less than the actual amountwhen you are driving on curvy orhilly roads.

325

Gauges


Trip Meter Temperature Gauge Fuel Gauge

61

01/04/26 21:54:55 31S84640_064

－

For the first 6,000 miles (9,600 km)after the Maintenance RequiredIndicator is reset, it will come on fortwo seconds when you turn theignition switch ON (II).

Between 6,000 miles (9,600 km) and7,500 miles (12,000 km) thisindicator will light for two secondswhen you first turn the ignitionswitch ON (II), and then flash forten seconds.

If you exceed 7,500 miles (12,000km) without having the scheduledmaintenance performed, thisindicator will remain on as a constantreminder.

Your dealer will reset this indicatorafter completing the scheduledmaintenance. If this maintenance isdone by someone other than yourHonda dealer, reset the indicator asfollows.

Turn off the engine.

Press and hold the select/resetbutton in the instrument panel,then turn the ignition switch ON(II).

Hold the buttons forapproximately ten seconds untilthe indicator resets.

This indicator reminds you that it istime to take your car in forscheduled maintenance.Refer to the Maintenance Schedulesfor Normal and Severe DrivingConditions on pages .

1.

2.

3.

240 244

Gauges

Maintenance Required Indicator


MMAAIINNTTEENNAANNCCEE RREEQQUUIIRREEDDIINNDDIICCAATTOORR

SSEELLEECCTT//RREESSEETT BBUUTTTTOONN

01/04/26 21:55:06 31S84640_065

＊

＊＊

The two levers on the steeringcolumn contain controls for drivingfeatures you use most often. The leftlever controls the turn signals,headlights, and high beams. Theright lever controls the windshieldwashers and wipers.

The tilt adjustment lever on theunderside of the steering columnallows you to tilt the steering wheel.

The controls under the left air ventare for the moonroof and the cruisecontrol.

To use the horn, press the padaround the ‘‘H’’ logo.


Controls Near the Steering Wheel

63

HHEEAADDLLIIGGHHTTSS//TTUURRNN SSIIGGNNAALLSS

CCRRUUIISSEECCOONNTTRROOLL

MMOOOONNRROOOOFFSSWWIITTCCHH

IINNSSTTRRUUMMEENNTT PPAANNEELLBBRRIIGGHHTTNNEESSSS

WWIINNDDSSHHIIEELLDDWWIIPPEERRSS//WWAASSHHEERRSS

TTIILLTT AADDJJUUSSTTMMEENNTT

HHAAZZAARRDDWWAARRNNIINNGGLLIIGGHHTTSS

CCRRUUIISSEECCOONNTTRROOLLSS

HHOORRNN

RREEAARR WWIINNDDOOWWDDEEFFOOGGGGEERR

TTRRAACCTTIIOONNCCOONNTTRROOLLSSYYSSTTEEMM

((PP.. 6655)) ((PP.. 6666,, 6677,, 6688)) ((PP.. 6688))

((PP.. 9922))

((PP.. 222222))

((PP.. 118855))

((PP.. 6644,, 6666))

((PP.. 6699))

((PP.. 6688))

((PP.. 118855))

01/04/26 21:55:15 31S84640_066

If you leave the lights on with theignition switch in ACCESSORY (I)or LOCK (0), you will hear areminder chime when you open thedriver’s door.

To change between low beams andhigh beams, pull the turn signal leveruntil you hear a click, then let go.The blue high beam indicator willlight (see page ).

To flash the high beams, pull theturn signal lever back lightly, thenrelease it. The high beams will comeon and go off.

The high beams will stay on for aslong as you hold the lever back, nomatter what position the headlightswitch is in.

The rotating switch on the left levercontrols the lights. Turning thisswitch to the ‘‘ ’’ position turnson the parking lights, taillights,instrument panel lights, side-markerlights, and rear license plate lights.Turning the switch to the ‘‘ ’’position turns on the headlights.

59



Headlights

64

01/04/26 21:55:24 31S84640_067

The knob on the instrument panelcontrols the brightness of the instru-ment panel lights. Turn the knob toadjust the brightness.

The headlights revert to normaloperation when you turn them onwith the switch.

With the headlight switch off, thehigh beam headlights come on withreduced brightness when you turnthe ignition switch to ON (II) andrelease the parking brake. Theyremain on until you turn the ignitionoff, even if you set the parking brake.

The lights will turn on again whenyou unlock or open the driver’s door.If you unlock the door, but do notopen it within 15 seconds, the lights

will go off. With the driver’s dooropen, you will hear a lights-onreminder chime.

This feature activates if you leavethe headlight switch in the ‘‘ ’’or ‘‘ ’’ position, remove the key,open, then close the driver’s door.

If you remove the key from theignition switch with the headlightswitch on, but do not open the doorand get out, the lights will turn offafter ten minutes.

The Automatic Lighting Off featureturns off the headlights, parkinglights, taillights, side marker lights,license plate lights and instrumentpanel lights within 15 seconds ofremoving the key from the ignitionswitch and closing the driver’s door.

On U.S. SE and EX models, Canada EX-L model, and all EX V-6 models



Automatic Lighting Off Feature Instrument Panel Brightness

(Canadian Models)Daytime Running Lights

65

01/04/26 21:55:36 31S84640_068

Signal a turn or lane change with thislever. Push down on the lever tosignal a left turn, and up to signal aright turn. If you push it up or downall the way, the turn signal continuesto blink even when you release thelever. It shuts off automatically asyou complete the turn.

To signal a lane change, push lightlyon the turn signal lever in the properdirection and hold it. The lever willreturn to the center position as soonas you release it.

The right lever controls the wind-shield wipers and washers. Therotary switch at the end of the leverhas three positions:

INT: intermittent: low speed: high speed

Turn Signals Windshield Wipers



66

TTUURRNN SSIIGGNNAALL LLEEVVEERR

01/04/26 21:55:45 31S84640_069

To operate the wipers in mist mode,push the control lever down. Thewipers run at high speed until yourelease the lever. This gives you aquick way to clear the windshield.

In intermittent, the wipers operateevery few seconds. The sweepinterval will change slightly withspeed; getting shorter as you drivefaster. In low speed and high speed,the wipers run continuously.

If you turn the INT TIME ring to theshortest delay, the wipers willchange from intermittent to lowspeed operation when vehicle speedexceeds 12 mph (20 km/h).

You can vary how often the wiperssweep the windshield by turning theINT TIME ring next to the rotaryswitch.

On all models except U.S. DX and ValuePackage



01/04/26 21:55:53 31S84640_070

To clean the windshield, pull back onthe wiper control lever. The washersspray until you release the lever. Thewipers run at low speed while you’repulling the lever, then complete onemore sweep of the windshield afteryou release it.

The rear window defogger will clearfog, frost, and thin ice from thewindow. Push the defogger button toturn it on and off. The light abovethe button lights to show thedefogger is on. If you do not turn itoff, the defogger will shut itself offafter about 15 minutes. It also shutsoff when you turn off the ignition.You have to turn it on again whenyou restart the car.

Push the button to the left of theclock to turn on the hazard warninglights (four-way flashers). Thiscauses all four outside turn signalsand both indicators in the instrumentpanel to flash. Use the hazardwarning lights if you need to park ina dangerous area near heavy traffic,or if your car is disabled.

Windshield Washers Hazard Warning Rear Window Defogger



01/04/26 21:56:03 31S84640_071

Make sure the rear window is clearand you have good visibility beforestarting to drive.

The defogger and antenna wires onthe inside of the rear window can beaccidentally damaged. Whencleaning the glass, always wipe sideto side.

Make sure you have securelylocked the steering wheel in placeby trying to move it up and down.

Push the lever up to lock thesteering wheel in that position.

Move the steering wheel to thedesired position, making sure thewheel points toward your chest,not toward your face. Make sureyou can see the instrument panelgauges and the indicator lights.

Make any steering wheel adjustmentbefore you start driving.

To adjust the steering wheel upwardor downward:

Push the lever under the steeringcolumn all the way down.

1.

2.

3.

4.

See page for important safetyinformation about how to properlyposition the steering wheel.

18



Steering Wheel Adjustment

69

Adjusting the steering wheelposition while driving maycause you to lose control of thecar and be seriously injured in acrash.

Adjust the steering wheel onlywhen the car is stopped.

01/04/26 21:56:14 31S84640_072

You should have received a keynumber plate with your keys. Youwill need this key number if you everhave to get a lost key replaced. Keepthe plate stored in a safe place. If youneed to replace a key, use onlyHonda-approved key blanks.

The master key fits all the locks onyour car:• Ignition• Doors• Trunk• Glove box• Trunk release handle• Trunk pass-through cover• Rear seat trunk access

These keys contain electroniccircuits that are activated by theImmobilizer System. They will notwork to start the engine if thecircuits are damaged.

Protect the keys from directsunlight, high temperature, andhigh humidity.

Do not drop the keys or set heavyobjects on them.

Keep the keys away from liquids.If they get wet, dry them immedi-ately with a soft cloth.

The keys do not contain batteries.Do not try to take them apart.

Some models also come with tworemote transmitters; see page foran explanation of their operation.

The valet key works only in theignition and the door locks. You cankeep the trunk, trunk release handle,trunk pass-through cover, rear seattrunk access and glove box lockedwhen you leave your car and thevalet key at a parking facility.

Your car comes with two masterkeys and a valet key.

75

Keys

Remote Transmitter

Keys and Locks


KKEEYYNNUUMMBBEERRPPLLAATTEE

MMAASSTTEERRKKEEYY((BBLLAACCKK))

VVAALLEETT KKEEYY((GGRREEYY))

01/04/26 21:56:27 31S84640_073

The Immobilizer System protectsyour car from theft. A properly-coded master or valet key must beused in the ignition switch for theengine to start. If an improperly-coded key (or other device) is used,the engine’s fuel system is disabled.

When you turn the ignition switch toON (II), the Immobilizer Systemindicator should come on for a fewseconds, then go out. If the indicatorstarts to blink, it means the systemdoes not recognize the coding of thekey. Turn the ignition switch toLOCK (0), remove the key, reinsertit, and turn the switch to ON (II)again.

The system may not recognize yourkey’s coding if another immobilizerkey or other metal object is near theignition switch when you insert thekey. To make sure the systemrecognizes the key code:

Do not keep other immobilizerkeys on the same key ring.

Use a plastic or leather key fob,not metal.

Keep other keys away from yourvehicle’s key and the ignitionswitch while trying to start theengine.

If you have lost your key and youcannot start the engine, contact yourHonda dealer.

Do not attempt to alter this systemor add other devices to it. Electricalproblems could result that may makeyour car undriveable.

This indicator will also blink severaltimes when you turn the ignitionswitch from ON (II) to ACCESSORY(I) or LOCK (0).

If the system repeatedly does notrecognize the coding of your key,contact your Honda dealer.

This device complies with IndustryCanada Standard RSS-210.Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: (1) this device may not causeinterference, and (2) this device mustaccept any interference that may causeundesired operation of the device.

Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’sauthority to operate the equipment.

As required by the FCC:This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) This devicemay not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may cause undesiredoperation.

Immobilizer System

Keys and Locks


01/04/26 21:56:38 31S84640_074

－

The ignition switch is on the rightside of the steering column. It hasfour positions:• LOCK (0)• ACCESSORY (I)• ON (II)• START (III)

If the front wheels are turned, theanti-theft lock may sometimes makeit difficult to turn the key fromLOCK to ACCESSORY. Firmly turnthe steering wheel to the left or tothe right as you turn the key.

You can insert orremove the key only in this position.To switch from ACCESSORY toLOCK, you must push the key inslightly as you turn it. If your car hasan automatic transmission, the shiftlever must also be in Park. The anti-theft lock will lock the steeringcolumn when you remove the key.

Ignition Switch LOCK (0)

Keys and Locks


Removing the key from theignition switch while drivinglocks the steering. This cancause you to lose control.

Remove the key from theignition switch only whenparked.

01/04/26 21:56:47 31S84640_075

－

－

－

In this position,you can operate the audio systemand the accessory power socket.

Each door has a lock tab on the top.Push the tab down to lock the doorand pull it up to unlock.

This is the normal keyposition when driving. All featuresand accessories on the car are usable.Several of the lights on the instru-ment panel come on as a test whenyou turn the ignition switch fromACCESSORY to ON.

Use this positiononly to start the engine. The switchreturns to ON (II) when you let go ofthe key.

You will hear a reminder beeper ifyou leave the key in the ignitionswitch in the LOCK (0) orACCESSORY (I) position and openthe driver’s door. Remove the key toturn off the beeper.

The engine will not start if theImmobilizer System does notrecognize the key’s coding (see page

).71

CONTINUED

ACCESSORY (I) Door Locks

ON (II)

START (III)

Keys and Locks


LLOOCCKK TTAABB

01/04/26 21:56:57 31S84640_076

To lock any passenger’s door whengetting out of the car, push the locktab down and close the door.

To lock any passenger’s door whengetting out of the car, push the locktab in and close the door.

The front doors can be locked andunlocked from the outside with thekey.

All doors can be locked from theoutside by using the key in eitherfront door. To unlock only the driver’sdoor from the outside, insert the keyin the driver’s door lock, turn the keyand release it. If you turn the keyand hold it, all doors will unlock. Allfour doors will unlock when youunlock the passenger’s door with thekey.

Each front door has a master doorlock switch. Either switch locks andunlocks all doors. Push the switchdown to lock all doors, and up tounlock them.


Power Door Locks

Keys and Locks


MMAASSTTEERR DDOOOORR LLOOCCKK SSWWIITTCCHH

01/04/26 21:57:05 31S84640_077

If you forget and leave the key in theignition switch, Lockout Preventionwill not allow you to lock the driver’sdoor. With the driver’s door openand the key in the ignition, bothmaster door lock switches aredisabled. However, if the driver’sdoor is not open, the master doorlock switches are not disabled.Pushing the switch down on theopen passenger’s door will lock alldoors. If you try to lock an opendriver’s door by pushing in the locktab, the tabs on all doors pop out.Pushing in the lock tab on thepassenger’s door only locks that door. You can lock and unlock your car

with the remote transmitter. Whenyou push the LOCK button, all doorslock. The parking lights, side markerlights, and taillights flash once.

When you push the LOCK button asecond time within 5 seconds afteryou have locked the doors, you willhear a beep to verify that the doorsare locked and the security systemhas set.

When you push the UNLOCK buttononce, only the driver’s door unlocks.The remaining doors unlock whenyou push the button a second time.The parking lights, side markerlights, and taillights flash twice.

CONTINUED

On all EX, SE, and EX V-6 models andCanada SE V-6 model

Lockout Prevention Remote Transmitter

Keys and Locks


LLEEDD

UUNNLLOOCCKKBBUUTTTTOONN

LLOOCCKKBBUUTTTTOONN

PPAANNIICCBBUUTTTTOONN

TTRRUUNNKKRREELLEEAASSEEBBUUTTTTOONN

01/04/26 21:57:15 31S84640_078

To open the trunk, push the TrunkRelease button for approximatelyone second.

The trunk will not open if the key isin the ignition switch.

Panic mode allows you to remotelyactivate your car’s security system toattract attention. When activated, thehorn will sound, and the exteriorlights will flash, for about 30 seconds.To activate panic mode, press andhold the PANIC button for about twoseconds.

To cancel Panic mode before 30seconds, press any button on theremote transmitter. You can alsoturn the ignition switch to ON (II).

The ceiling light (if the ceiling lightswitch is in the center position) willcome on when you press theUNLOCK button. If you do not openany door, the light stays on for about10 seconds, then fades out. If yourelock the doors with the remotetransmitter before 10 seconds haveelapsed, the light will go offimmediately.

You cannot lock the doors with theremote transmitter if any door is notfully closed or the key is in theignition switch.

If you unlock the doors with theremote transmitter, but do not openany of the doors within 20 seconds,the doors automatically relock andthe security system sets.

Panic Mode

Keys and Locks


01/04/26 21:57:24 31S84640_079

＋

When the remote transmitter’sbattery begins to get weak, it maytake several pushes on the button tolock or unlock the doors, and theLED will not light. Replace thebattery as soon as possible.

Battery type: CR2025

Remove the old battery and note thepolarity. Make sure the polarity ofthe new battery is the same ( sidefacing up), then insert it in thetransmitter.

To replace the battery, pry the twoparts of the transmitter apart.

CONTINUED

Replacing the Battery

Keys and Locks


BBAATTTTEERRYY

01/04/26 21:57:33 31S84640_080

Avoid severe shock to the trans-mitter, such as dropping or throwingit. Also, protect it from extreme hotor cold temperatures.

Clean the transmitter case with asoft cloth. Do not use strongcleaners or solvents that could harmthe case. Immersing the transmitterin any liquid will harm the trans-mitter and cause it to not functionproperly.

If you lose a transmitter, you willneed to have the replacementprogrammed to your car’s system byyour Honda dealer. Any othertransmitters you have will also needto be reprogrammed.




Transmitter Care

Keys and Locks


01/04/26 21:57:42 31S84640_081

The childproof door locks aredesigned to prevent children seatedin the rear from accidentally openingthe rear doors. Each rear door has alock lever near the edge. With thelever in the LOCK position, the doorcannot be opened from the insideregardless of the position of the locktab. To open the door, pull the locktab up and use the outside doorhandle.

To close the trunk, press down onthe trunk lid.

See page for cargo loading andweight limit information. Keep thetrunk lid closed at all times whiledriving to avoid damaging the lid,and to prevent exhaust gas fromgetting into the interior. See

on page .

You can open the trunk in threeways:

Pull the trunk release handle tothe left of the driver’s seat.Use the master key to open thetrunk lock. The valet key does notwork in this lock.Press the trunk release button onthe remote transmitter.

204

51(EX and EX V-6 models only)

CONTINUED

Childproof Door Locks Trunk

CarbonMonoxide Hazard

Keys and Locks


LLEEVVEERR

TTRRUUNNKK RREELLEEAASSEE HHAANNDDLLEE MMAASSTTEERR KKEEYY

01/04/26 21:57:55 31S84640_082

To protect items in the trunk whenyou need to give the key to someoneelse:

Lock the trunk release handlewith the master key. Also makesure the trunk pass-through coveris locked (see page ).

Give the person the valet key.

As a safety feature, your car has arelease lever on the trunk latch sothe trunk can be opened from theinside.

To open the trunk, push the releaselever to the left.

Parents should decide if theirchildren should be shown how to usethis feature.

For more information about childsafety, see page .

1.

2.

26

89

U.S. models only

Emergency Trunk Opener

Keys and Locks


MMAASSTTEERR KKEEYY

01/04/26 21:58:07 31S84640_083

Open the glove box by squeezing thehandle. Close it with a firm push.Lock or unlock the glove box withthe master key.

The glove box light comes on onlywhen the instrument panel lights areon.

Glove Box

Keys and Locks


GGLLOOVVEE BBOOXX

An open glove box can causeserious injury to your passengerin a crash, even if thepassenger is wearing the seatbelt.

Always keep the glove boxclosed while driving.

01/04/26 21:58:14 31S84640_084

－ To change the angle of the seat-back,pull up on the lever on the outside ofthe seat bottom. Move the seat-backto the desired position and releasethe lever. Let the seat-back latch inthe new position.To adjust the seat forward and

backward, pull up on the lever underthe seat cushion’s front edge. Movethe seat to the desired position andrelease the lever. Try to move theseat to make sure it is locked inposition.

Adjust the seat before you startdriving.

All V-6 models, and the 4-cylinder EXmodel with leather interior have apower adjustable driver’s seat.

The EX V-6 model also has a poweradjustable passenger’s seat (Seepage ).

The U.S. SE and 4-cylinder EXmodels without leather interior havea power seat bottom heightadjustment. All other seatadjustments in these models aremanual.

The front passenger’s seat in all4-cylinder models, the U.S. LX V-6,and the Canadian type SE V-6models adjusts manually.

The DX Value Package, LX, SE and4-cylinder models in the U.S. and theLX, SE, and EX models in Canadahave manual seat adjustments (seenext column).

86

See pages for important safetyinformation and warnings about how toproperly position seats and seat-backs.

13 14

Seat Adjustments


Front Seat Adjustments

82

01/04/26 21:58:26 31S84640_085

The height of your driver’s seat isadjustable. Turn the front dial on theoutside of the seat cushion to raisethe front of the seat bottom and turnthe rear dial to raise the rear.

Make all adjustments before youstart driving.

The height of your driver’s seat ispower adjustable. Pull up on theswitch to raise the seat. Push it downto lower the seat.

On SE and LX models On U.S. EX models without leather andU.S. SE models


Seat Adjustments

Driver’s Seat Manual HeightAdjustment

Driver’s Seat Power HeightAdjustment

83

01/04/26 21:58:36 31S84640_086

－

Pull up or push down on the front ofthe switch to move the seat bottom’sfront edge up or down. Pull up orpush down on the rear of the switchto move the rear of the seat bottomup or down.

Push the horizontal switch forwardor backward to move the seatforward or backward.You can adjust the seat with the

ignition switch in any position. Makeall adjustments before you startdriving.

The two power seat adjustmentswitches are on the outside edge ofthe seat bottom. The horizontalswitch adjusts the seat bottom inseveral directions. The short verticalswitch adjusts the seat-back angle.

See pages for important safetyinformation and warnings about how toproperly position seats and seat-backs.

On all V-6 models, and the 4-cylinder EXmodel with leather interior

13 14

Driver’s Seat Full PowerAdjustments


Seat Adjustments

84

01/04/26 21:58:44 31S84640_087

Pull the center of the horizontalswitch up to raise the seat. Push itdown to lower the seat.

Adjust the seat-back angle bypushing the rear switch in thedirection you want to move. Vary the lumbar support by moving

the lever on the right side of theseat-back. Pivot the lever forwarduntil it stops, then let it return. Doingthis several times adjusts the lumbarsupport through its full range.

On U.S. EX and all EX V-6 models

Seat Adjustments


Driver’s Lumbar Support

85

01/04/26 21:58:53 31S84640_088

The seat adjustment switches are onthe outside edge of the seat bottom.Push the long horizontal switchforward or backward to move theseat bottom in that direction.

Adjust the seat-back angle bypushing the vertical switch in thedirection you want to move.

The front head restraints helpprotect you and your passenger fromwhiplash and other injuries. They aremost effective when you adjust themso the back of the occupant’s headrests against the center of therestraint. A taller person shouldadjust the restraint as high aspossible.

To remove a head restraint forcleaning or repair, pull it up as far asit will go. Push the release buttonand pull the restraint out of the seat-back.

The front head restraints adjust forheight. You need both hands toadjust the restraint. Do not attemptto adjust it while driving. To raise it,pull upward. To lower the restraint,push the release button sidewaysand push the restraint down.

See page for important safetyinformation and a warning about how toproperly position the head restraints.

15On EX V-6 model

Seat Adjustments


Front Passenger’s SeatAdjustments

Head Restraints

86

RREELLEEAASSEE BBUUTTTTOONN

01/04/26 21:59:04 31S84640_089

When storing cargo, you can movethe rear center shoulder belt out ofthe way by removing the belt fromthe guide.

To release the seat-back from insidethe trunk, pull the release loop underthe trunk panel.

The back of the rear seat folds down,giving you direct access to the trunk.The seat-back can be released frominside the car or inside the trunk.

To fold down the seat-back frominside the car, insert the master keyin the lock on the rear shelf. Turnthe key clockwise, pull down the topof the seat-back, then release thekey.

To lock the seat-back upright, push itfirmly against the trunk panel. Makesure it is latched in place by pullingon the top of the seat.

CONTINUED

Folding Rear Seat

Seat Adjustments


MMAASSTTEERR KKEEYY

PPuullll

01/04/26 21:59:13 31S84640_090

Never drive with the seat-backfolded down and the trunk lid open.See onpage .

Make sure all rear shoulder belts arepositioned in front of the rear seat-back whenever the seat-back is in itsupright position.

Make sure all items in the trunk, oritems extending through the openinginto the back seat, are secured.Loose items can fly forward andcause injury if you have to brakehard. See on page

.

The rear seat armrest is located atthe center of the rear seat. Pivot itdown to use it.

204

51

On all models except U.S. DX and ValuePackageCarbon Monoxide Hazard

Rear Seat Armrest

Carrying Cargo

Seat Adjustments


01/04/26 21:59:22 31S84640_091

For security, this cover can belocked and unlocked only with themaster key. To lock the cover, insertthe key and turn it clockwise.

The pass-through cover can beopened from either side; it foldsforward onto the center armrest.Open the cover by sliding the knobdownward and pushing or pulling onthe cover. To close the cover, swingit up and push firmly on the top.Make sure it latches properly.Make sure all items in the trunk andthose extending through the pass-through are secured.

Never drive with this cover open andthe trunk lid open.See onpage .51

Seat Adjustments


Trunk Pass-through Cover

Carbon Monoxide Hazard

89

KKNNOOBB

LLIIDD

01/04/26 21:59:30 31S84640_092

Both front seats are equipped withseat heaters. The ignition must beON (II) to use them. Push the rightside of the switch, HI, to rapidly heatup the seat. After the seat reaches acomfortable temperature, select LOby pushing the left side of the switch.This will keep the seat warm.

The HI or LO indicator lights andremains lit until you turn it off bypushing the opposite side of theswitch lightly. The indicator will turnoff.

In HI, the heater turns off when theseat gets warm, and turns back onafter the seat’s temperature drops. Itcontinues to cycle as long as youleave it set on HI. The HI indicatorremains lit as a reminder that youhave the heater on.

In LO, the heater runs continuously.It does not cycle with temperaturechanges.

Do not use the seat heaters, evenon the LO setting, if the engine isleft idling for an extended period.They can weaken the battery,causing hard starting.

Use the HI setting only to heat theseats quickly. Select the LOsetting when the seats feel warm.The HI setting draws largeamounts of current from thebattery.

Follow these precautions wheneveryou use the seat heaters:

Because of the sensors for the sideairbag system, there is no heater inthe passenger’s seat-back.

On Canadian SE, EX V-6 models and EXmodel with leather interior

Seat Heaters


01/04/26 21:59:40 31S84640_093

CONTINUED

The driver’s door armrest has amaster power window control panel.To open any of the passengers’ win-dows, push down on the appropriateswitch and hold it down until thewindow reaches the desired position.To close the window, pull back onthe window switch. Release theswitch when the window gets to theposition you want.

Each door has a switch that controlsits window. To open the window,push the switch down and hold it.Release the switch when you wantthe window to stop. Close thewindow by pushing the switch upand holding it.

Your car’s windows are electrically-powered. Turn the ignition switch toON (II) to raise or lower any window.


Power Windows


DDRRIIVVEERR’’SS WWIINNDDOOWWSSWWIITTCCHH

MMAAIINNSSWWIITTCCHH

Closing a power window onsomeone’s hands or fingers cancause serious injury.

Make sure your passengers areaway from the windows beforeclosing them.

01/04/26 21:59:48 31S84640_094

－

The power window system has a key-off delay function. The windows willstill operate for up to ten minutesafter you turn off the ignition.Opening either front door cancelsthe delay function. You must turnthe ignition switch ON (II) againbefore you can raise or lower thewindows.

The master control panel also con-tains these extra features:

To open the driver’s window onlypartially, push the window switchdown lightly and hold it. The windowwill stop as soon as you release theswitch.

To open the driver’swindow fully, push the windowswitch firmly down and release it.The window automatically goes allthe way down. To stop the windowfrom going all the way down, pullback on the window switch briefly.

The AUTO function only works tolower the driver’s window. To raisethe window, you must pull back onthe window switch and hold it untilthe window reaches the desiredposition.

The MAIN switch controls power tothe passengers’ windows. With thisswitch off, the passengers’ windowscannot be raised or lowered. TheMAIN switch does not affect thedriver’s window. Keep the MAINswitch off when you have children inthe car so they do not injure them-selves by operating the windowsunintentionally.

The moonroof has two positions: itcan be tilted up in the back forventilation, or it can be slid back intothe roof. Use the switch under theleft dashboard vent to operate themoonroof. The ignition switch mustbe ON (II).

On U.S. EX and all SE and EX V-6models

Moonroof

AUTO


Power Windows, Moonroof

92

MMOOOONNRROOOOFF SSWWIITTCCHH

01/04/26 21:59:58 31S84640_095

Keep the inside and outside mirrorsclean and adjusted for best visibility.Be sure to adjust the mirrors beforeyou start driving.

The inside mirror has day and nightpositions. The night position reducesglare from headlights behind you.Flip the tab on the bottom edge ofthe mirror to select the day or nightposition.

The moonroof has a key-off delay.You can still open and close themoonroof for up to ten minutes afteryou turn off the ignition. The key-offdelay cancels as soon as you openeither front door. You must thenturn the ignition ON (II) for themoonroof to operate.

To tilt up the back of the moonroof,press and hold the center button( ). To close the moonroof,press and hold the top of the switch( ). To open the moonroof,press and hold the bottom of theswitch ( ). Release the switchwhen the moonroof gets to thedesired position. Make sureeveryone’s hands are away from themoonroof before opening or closingit.

CONTINUED

Mirrors

Moonroof, Mirrors


TTAABB

Opening or closing themoonroof on someone’s handsor fingers can cause seriousinjury.

Make sure all hands and fingersare clear of the moonroofbefore opening or closing it.

If you try to open the moonroof inbelow-f reezing temperatures, or whenit is covered with snow or ice, you candamage the moonroof panel or motor.

01/04/26 22:00:08 31S84640_096

Push the appropriate edge of theadjustment switch to move themirror right, left, up, or down.

Turn the ignition switch ON (II).

Move the selector switch to L(driver’s side) or R (passenger’sside).

When you finish, move theselector switch to the center (off)position. This turns off theadjustment switch so you can’tmove a mirror out of position byaccidentally bumping the switch.

Adjust the outside mirrors with theadjustment switch on the driver’sdoor armrest:

3.

4.

1.

2.



Mirrors

Adjusting the Power Mirrors

94

AADDJJUUSSTTMMEENNTT SSWWIITTCCHH

SSEELLEECCTTOORR SSWWIITTCCHH

01/04/26 22:00:18 31S84640_097

To apply the parking brake, pull thelever up fully. To release it, pull upslightly, push the button, and lowerthe lever. The parking brake light onthe instrument panel should go outwhen the parking brake is fullyreleased with the engine running(see page ).

The outside mirrors are heated to re-move fog and frost. With the ignitionswitch ON (II), turn on the heatersby pressing the button. The light inthe button comes on as a reminder.Press the button again to turn theheaters off. 57

On all Canadian models


Mirrors, Parking Brake

Parking Brake

95

PPAARRKKIINNGG BBRRAAKKEE LLEEVVEERR

HHEEAATTEEDD MMIIRRRROORR BBUUTTTTOONN Driving the car with the parking brakeapplied can damage the rear brakesand axles.

01/04/26 22:00:26 31S84640_098

The digital clock displays the timewith the ignition switch in anyposition.To set the clock:

Press and hold the H button untilthe hour advances to the desiredtime.

Press and hold the M button untilthe numbers advance to thedesired time.

You can use R to quickly set the timeto the nearest hour. If the displayedtime is before the half hour, pressingR sets the clock back to the previoushour. If the displayed time is afterthe half hour, pressing R sets theclock forward to the beginning of thenext hour.For example:

1:06 would RESET to 1:00.1:52 would RESET to 2:00.

1.

2.

Digital Clock


RRMMHH

01/04/26 22:00:36 31S84640_099

To close, lower the lid and push itdown until it latches.

The coin box is located under the airvent. To open the coin box, pull thebottom edge. Close it with a firmpush.

To open the console compartment,pull up on the lower lever and lift thelid.

You can put small items in the traylocated in the console compartmentlid. To use the tray, pull up on theupper lever and lift up the armrestpad.


Console Compartment Coin Box

Console Compartment, Coin Box

97

LLEEVVEERR

CCOONNSSOOLLEE CCOOMMPPAARRTTMMEENNTT

LLEEVVEERR

CCOOIINN BBOOXX

01/04/26 22:00:46 31S84640_100

To open the beverage holder, pushon the top. The beverage holder lidis spring-loaded and will swing open.To close it, push it down until itlatches.

The inner liner can be removed ifyou want to hold a larger cup.

Be careful when you are using thebeverage holder. A spilled liquid thatis very hot can scald you or yourpassengers. Spilled liquids can alsodamage the upholstery, carpeting,and electrical components in theinterior.

The rear seat also has a beverageholder in the center armrest. To useit, pivot the armrest down.

On all models except U.S. DX and ValuePackage models

Beverage Holder


PPuusshh

01/04/26 22:00:54 31S84640_101

To use the sun visor, pull it down.You can also use the sun visor at theside window. Remove the supportrod from the clip and swing the sunvisor toward the side window. In thisposition, the sun visor can beextended by sliding out theextension.

To use a vanity mirror on the back ofthe sun visor, pull up the cover.

Make sure you put the sun visorback in place when you are gettinginto or out of the car. Do not use thesun visor extension over the rearview mirror.

All models except the U.S. DX andValue Package models have lightedvanity mirrors.

The light beside the mirror comeson only when the headlight switch isin one of the on positions.


Sun Visor, Vanity Mirror

Sun Visor Vanity Mirror

99

01/04/26 22:01:03 31S84640_102

Some larger styles of sunglassesmay not fit in the holder.

This socket is intended to supplypower for 12 volt DC accessoriesthat are rated 120 watts or less (10amps).

It will not power an automotive typecigarette lighter element.

To use the accessory power socket,pull out on the cover. The ignitionswitch must be in ACCESSORY (I)or ON (II).

To open the sunglasses holder, pushon the front edge. It will unlatch andswing down. To close it, push it untilit latches. Make sure the holder isclosed while you are driving.


Sunglasses Holder, Accessory Power Socket


Sunglasses Holder Accessory Power Socket

100

01/04/26 22:01:13 31S84640_103

The ceiling light has a three-positionswitch. In the OFF position, the lightdoes not come on. In the centerposition, the ceiling light comes onwhen you open any door.

The ceiling light (with the switch inthe center position) also comes onwhen you unlock the door with theremote transmitter (see page ).The light fades out after both doorsare closed.

After all doors are closed tightly, thelight dims slightly, then fades out inabout 10 seconds. In the ON position,the ceiling light stays oncontinuously.

The light goes out when all doors areclosed.

Turn on the spotlight by pushing thebutton next to each light. Push thebutton again to turn it off. You canuse the spotlights at all times.

75


U.S. DX, Value Package, LX, LX V-6 andall SE models

EX, EX V-6

Interior Lights


Ceiling Light Spotlights

101

DDOOOORR AACCTTIIVVAATTEEDD

OOFFFF

OONN

01/04/26 22:01:22 31S84640_104

Your car also has a courtesy light inthe ignition switch. This light comeson when you open the driver’s door.It remains on for several secondsafter the door is closed.

Each door has a courtesy light. Thislight comes on when you open thedoor.



Courtesy Lights

Interior Lights

102

IIGGNNIITTIIOONN SSWWIITTCCHH LLIIGGHHTT

DDOOOORR LLIIGGHHTT

01/04/26 22:01:29 31S84640_105

.....................Heating and Cooling . 104.........What Each Control Does . 104

............How to Use the System . 107..........To Turn Everything Off . 110

...............Climate Control System . 111.......Fully-automatic Operation . 113.......Semi-automatic Operation . 114

Sunlight Sensor/............Temperature Sensor . 118

......................Audio System (DX) . 119.................Operating the Radio . 120.................Adjusting the Sound . 123

Operating the Cassette.....................................Player . 124

.................Caring for Cassettes . 126Operating the Optional CD

.................................Changer . 127.......Protecting Compact Discs . 129

CD Changer Error.............................Indications . 130

Audio System...........(LX and U.S. LX V-6) . 131

.................Operating the Radio . 131

.................Adjusting the Sound . 135.........Operating the CD Player . 136

.....Operating the CD Changer . 138

CD player Error.............................Indications . 140



............Tape Search Functions . 144Caring for the Cassette

.....................................Player . 145Audio System (U.S. EX,

...Canada EX-L and EX V-6) . 146.................Operating the Radio . 147.................Adjusting the Sound . 151

............Audio System Lighting . 152Operating the Cassette

.....................................Player . 152............Tape Search Functions . 153

Caring for the Cassette.....................................Player . 155

.....Operating the CD Changer . 156.......Protecting Compact Discs . 162


Audio System (U.S. Value.....Package and SE models) . 164

.................Operating the Radio . 165

.................Adjusting the Sound . 169....................Radio Frequencies . 170

........................Radio Reception . 170.........Operating the CD Player . 172

Operating the Optional CD.................................Changer . 174

.......Protecting Compact Discs . 175....CD Player Error Indications . 176



Caring for the Cassette.....................................Player . 181

...........Remote Audio Controls . 182.......................Theft Protection . 183

............................Security System . 184...............................Cruise Control . 185

Homelink Universal................................Transceiver . 188

Comfort and Convenience Features

Comfort and Convenience Features 103

01/04/26 22:01:33 31S84640_106

Proper use of the Heating andCooling system can make theinterior dry and comfortable, andkeep the windows clear for bestvisibility.

This button controls the source ofthe air going into the system. Whenthe indicator above this button is lit,air from the car’s interior is sentthrough the system again (Recircula-tion mode). When the indicator is off,air is brought in from outside the car(Fresh Air mode).

This button turns the air condi-tioning ON and OFF. The indicatorabove the button lights when theA/C is on.

Air Conditioning is optional on theU.S. DX model.

Turning this dial clockwise increasesthe temperature of the air flow.

Turning this dial clockwise increasesthe fan’s speed, which increases airflow.

If your car does not have airconditioning, it can be installed atany time. Your dealer can install agenuine Honda air conditioningsystem that meets Honda’s highquality standards and is designed toexactly fit your car. Please contactyour dealer for more information.

This button turns the rear windowdefogger on and off (see page ).68

Except EX V-6 model


Heating and Cooling

Air Conditioning (A/C) Button Recirculation Button

Rear Window Defogger Button

Temperature Control Dial

Fan Control Dial

What Each Control Does

104

TTEEMMPPEERRAATTUURREECCOONNTTRROOLL DDIIAALL

FFAANN CCOONNTTRROOLL DDIIAALL MMOODDEE BBUUTTTTOONNSS

RREEAARR WWIINNDDOOWWDDEEFFOOGGGGEERRBBUUTTTTOONN

RREECCIIRRCCUULLAATTIIOONNBBUUTTTTOONN

AAIIRR CCOONNDDIITTIIOONNIINNGGBBUUTTTTOONN

01/04/26 22:01:48 31S84640_107

Use the MODE buttons to select thevents the air flows from. Some airwill flow from the dashboard cornervents in all modes.

Air flows from the floorvents.

Air flow is divided betweenthe vents in the dashboard and thefloor vents.

Air flows from the centerand corner vents in the dashboard.

Air flows from the defrostervents at the base of the windshield.

Air flow is divided betweenthe floor vents and the defrostervents at the base of the windshield.

When you select or ,the system automatically switches toFresh Air mode and turns on theA/C.

Heating and Cooling


Mode Buttons

105

01/04/26 22:01:57 31S84640_108

The direction of air flow from thevents in the center and each side ofthe dashboard is adjustable.

To adjust the air flow from thecenter vent, move the tab up-and-down and side-to-side.

On the driver’s-side vent, move thevent up-and-down and move the tabside-to-side. On the passenger’s-sidevent, move the tab up-and-down andmove the vent side-to-side.

The vents in the corners of thedashboard can be opened and closedwith the dials underneath them.

Heating and Cooling


Vent Controls

106

CCEENNTTEERR VVEENNTT PPAASSSSEENNGGEERR’’SS--SSIIDDEE VVEENNTTDDRRIIVVEERR’’SS--SSIIDDEE VVEENNTT

01/04/26 22:02:06 31S84640_109

CONTINUED

The flow-through ventilation systemdraws in outside air, circulates itthrough the interior, then exhausts itthrough vents near the rear window.

Turn the temperature control dialall the way to the left.Make sure the A/C is off.Select and Fresh Air mode.Set the fan to the desired speed.

The outside air intakes for theheating and cooling system are atthe base of the windshield. Keepthese clear of leaves and otherdebris.

This section covers how to set up thesystem controls for ventilation,heating, cooling, dehumidifying, anddefrosting.

The engine must be running for theheater and air conditioning togenerate hot and cold air. The heateruses engine coolant to warm the air.If the engine is cold, it will be severalminutes before you feel warm aircoming from the system.

It is best to leave the system in FreshAir mode under almost all conditions.Keeping the system in Recirculationmode, particularly with the A/C off,can cause the windows to fog up.Switch to Recirculation mode whenyou are driving through smoky ordusty conditions, then switch back toFresh Air mode when the conditionclears.

The air conditioning does not rely onengine temperature.

1.

2.3.

Heating and Cooling


Ventilation

How to Use the System

107


FFAANN CCOONNTTRROOLL DDIIAALL

AAIIRR CCOONNDDIITTIIOONNIINNGG BBUUTTTTOONN

MMOODDEE BBUUTTTTOONNSS

RREECCIIRRCCUULLAATTIIOONN BBUUTTTTOONN

01/04/26 22:02:18 31S84640_110

When the interior has cooled downto a more comfortable temperature,close the windows and set thecontrols as described for normalcooling.

Air conditioning places an extra loadon the engine. Watch the enginecoolant temperature gauge (see page

) when driving in stop-and-gotraffic or climbing a long, steep hill.If it moves near the red zone, turnoff the A/C until the gauge readsnormally.

If the interior is very warm frombeing parked in the sun, you can coolit down more rapidly by setting upthe controls this way:

Turn on the A/C by pressing thebutton. The light above the buttonshould come on when a fan speedis selected.Make sure the temperaturecontrol dial is set to maximum cool.Select .If the outside air is humid, selectRecirculation mode. If the outsideair is dry, select Fresh Air mode.Set the fan to the desired speed.

Start the engine.Turn on the A/C by pressing thebutton. Make sure the tempera-ture control dial is set to maximumcool.Set the fan to maximum speed.Open the windows partially. Select

and Fresh Air mode.

1.2.

3.4.

1.

2.

3.4.

5.

61


Heating and Cooling

To Cool with A/C

108


AAIIRR CCOONNDDIITTIIOONNIINNGG BBUUTTTTOONNRREECCIIRRCCUULLAATTIIOONN BBUUTTTTOONN

MMOODDEE BBUUTTTTOONNSSFFAANN CCOONNTTRROOLL DDIIAALL

01/04/26 22:02:29 31S84640_111

To warm the interior:Air conditioning, as it cools, removesmoisture from the air. When used incombination with the heater, itmakes the interior warm and dry.

To remove fog from the inside of thewindows:

This setting is suitable for all drivingconditions whenever the outsidetemperature is above 32°F (0°C).

Start the engine.Select and Fresh Air mode.Set the fan to the desired speed.Adjust the warmth of the air withthe temperature control dial. Switch the fan on.

Turn on the air conditioning.Select and Fresh Air mode.Adjust the temperature controldial so the mixture of heated andcooled air feels comfortable.

Switch the fan on.Select .When you select , thesystem automatically switches toFresh Air mode and turns on theA/C.Adjust the temperature controldial so the air flow from thedefroster vents feels warm.Turn on the rear window defoggerto help clear the rear window.

When you switch to another modefrom , the A/C stays on.Press the A/C button to turn it off.

1.2.3.4.

1.2.3.4.

1.2.

3.

4.

CONTINUED

Heating and Cooling


To Heat To Heat and Dehumidify with AirConditioning

To Defog and Defrost

109

01/04/26 22:02:39 31S84640_112

For safety, make sure you have aclear view through all the windowsbefore driving away.

To shut off the system temporarily,turn the fan speed and temperaturecontrol dials all the way to the left.

You should shut the systemcompletely off only for the first fewminutes of driving in cold weather,until the engine coolant warms upenough to operate the heater. Keepthe fan on at all other times so staleair does not build up in the interior.

Start the engine.Select .When you select , thesystem automatically switches toFresh Air mode and turns on theA/C.Switch the fan and temperaturecontrols to maximum.

To rapidly remove exterior frost orice from the windshield (on very colddays), first select the Recirculationmode. Once the windshield is clear,select the Fresh Air mode to avoidfogging the windows.

These settings direct all the air flowto the defroster vents at the base ofthe windshield and the side windowdefroster vents. The air flow will getwarmer and clear the windows fasteras the engine warms up. You canclose the side vents with the dialunderneath each vent. This will sendmore warm air to the windshielddefroster vents.

To remove exterior frost or ice fromthe windshield and side windowsafter the car has been sitting out incold weather:

1.2.

3.

Heating and Cooling


To Turn Everything Off

110

01/04/26 22:02:49 31S84640_113

The automatic climate controlsystem in your Honda picks theproper combination of air condi-tioning, heating, and ventilation tomaintain the interior temperatureyou select. The system also adjuststhe fan speed and air flow levels.

The direction of air flow from thevents in the center and each side ofthe dashboard is adjustable.

To adjust the air flow from thecenter vent, move the tab up-and-down and side-to-side.

The climate control system draws airthrough the exterior vents at thebottom of the windshield. Keepthese vents clear of leaves and otherdebris.

For the climate control system toprovide heating and cooling, theengine must be running.

On the driver’s-side vent, move thevent up-and-down and move the tabside-to-side. On the passenger’s-sidevent, move the tab up-and-down andmove the vent side-to-side.

The side vents can be opened andclosed with the dials underneaththem.

CONTINUED

Only on EX V-6 model

Climate Control System


CCEENNTTEERR VVEENNTTSS DDRRIIVVEERR’’SS--SSIIDDEE VVEENNTT

01/04/26 22:03:00 31S84640_114


Comfort and Convenience Features112

PPAASSSSEENNGGEERR’’SS--SSIIDDEE VVEENNTT

01/04/26 22:03:05 31S84640_115

Pressing the OFF button shuts theclimate control system completelyoff. Keep the system completely offonly for short periods. To keep staleair and mustiness from collecting,you should have the fan running atall times.

When you set the temperature to itslower limit (60°F/18°C) or its upperlimit (90°F/32°C), the system runsat full cooling or heating only. It doesnot regulate the interior temperature.When the temperature is set

between the lower and upper limits,the system regulates the interiortemperature to the set value.

The system automatically selects theproper mix of conditioned and/orheated air that will, as quickly aspossible, raise or lower the interiortemperature from its current level tothe set temperature.

In cold weather, the fan will notcome on automatically until the carhas been driven for a short time andthe heater starts to develop warm air.

To put the Automatic ClimateControl in fully-automatic mode,press the AUTO button and set thefan control dial to AUTO, then setthe desired temperature by turningthe temperature control dial. You willsee FULL AUTO in the system’sdisplay. The light above the

button also shows you whichmode, Recirculation or Fresh Air, isselected.

Fully-automatic Operation




AAUUTTOO BBUUTTTTOONN

FFUULLLL AAUUTTOODDIISSPPLLAAYY


OOFFFF BBUUTTTTOONN

01/04/26 22:03:14 31S84640_116

You can manually select variousfunctions of the Climate Controlsystem when it is in FULL AUTO.All other features remain auto-matically controlled. Making anymanual selection causes the wordFULL to go out.

Press the A/C button to turn the airconditioning on and off. You will seeA/C ON or A/C OFF in the display.

When you turn the A/C off, the sys-tem cannot regulate the inside tem-perature if you set the dial below theoutside temperature. With the A/Con, use the temperature control dialto adjust the temperature of the airflow to a comfortable setting.

Semi-automatic Operation

Air Conditioning (A/C) Button





AAIIRR CCOONNDDIITTIIOONNIINNGG BBUUTTTTOONN

01/04/26 22:03:22 31S84640_117

Some air will come out of the sidevents in all modes.Use the MODE button to select the

vents the air flows from. Some airwill flow from the dashboard cornervents in all modes. Each time youpress the MODE button, the displayshows the mode selected. Press thebutton four times to see all themodes.

You can manually select the fanspeed by turning the fan control dial.When you turn the dial clockwise,the fan is taken out of automaticmode and starts to run at its lowestspeed. Turning the dial fullyclockwise increases the fan’s speed,which increases air flow.

This button controls the source ofthe air going into the system. Whenthe indicator above this button is lit,air from the car’s interior is sentthrough the system again (Recircula-tion mode). When the indicator is off,air is brought in from outside the car(Fresh Air mode).You can, for example, manually putthe system in recirculation modewhen driving through an area ofsmoke or fumes.

CONTINUED

Mode Button

Fan Control Dial

Recirculation Button





MMOODDEE BBUUTTTTOONN

01/04/26 22:03:31 31S84640_118

The main air flow is dividedbetween the dashboard vents andthe floor vents.

The main air flow is dividedbetween the floor vents and de-froster vents at the base of the wind-shield.

The main air flow comesfrom the floor vents.

The main air flow comesfrom the dashboard vents.



01/04/26 22:03:39 31S84640_119

The button directs the mainair flow to the windshield for fasterdefrosting. It also overrides anyMODE selection you may have made.

When you turn off bypressing the button again, thesystem returns to its former settings.

When you select , the A/Cturns on automatically and thesystem selects Fresh Air mode. Forfaster defrosting, manually set thefan speed to high. You can alsoincrease air flow to the windshield byclosing the side vents in thedashboard.

This button turns the rear windowdefogger on and off (see page ).68



Rear Window Defogger Button

117

RREEAARR WWIINNDDOOWW DDEEFFOOGGGGEERR BBUUTTTTOONN

01/04/26 22:03:47 31S84640_120

The climate control system has twosensors. A sunlight sensor is locatedin the top of the dashboard and atemperature sensor is next to thesteering column. Do not cover thesensors or spill any liquid on them.



Sunlight Sensor/TemperatureSensor

118

TTEEMMPPEERRAATTUURREE SSEENNSSOORRSSUUNNLLIIGGHHTT SSEENNSSOORR

01/04/26 22:03:53 31S84640_121

＊

＊

Your Honda’s audio system providesclear reception on both AM and FMbands, while the preset buttons allowyou to easily select your favoritestations.

The cassette system features Dolbynoise reduction, automatic sensing ofchromium-dioxide (CrO ) tape, andauto-reverse for continuous play.

2

Dolby noise reduction manufactured underlicense from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corpo-ration. ‘‘DOLBY’’ and the double-D symbol

are trademarks of Dolby LaboratoriesLicensing Corporation.

For U.S. DX model

Audio System


AM/FM/Cassette Stereo AudioSystem

119

01/04/26 22:04:01 31S84640_122

－

－

▲

▼

You can use any of four methods tofind radio stations on the selectedband: TUNE, SEEK, SCAN or thePreset buttons.

Use the TUNE bar to tunethe radio to a desired frequency.Press the upper part ( ) to tuneto a higher frequency, or the lowerpart ( ) to tune to a lowerfrequency. The frequency numberswill start to change rapidly. Releasethe bar when the display reaches thedesired frequency. To change thefrequency in small increments, pressand release the TUNE bar quickly.

The SEEK functionsearches the band for a station witha strong signal. To activate it, pushthe SEEK switch up or down, thenrelease it. Depending on which wayyou push the switch, the systemscans upward or downward from thecurrent frequency. It stops when itfinds a station with a strong signal.

The ignition switch must be inACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) tooperate the audio system. Turn thesystem on by pushing the PWR/VOL knob.Adjust the volume by turning thePWR/VOL knob.

The band and frequency that theradio was last tuned to is displayed.To change bands, press the AM/FMbutton. On the FM band, ST will bedisplayed if the station is broadcast-ing in stereo. Stereo reproduction onAM is not available.

Audio System


Operating the Radio

TUNE

SEEK

120

01/04/26 22:04:09 31S84640_123

－

CONTINUED

The SCAN functionsamples all the stations with strongsignals on the selected band. Toactivate it, press the SCAN button,then release it. The system will scanup the band for a station with astrong signal. When it finds one, itwill stop and play that station forapproximately five seconds. If you donothing, the system will then scanfor the next strong station and playthat for five seconds. When it plays astation that you want to continuelistening to, press the SCAN buttonagain.

Audio System


SCAN

121

AAMM//FFMMBBUUTTTTOONN

SSCCAANN BBUUTTTTOONN

TTUUNNEE BBAARRPPWWRR//VVOOLLKKNNOOBB

SSEEEEKK SSWWIITTCCHH

01/04/26 22:04:15 31S84640_124

－

Repeat steps 1 to 3 to store a totalof six stations on AM and twelveon FM.

Pick the Preset button you wantfor that station. Press the buttonand hold it until you hear a beep.

Use the TUNE or SEEK functionto tune the radio to a desiredstation.

Select the desired band, AM orFM. FM1 and FM2 let you storetwo frequencies with each Presetbutton.

To store a frequency:

Once a station’s frequency is stored,simply press and release the properpreset button to tune to it.

You can store thefrequencies of your favorite radiostations in the six preset buttons.Each button will store one frequencyon the AM band, and twofrequencies on the FM band.

The preset frequencies will be lost ifyour car’s battery goes dead, isdisconnected, or the radio fuse isremoved.

1.

2.

3.

4.

Audio System


Preset

122

SSEEEEKK SSWWIITTCCHH

AAMM//FFMM BBUUTTTTOONN

PPRREESSEETTBBUUTTTTOONNSS

TTUUNNEE BBAARR

01/04/26 22:04:27 31S84640_125

－

－

These twocontrols adjust the strength of thesound coming from each speaker.The Balance control adjusts the side-to-side strength, while the Fadercontrol adjusts the front-to-backstrength.

To adjust the fader, push on theBASS/FADER control knob to get itto pop out. Pull it out slightly farther,and adjust the front-to-back sound toyour liking. Push the knob back inwhen you are done so you cannotchange the setting by accidentallybumping it.

To adjust the balance, push on theTREBLE/BALANCE control knobto get it to pop out. Pull it out slightlyfarther, and adjust the side-to-sidesound to your liking. Push the knobback in when you are done so youcannot change the setting byaccidentally bumping it.

Use these controlsto adjust the tone to your liking.

To adjust the Treble level, push onthe TREBLE/BALANCE controlknob to get it to pop out. Withoutpulling it out farther, turn the knobto adjust the treble level. Push theknob back in when you are done soyou cannot change the setting byaccidentally bumping it.

To adjust the Bass level, push on theBASS/FADER control knob to get itto pop out. Without pulling it outfarther, turn the knob to adjust thebass level. Push the knob back inwhen you are done so you cannotchange the setting by accidentallybumping it.

For information, See page .170

Adjusting the SoundBalance/Fader

Treble/Bass

Radio Frequencies and Reception

Audio System


TTRREEBBLLEE//BBAALLAANNCCEECCOONNTTRROOLL

BBAASSSS//FFAADDEERRCCOONNTTRROOLL

01/04/26 22:04:38 31S84640_126

▲

－

－Turn the audio system ON. Makesure the tape opening on the cassetteis facing to the right, then insert thecassette most of the way into the slot.The system will pull it in the rest ofthe way, and begin to play.

The tape direction indicator will lightto show you which side of thecassette is playing. The indicatesthe side you inserted facing upwardis now playing. If you want to playthe other side, press the PROGbutton.

When the system reaches the end ofthe tape, it will automatically reversedirection and play the other side. Ifyou want to remove the cassettefrom the drive, press the EJECTbutton.

With a cassette playing, you can usethe FF, REW, SKIP, or REPEATfunction to find a desired program.

Fast Forward and Re-wind move the tape rapidly. To re-wind the tape, push the REW button.You will see REW in the display. Tofast forward the tape, push the FFbutton. You will see FF displayed.Press the PLAY button to take thesystem out of rewind or fast forward.If the system reaches the end of thetape while in fast forward or rewind,it automatically stops that function,reverses direction, and begins to play.

The Skip Function allowsyou to find the beginning of a songor passage. To find the beginning ofthe song or passage currentlyplaying, push the SKIP switch down.You will see REW flashing in thedisplay as the tape rewinds. To findthe beginning of the next song, pushthe SKIP switch up. You will see FFflashing in the display as the tapefast forwards. When the systemfinds the beginning of a song orpassage, it goes back to PLAY mode.

Dolby noise reduction turns on whenyou insert a cassette. If the tape wasnot recorded with Dolby noise reduc-tion, turn it off by pressing the

button.

Operating the Cassette Player

Tape Search Functions

FF/REW

SKIP

Audio System


01/04/26 22:04:48 31S84640_127

－

CONTINUED

The Repeat functioncontinuously replays the currentsong or passage. Press the RPTbutton to activate it; you will see RPTdisplayed as a reminder. When thesystem reaches the end of the songor passage currently playing, it willautomatically go into rewind. Whenit senses the beginning of the samesong or passage, the system returnsto PLAY mode. It will continue torepeat this same program until youdeactivate REPEAT by pressing thebutton again.

Audio System


REPEAT

125

FFFFBBUUTTTTOONN

EEJJEECCTT BBUUTTTTOONN

RREEWWBBUUTTTTOONN

PPLLAAYY BBUUTTTTOONN

DDOOLLBBYY BBUUTTTTOONNSSKKIIPP BBUUTTTTOONN

CCAASSSSEETTTTEE SSLLOOTT

PPRROOGG BBUUTTTTOONN

TTAAPPEE DDIIRREECCTTIIOONNIINNDDIICCAATTOORR

RRPPTT BBUUTTTTOONN

01/04/26 22:04:55 31S84640_128

Damaged cassettes can jam insidethe drive or cause other problems.See page for information oncassette care and protection.

The SKIP and REPEAT functionsuse silent periods on the tape to findthe end of a song or passage. Thesefeatures may not work to yoursatisfaction if there is almost no gapbetween selections, a high noiselevel between selections, or a silentperiod in the middle of a selection.

181

Audio System


Caring for Cassettes

126

TTAAPPEE DDIIRREECCTTIIOONNIINNDDIICCAATTOORR

SSKKIIPP BBUUTTTTOONN

EEJJEECCTT BBUUTTTTOONN CCAASSSSEETTTTEE SSLLOOTT

RREEWWBBUUTTTTOONN

RRPPTT BBUUTTTTOONN FFFFBBUUTTTTOONN

PPLLAAYY BBUUTTTTOONN


DDOOLLBBYY BBUUTTTTOONN

01/04/26 22:05:02 31S84640_129

CONTINUED

A Compact Disc changer is availablefrom your dealer. It holds up to sixdiscs, providing several hours ofcontinuous entertainment. Youoperate the CD changer with thesame controls used for the radio andcassette player.

Your dealer also has an accessory in-dash single CD player available thatis operated by the radio controls. Tooperate this unit, use the instructions(except for those relating to multiplediscs) in this section.

Using the instructions that camewith the changer, load the desiredCDs in the magazine, and load themagazine in the changer. Play onlystandard round discs. Odd-shapedCDs may jam in the drive or causeother problems.

Operating the Optional CDChanger

Audio System


RRAANNDDOOMM IINNDDIICCAATTOORRTTAAPPEE//CCDD BBUUTTTTOONN

AAMM//FFMM BBUUTTTTOONN RREEPPEEAATT IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

RRPPTT BBUUTTTTOONN

SSKKIIPP SSWWIITTCCHH

PPWWRR//VVOOLL KKNNOOBB

PPRREESSEETT BBUUTTTTOONNSS

01/04/26 22:05:10 31S84640_130

－

－

－When you activate the

Repeat feature by pressing the RPTbutton, the system continuouslyreplays the current track. You willsee RPT in the display as a reminder.Press the RPT button again to turn itoff.

This feature,when activated, plays the tracks on aCD in random order, rather than inthe order they are recorded on theCD. To activate Random Play, pressand hold the RPT button until yousee RDM in the display. The systemwill then select and play tracksrandomly on the current disc. Whenall tracks on that disc have beenplayed, the next disc is loaded andplayed randomly. This continuesuntil you deactivate Random Play bypressing RPT again.

If you push and hold the SKIP switch,you will hear a beep and the systemwill continue to move across tracks.Release the switch when you think ithas reached the desired place on thedisc.

To select a different disc, press theappropriate preset button (1 6). Ifyou select an empty slot in themagazine, the changer will, afterfinding that slot empty, try to loadthe CD in the next slot. Thiscontinues until it finds a CD to loadand play.

You can use the SKIP switch toselect tracks within a disc. If youpush and release the SKIP switch,the system will move to thebeginning of a track. Push the switchup to move to the beginning of thenext track, and push the switchdown to move to the beginning ofthe current track.

For best results when using CD-Rdiscs, use only high quality discslabeled for audio use. Whenrecording a CD-R, the recordingmust be closed in order for the discto be used by CD players. CD-RWdiscs will not work in this unit.

When that disc ends, the next disc inthe magazine is loaded and played.After the last disc finishes, thesystem returns to disc 1.

Press the CD button until ‘‘CD’’appears in the display. The systemwill start to play the first track of thefirst disc in the magazine.

To operate the CD changer or player,the ignition must be in ACCESSORY(I) or ON (II) and the audio systemmust be on.

Audio System


REPEAT

RANDOM PLAY

128

01/04/26 22:05:19 31S84640_131

If the system is in Repeat mode, youmust turn it off by pressing RPTbefore you can select Random Play.Then press the button again untilyou see RDM displayed.

To take the system out of CD mode,press the AM/FM button or insert acassette in the player. If a tape isalready in the cassette player, pressthe TAPE button. When you returnto CD mode, play will continue at thesame disc and track.

For information on how to handleand protect compact discs, see page

.

If you turn the system off while a CDis playing, either with the PWR/VOLknob or the ignition switch, play willcontinue at the same disc and trackwhen you turn it back on.

175

Audio System


Protecting Compact Discs

129


RRAANNDDOOMM IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

RREEPPEEAATT IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

SSKKIIPP SSWWIITTCCHH

RRPPTT BBUUTTTTOONN

TTAAPPEE//CCDD BBUUTTTTOONN



01/04/26 22:05:28 31S84640_132

If you see an error indication in thedisplay while operating the CDchanger, find the cause in the chartto the right. If you cannot clear theerror indication, take the car to yourHonda dealer.

Indication Cause Solution

Disc-changermalfunction.

CD magazine ejectionimpossible.Disc is in changermechanism.High temperature.

Misconnection ordisconnection of CDchanger.No CD magazine in theCD changer.No CD in magazine.

If the code disappears within a few seconds,unit is OK.Press the magazine eject button and pull outthe magazine, check for error indication. Insertthe magazine again. If the code does notdisappear or the magazine cannot be pulled out,consult your Honda dealer.Press the magazine eject button. If the maga-zine does not eject, consult your Honda dealer.Press the magazine eject button, and insert anempty magazine.Will disappear when the temperature returns tonormal.

See your Honda dealer.

Insert CD magazine.

Insert CD in magazine.

CD Changer Error Indications

Audio System


01/04/26 22:05:38 31S84640_133


The ignition switch must be inACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) tooperate the audio system. Turn thesystem on by pushing the PWR/VOL knob or the AM/FM button.Adjust the volume by turning theknob.

The band and frequency that theradio was last tuned to is displayed.To change bands, press the AM/FMbutton. On the FM band, ST will bedisplayed if the station is broadcast-ing in stereo. Stereo reproduction onAM is not available.

CONTINUED

For LX and U.S. LX V-6 models

Audio System

AM/FM/CD Audio System

Operating the Radio


01/04/26 22:05:47 31S84640_134

－

－－You can use any of five methods tofind radio stations on the selectedband: TUNE, SEEK, SCAN, AUTOSELECT, and the Preset buttons.

Use the TUNE knob totune the radio to a desired frequency.Turn the TUNE knob to the right totune to a higher frequency, or to theleft to tune to a lower frequency.Turn the knob right or left until thedisplay reaches the desiredfrequency.

The SEEK functionsearches the band for a station witha strong signal. To activate it, pressthe SEEK bar on either the or

side, then release it.Depending on which side you press,the system scans upward or down-ward from the current frequency. Itstops when it finds a station with astrong signal.

The SCAN functionsamples all the stations with strongsignals on the selected band. Toactivate it, press the SCAN button,then release it. When the system isin the SCAN mode, SCAN shows inthe display. The system will scan upthe band for a station with a strongsignal. When it finds one, it will stopand play that station forapproximately five seconds. If you donothing, the system will then scanfor the next strong station and playthat for five seconds. When it plays astation that you want to continuelistening to, press the SCAN buttonagain.

Audio System


TUNE

SEEK SCAN

132

01/04/26 22:05:53 31S84640_135

－



Select the desired band, AM orFM. FM1 and FM2 let you storetwo frequencies with each Presetbutton.





Use the TUNE, SEEK, or SCANfunction to tune the radio to adesired station.

1.

2.

3.

4.

Preset

Audio System


AAMM//FFMM BBUUTTTTOONN SSTTEERREEOO IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

SSCCAANN IINNDDIICCAATTOORR


AAUUTTOOSSEELLEECCTTBBUUTTTTOONN

SSCCAANNBBUUTTTTOONN


TTUUNNEE//MMOODDEE KKNNOOBBSSEEEEKK//SSKKIIPP BBAARR

01/04/26 22:06:04 31S84640_136

－ If you aretraveling far from home and can nolonger receive the stations youpreset, you can use the Auto Selectfeature to find stations in the localarea.

If you are in a remote area, AutoSelect may not find six strong AMstations or twelve strong FM stations.If this happens, you will see a ‘‘0’’displayed when you press any presetbutton that does not have a stationstored.

To activate Auto Select, press theA. SEL button. A. SEL will flash inthe display, and the system will gointo scan mode for several seconds.It automatically scans both bands,looking for stations with strongsignals. It stores the frequencies ofsix AM stations and twelve FMstations in the preset buttons. Youcan then use the preset buttons toselect those stations.

If you do not like the stations AutoSelect has stored, you can storeother frequencies in the presetbuttons. Use the TUNE, SEEK, orSCAN function to find the desiredfrequencies, then store them in theselected preset buttons as describedpreviously.

Auto Select does not erase thefrequencies that you preset pre-viously. When you return home, turnoff Auto Select by pressing theA. SEL button. The preset buttonswill then select the frequencies youoriginally set.

Audio System


AUTO SELECT

134


TTUUNNEEKKNNOOBB

SSEEEEKK BBAARR AA..SSEELL BBUUTTTTOONN

AAUUTTOO SSEELLEECCTT IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

01/04/26 22:06:13 31S84640_137

－

－

Bass, Treble, Balance, and Fader areeach adjustable. You select which ofthese you want to adjust by pressingthe TUNE knob. The mode changesfrom BAS to TRE to FAD to BAL,and then back to the selected audiomode, each time you press theTUNE knob. Each mode is shown inthe display as it changes.

These twomodes adjust the strength of thesound coming from each speaker.BAL adjusts the side-to-side strength,while FAD adjusts the front-to-backstrength.

Select BAL or FAD by pressing theTUNE knob. Adjust the Balance orFader to your liking by turning theTUNE knob.The displayed number shows youthe current setting.When the adjustment level reachesthe center, you will see ‘‘ ’’.

Use these modes toadjust the tone to your liking. SelectTRE or BAS by pressing the TUNEknob. Adjust the desired mode byturning the TUNE knob.The displayed number shows youthe current setting.When the adjustment level reachesthe center, you will see ‘‘ ’’.

The system will automatically returnthe display to the selected audiomode about five seconds after youstop adjusting a mode with theTUNE knob.

Adjusting the Sound

Balance/Fader

Treble/Bass

Audio System


TTUUNNEE KKNNOOBB

AAddjjuussttmmeenntt LLeevveell

01/04/26 22:06:22 31S84640_138

You operate the CD player with thesame controls used for the radio.

You can use the instrument panelbrightness control dial to adjust the il-lumination of the audio system (seepage ). The audio systemilluminates when the parking lightsare on, even if the radio is turned off.

For information, see page .

With the ignition switch inACCESSORY (I) or ON (II), insertthe disc into the CD slot. Push thedisc in halfway, the drive will pull itin the rest of the way and begin toplay. The number of the track that isplaying is shown in the display.

You can also play 3-inch (8-cm) discswithout using an adapter ring. Playonly standard round discs. Odd-shaped CDs may jam in the drive orcause other problems.


170

65

Audio System


Operating the CD Player

Audio System Lighting


136

CCDD//TTAAPPEE BBUUTTTTOONN RREEPPEEAATT IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

AAMM//FFMM BBUUTTTTOONN CCDD SSLLOOTT RRPPTT BBUUTTTTOONN

EEJJEECCTTBBUUTTTTOONN


SSEEEEKK//SSKKIIPP BBAARR

RRAANNDDOOMM IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

AA..SSEELL//RRDDMM BBUUTTTTOONN

01/04/26 22:06:34 31S84640_139

You can use the SEEK/SKIP barwhile a disc is playing to selectpassages and change tracks.

To move rapidly within a track, pressand hold the SEEK/SKIP bar. Pressthe side to move forward. Youwill see CUE in the display. Press the

side to move backward. Youwill see REW displayed. Release thebar when the system reaches thepoint you want.

Press the eject button to remove thedisc from the drive.

If you eject the disc, but do notremove it from the slot, the systemwill automatically reload the discafter 15 seconds and put the CDplayer in pause mode. To beginplaying the disc, press the CD button.

If you turn the system off while a CDis playing, either with the PWR/VOLknob or by turning off the ignition,the disc will stay in the drive. Whenyou turn the system back on, the CDwill begin playing where it left off.

You can switch to the radio while aCD is playing by pressing the AM/FM button. Press the CD button toreturn to playing the CD. The CDwill begin playing where it left off.

When the system reaches the end ofthe disc, it will return to the begin-ning and play that disc again.

Each time you press and release theside of the SEEK/SKIP bar,

the system skips forward to thebeginning of the next track. Pressand release the side to skipbackward to the beginning of thecurrent track. Press it again to skipto the beginning of the previoustrack.


Audio System

137

01/04/26 22:06:42 31S84640_140

－

－

－＋

To activate the Repeatfeature, press and release the RPTbutton. You will see RPT in thedisplay. The system continuouslyreplays the current track. Press theRPT button again to turn it off.

A Compact Disc changer is availablefor your car. It holds up to six discs,providing several hours ofcontinuous entertainment. Youoperate this CD changer with thesame controls used for the in-dashCD player.

Load the desired CDs in themagazine and load the magazine inthe changer according to theinstructions that came with the unit.Play only standard round discs. Odd-shaped CDs may jam in the drive orcause other problems.

This feature,when activated, plays the tracks onthe CD in random order, rather thanin the order they are recorded on theCD. To activate Random Play, pressand release the A. SEL/RDM button.You will see RDM in the display. Thesystem will then select and playtracks randomly. This continuesuntil you deactivate Random Play bypressing A. SEL/RDM again.

To select the CD changer, press theCD button. The disc and tracknumbers will be displayed.


To select a different disc, use thePreset 5 (DISC ) or Preset 6(DISC ) button. Press the Preset 6button to select the next disc in themagazine. Press the Preset 5 buttonto select the previous disc. If youselect an empty slot in the magazine,the changer will, after finding thatslot empty, try to load the CD in thenext slot. This continues until it findsa CD to load and play.

Audio System


REPEAT Operating the CD Changer(Optional)

RANDOM PLAY

138

01/04/26 22:06:52 31S84640_141

When you switch back to CD mode,the system selects the same unit (in-dash or changer) that was playingwhen you switched out of CD mode.

To use the SKIP, REPEAT, andRANDOM functions, refer to the in-dash player operating instructions.

If you load a CD in the in-dash playerwhile the changer is playing a CD,the system will stop the changer andbegin playing the in-dash CD. Toselect the changer again, press theCD button. Play will begin where itleft off. Use the CD button to switchbetween the player and the changer.


.

If you eject the in-dash CD while it isplaying, the system will automaticallyswitch to the CD changer and beginplay where it left off. If there are noCDs in the changer, the display willflash. You will have to select anothermode (AM or FM) with the button.

175

Audio System



139

01/04/26 22:07:00 31S84640_142

If you see an error indication in thedisplay while operating the CDplayer, find the cause in the chart tothe right. If you cannot clear theerror indication, take the car to yourHonda dealer.


FOCUS Error

Mechanical Error

High temperature.

Press the EJECT button and pull out the disc.Check if the disc is inserted correctly in the CDplayer.Make sure the disc is not scratched or damaged.Press the EJECT button and pull out the disc.Check the disc for damage or deformation.If the CD cannot be pulled out or the errorindication does not disappear after the disc isejected, see your Honda dealer.Do not try to force the disc out of the player.Will disappear when the temperature returns tonormal.

CD Player Error Indications

Audio System


01/04/26 22:07:08 31S84640_143



FOCUS Error

No CD in the CDmagazine

Mechanical Error

High temperature.

No CD magazine in theCD changer.

Press the magazine eject button and pull outthe magazine, check for error indication. Insertthe magazine again. If the code does notdisappear or the magazine cannot be pulled out,consult your Honda dealer.Insert CD.

Press the magazine eject button and pull outthe magazine, check for error indication. Insertthe magazine again. If the code does notdisappear or the magazine cannot be pulled out,consult your Honda dealer.Will disappear when the temperature returns tonormal.Insert CD magazine.


Audio System


01/04/26 22:07:17 31S84640_144

＊

＊


To operate the cassette player, theignition switch must be inACCESSORY(I) or ON(II). Makesure the tape opening on the cassetteis facing to the right, then insert thecassette most of the way into the slot.The system will pull it in the rest ofthe way, and begin to play.

2



Operating the Cassette Player(Optional)

Audio System


TTAAPPEE DDIIRREECCTTIIOONN IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

RREEPPEEAATTIINNDDIICCAATTOORR

RREEPPEEAATTBBUUTTTTOONN


PPWWRR//VVOOLLKKNNOOBB

CCDD//TTAAPPEEBBUUTTTTOONN

SSEEEEKK//SSKKIIPP BBAARR PPLLAAYY//PPRROOGGBBUUTTTTOONN

NNRR BBUUTTTTOONN

RREEWW BBUUTTTTOONN FFFF BBUUTTTTOONN

01/04/26 22:07:28 31S84640_145

▲

The tape direction indicator will lightto show you which side of thecassette is playing. The indicatesthe side you inserted facing upwardis now playing. If you want to playthe other side, press the PLAY/PROG button.

Dolby noise reduction turns on whenyou insert a cassette. The indi-cator will light in the display. If thetape was not recorded with Dolbynoise reduction, turn it off bypressing the NR button.

When the system reaches the end ofthe tape, it will automatically reversedirection and play the other side. Ifyou want to remove the cassettefrom the drive, press the EJECTbutton on the cassette player.

Noise reduction remains off until youturn it on by pressing the buttonagain.

If you turn the system off while atape is playing, either with the PWR/VOL knob or by turning off theignition, the cassette will remain inthe drive. When you turn the systemback on, the cassette player will be inpause mode. To begin playing, pressthe PLAY/PROG button.

To switch to the radio or CD playerwhile a tape is playing, press theAM/FM, or CD/TAPE button. Tochange back to the cassette player,push the CD/TAPE button.

Audio System


01/04/26 22:07:35 31S84640_146

－－With a cassette playing, you can usethe FF, REW, SKIP, or REPEATfunction to find a desired program.

The Skip function allowsyou to find the beginning of a songor passage. To activate SKIP, pressthe SEEK/SKIP bar. Press the

side to advance to thebeginning of the next song orpassage, or the side to return tothe beginning of the current song orpassage. FF or REW will flash in thedisplay as the tape moves. When thesystem reaches the beginning of thenext song or passage (FF), or thebeginning of the current one (REW),it goes back to PLAY mode.

Fast Forward and Re-wind move the tape rapidly. To re-wind the tape, push the REW button.You will see REW in the display. Tofast forward the tape, push the FFbutton. You will see FF displayed.Press the FF, REW or PLAY/PROGbutton to take the system out of re-wind or fast forward. When the sys-tem reaches the end of the tape, itreverses direction and begins to play.

Audio System


Tape Search Functions SKIPFF/REW

144

01/04/26 22:07:42 31S84640_147

－ The Repeat functioncontinuously replays the currentsong or passage. Press the RPTbutton to activate it; you will see RPTdisplayed as a reminder. When thesystem reaches the end of the songor passage currently playing, it willautomatically go into rewind. Whenit senses the beginning of the samesong or passage, the system returnsto PLAY mode. It will continue torepeat this same program until youdeactivate REPEAT by pressing thebutton again.



181

Audio System


REPEAT Caring for the Cassette Player

145

01/04/26 22:07:47 31S84640_148

＊

＊



The in-dash CD changer holds up tosix discs. You operate the CDchanger with the same controls usedfor the radio. See page for CDchanger operation.



156

2

For U.S. EX, Canada EX-L, and all EXV-6 models

AM/FM/Cassette/CD ChangerAudio System

Audio System


TTUUNNEE KKNNOOBB

FFMM BBUUTTTTOONN

SSEEEEKKBBUUTTTTOONNSS

SSTTEERREEOOIINNDDIICCAATTOORR

PPWWRR//VVOOLL KKNNOOBB AAMM BBUUTTTTOONN

SSCCAANN BBUUTTTTOONN PPRREESSEETT BBUUTTTTOONNSS

01/04/26 22:07:57 31S84640_149

－

－

○ ○－＋

The ignition switch must be inACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) tooperate the audio system. Turn thesystem on by pressing the PWR/VOL knob or the AM or FM button.Adjust the volume by turning theknob.

The band and frequency that theradio was last tuned to is displayed.To change bands, press the AM orFM button. On the FM band, ST willbe displayed if the station is broad-casting in stereo. Stereoreproduction on AM is not available.

The anti-theft feature will disable thesystem if it is disconnected from thecar’s battery. To get the systemworking again, you must enter acode number (see page ).

You can use any of five methods tofind radio stations on the selectedband: TUNE, SEEK, SCAN, AUTOSELECT, and the Preset buttons.

Use the TUNE knob totune the radio to a desired frequency.Turn the TUNE knob to the right totune to a higher frequency, or to theleft to tune to a lower frequency.Turn the knob right or left until thedisplay reaches the desiredfrequency.

The SEEK functionsearches the band for a station witha strong signal. To activate it, presseither SEEK button ( or ), thenrelease it. Depending on whichSEEK button you press, the systemscans upward or downward from thecurrent frequency. It stops when itfinds a station with a strong signal.

183

CONTINUED

Operating the Radio

TUNE

SEEK

Audio System


01/04/26 22:08:07 31S84640_150

－－The SCAN functionsamples all the stations with strongsignals on the selected band. Toactivate it, press the SCAN button,then release it. When the system isin the SCAN mode, SCAN shows inthe display. The system will scan upthe band for a station with a strongsignal. When it finds one, it will stopand play that station forapproximately five seconds. If you donothing, the system will then scanfor the next strong station and playthat for five seconds. When it plays astation that you want to continuelistening to, press the SCAN buttonagain.


To store a frequency:Select the desired band, AM orFM. FM1 and FM2 let you storetwo frequencies with each Presetbutton.





Use the TUNE, SEEK, or SCANfunction to tune the radio to adesired station.

1.

2.

3.

4.

SCAN Preset

Audio System


01/04/26 22:08:17 31S84640_151



If you are in a remote area, AutoSelect may not find six strong AMstations or twelve strong FM stations.If this happens, you will see a ‘‘0’’displayed when you press any presetbutton that does not have a stationstored. CONTINUED

Audio System


AUTO SELECT

149

TTUUNNEE KKNNOOBB



AA.. SSEELLBBUUTTTTOONN

AA.. SSEELLIINNDDIICCAATTOORR

AAMM BBUUTTTTOONN

PPRREESSEETT BBUUTTTTOONNSSSSCCAANN BBUUTTTTOONN

FFMM BBUUTTTTOONN

01/04/26 22:08:25 31S84640_152



Audio System


TTUUNNEE KKNNOOBB



AA.. SSEELLBBUUTTTTOONN

AA.. SSEELLIINNDDIICCAATTOORR

AAMM BBUUTTTTOONN


FFMM BBUUTTTTOONN


01/04/26 22:08:32 31S84640_153

－

－

Bass, Treble, Balance, and Fader areeach adjustable. You select which ofthese you want to adjust by pressingthe TUNE knob. The mode changesfrom BAS to TRE to FAD to BAL,and then back to the selected audiomode, each time you press theTUNE knob.

The system will automatically returnthe display to the selected audiomode about five seconds after youstop adjusting a mode with theTUNE knob.

Use these modes toadjust the tone to your liking. SelectTRE or BAS by pressing the TUNEknob. Adjust the desired mode byturning the TUNE knob.The displayed number shows youthe current setting.When the adjustment level reachesthe center, you will see ‘‘ ’’.

These twomodes adjust the strength of thesound coming from each speaker.BAL adjusts the side-to-side strength,while FAD adjusts the front-to-backstrength.

Select BAL or FAD by pressing theTUNE knob. Adjust the Balance orFader to your liking by turning theTUNE knob.The displayed number shows youthe current setting.When the adjustment level reachesthe center, you will see ‘‘ ’’.

Audio System


Adjusting the Sound

Treble/Bass

Balance/Fader

151

TTUUNNEE KKNNOOBBAAddjjuussttmmeenntt LLeevveell

01/04/26 22:08:43 31S84640_154

▲You can use the instrument panelbrightness control dial to adjust the il-lumination of the audio system (seepage ). The audio systemilluminates when the parking lightsare on, even if the radio is turned off.

For information, see page .

The ignition switch must be inACCESSORY (I) or ON (II).Make sure the tape opening on thecassette is facing to the right, theninsert the cassette most of the wayinto the slot. The system will pull itin the rest of the way, and begin toplay.


Dolby noise reduction turns on whenyou insert a cassette. The indi-cator will light in the display. If thetape was not recorded with Dolbynoise reduction, turn it off bypressing the button.

Noise reduction remains off until youturn it on by pressing the buttonagain.


You can remove the cassette withthe ignition switch in any position,even if the audio system is turned off.

If you turn the system off while atape is playing, either with the PWR/VOL knob or by turning off theignition, the cassette will remain inthe drive. When you turn the systemback on, the tape will begin playingwhere it left off.

To switch to the radio or CDchanger while listening to a tape,press the AM, FM or CD button. Tochange back to the cassette player,press the TAPE button.

65

170

Audio System


Audio System Lighting



152

01/04/26 22:08:56 31S84640_155

－

CONTINUED


Fast Forward andRewind move the tape rapidly. Torewind the tape, push the REWbutton. You will see REW in thedisplay. To fast forward the tape,push the FF button. You will see FFdisplayed. Press the FF, REW orPLAY button to take the system outof rewind or fast forward. When thesystem reaches the end of the tape,it reverses direction and begins toplay.


FF/REW

Audio System


DDOOLLBBYY IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

AAMM BBUUTTTTOONN

PPLLAAYYBBUUTTTTOONN DDOOLLBBYY BBUUTTTTOONN

CCDD BBUUTTTTOONN

FFFF BBUUTTTTOONN

TTAAPPEEBBUUTTTTOONN



FFMM BBUUTTTTOONN

RREEWWBBUUTTTTOONN

TTAAPPEE DDIIRREECCTTIIOONN IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

CCAASSSSEETTTTEE SSLLOOTT

TTAAPPEE EEJJEECCTTBBUUTTTTOONN

01/04/26 22:09:05 31S84640_156

－

○

○

○ ○

－

＋

－＋

The SKIP function allowsyou to find the beginning of a songor passage. To skip to the beginningof a song or passage currentlyplaying, push the button. You willsee REW flashing in the display asthe tape rewinds. To skip to thebeginning of the next song, push the

button. You will see FF flashing inthe display as the tape fast forwards.When the system finds the begin-ning of a song or passage, it goesback to PLAY.

To stop the SKIP function before itfinds the beginning of a song orpassage, press either of the SKIPbuttons ( or ).

Audio System


SKIP

154

RREEPPEEAATT IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

SSKKIIPP BBUUTTTTOONNSS

FFFF BBUUTTTTOONN

RREEWW BBUUTTTTOONN

RRPPTT BBUUTTTTOONN

01/04/26 22:09:11 31S84640_157

－ The Repeat functioncontinuously replays the currentsong or passage. Press the RPTbutton to activate it; you will see RPTdisplayed as a reminder. When thesystem reaches the end of the songor passage currently playing, it willautomatically go into rewind. Whenit senses the beginning of the samesong or passage, the system returnsto PLAY mode. It will continue torepeat this same program until youdeactivate REPEAT by pressing thebutton again.Pressing the REW or FF button, oreither of the SKIP buttons, also turnsoff REPEAT.



181

Audio System


REPEAT Caring for the Cassette Player

155

01/04/26 22:09:19 31S84640_158

To load the CDs or operate the CDchanger, the ignition switch must bein ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II).

Load and play only standard rounddiscs. Odd-shaped CDs may jam inthe drive or cause other problems.You cannot load and play 3-inch(8-cm) discs in this system.

Your Honda’s audio system has anin-dash CD changer that holds up tosix discs, providing several hours ofcontinuous entertainment. Youoperate this CD changer with thesame controls used for the radio andcassette player.


Operating the CD Changer

Audio System



RREEPPEEAATT BBUUTTTTOONN

LLOOAADD BBUUTTTTOONN


CCDD EEJJEECCTTBBUUTTTTOONN

CCDD SSLLOOTT

RRDDMM BBUUTTTTOONN CCDD BBUUTTTTOONN

01/04/26 22:09:27 31S84640_159

To load multiple CDs in oneoperation:

Repeat this until all six positionsare loaded. The system will thenbegin playing the last CD loaded.

If you are not loading CDs into all sixpositions, press the Load buttonagain after the last CD has loaded.The system will begin playing thelast CD loaded.

If you stop loading CDs before all sixpositions are filled, and you do notpress the Load button, the systemwill wait for ten seconds, then stopthe load operation and begin playingthe last CD loaded.

To load a single CD:

Press and release the Load button.

Press and hold the Load buttonuntil you hear a beep and see‘‘LOAd’’ in the display, thenrelease the button.

On the upper left side of thedisplay, the disc number for anempty position will begin blinkingand the green CD Loadedindicator will come on.

When the disc number for anempty position starts to blink andthe green CD Loaded indicatorcomes on, you will see LOAd inthe display, then insert the discinto the CD slot. Insert it onlyabout halfway, the drive will pull itin the rest of the way.

When LOAd appears again in thedisplay, insert the next disc intothe CD slot.

Insert the disc into the CD slot.Insert it only about halfway, thedrive will pull it in the rest of theway. You will see BUSY in thedisplay. The CD loaded indicatorturns red and blinks as the CD isloaded.

The system will load the CD, andbegin playing it.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

1.

2.

3.

CONTINUED

Loading CDs in the Changer

Audio System


01/04/26 22:09:42 31S84640_160

If you press the Load button while aCD is playing, the system will stopplaying that CD and start the loadingsequence. It will then play the CDjust loaded.

You can also load a CD into an emptyposition while a CD is playing bypressing the appropriate presetbutton. Select an empty position (thedisc number indicator is off), andpress the preset button for thatposition (1 to 6). The system willstop playing the current CD and startthe loading sequence. It will thenplay the CD just loaded.

Audio System


LLOOAADD BBUUTTTTOONN

CCDD SSLLOOTT


DDIISSCC NNUUMMBBEERR

CCDD LLOOAADDEEDD IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

TTAAPPEE BBUUTTTTOONN

FFMMBBUUTTTTOONN

AAMMBBUUTTTTOONN

01/04/26 22:09:49 31S84640_161

－

－

－

○○

○

○

＋－

＋

－

Select the CD changer by pressingthe CD button. You will see ‘‘Cd’’ inthe display. The system will beginplaying the last selected disc in theCD changer. You will see the discand track numbers displayed.

When that disc ends, the next disc inthe CD changer is loaded and played.After the last disc finishes, thesystem returns to disc 1.

To select a different disc, press theappropriate Preset button (1 6). Ifyou select an empty position in theCD changer, the system will go intothe loading sequence (see page ).

You can use the SKIP buttons whilea disc is playing to select passagesand change tracks.

To activate the Repeatfeature, press and release the RPTbutton. You will see RPT in thedisplay as a reminder. The systemcontinuously replays the currenttrack. Press the RPT button again toturn it off. Pressing either of theSKIP buttons also turns off therepeat feature.

This feature,when activated, plays the trackswithin a CD in random order, ratherthan in the order they are recordedon the CD. To activate Random Play,press the RDM button. You will seeRDM in the display. The system willthen select and play tracks randomly.This continues until you deactivateRandom Play by pressing the RDMbutton again, or you select adifferent CD with a preset button.

To move rapidly within a track, pressand hold the appropriate SKIPbutton. You will hear a beep and thesystem will continue to move. Pressthe button to move forward, orthe button to move backward.Release the button when the systemreaches the point you want.

Each time you press the buttonand release it, the system skipsforward to the beginning of the nexttrack. Press and release thebutton to skip backward to thebeginning of the current track. Pressand release it again to skip to thebeginning of the previous track.

157

CONTINUED

Operation REPEAT

RANDOM PLAY

Audio System


01/04/26 22:09:59 31S84640_162

To take the system out of CD mode,press the AM or FM button, or inserta cassette in the player. If a tape isalready in the cassette player, pressthe TAPE button. When you returnto CD mode by pressing the CDbutton, play will continue at the samepoint that it left off.

If you turn the system off while a CDis playing, either with the PWR/VOLknob or the ignition switch, play willcontinue at the same point when youturn it back on.

Audio System




RRDDMMBBUUTTTTOONN

SSKKIIPPBBUUTTTTOONNSS

CCDDBBUUTTTTOONN

RRPPTT BBUUTTTTOONN

FFMMBBUUTTTTOONN

AAMMBBUUTTTTOONN

TTAAPPEE BBUUTTTTOONN

RRPPTT IINNDDIICCAATTOORRRRDDMM IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

01/04/26 22:10:05 31S84640_163

To remove the disc that is currentlyplaying, press the Eject button. Youwill see ‘‘EJEC’’ in the display. Whenyou remove the disc from the slot,the system automatically begins theLoad sequence so you can loadanother CD in that position. If you donot load another CD, after tenseconds the system begins playingthe next disc in the changer. If thechanger is empty, the system selectsthe previous mode (AM, FM, orTape).

If you do not remove the disc fromthe slot, the system will reload thedisc after 15 seconds and put the CDchanger in pause mode. To beginplaying the disc, press the CD button.

To remove a different CD from thechanger, first select it with theappropriate preset button. When thatCD begins playing, press the Ejectbutton. CONTINUED

Removing CDs from the Changer


Audio System

161

CCDD SSLLOOTT CCDD EEJJEECCTT BBUUTTTTOONN

CCDD BBUUTTTTOONN

01/04/26 22:10:14 31S84640_164

If you press the Eject button whilelistening to the radio or tape, or withthe audio system turned off, the discthat was last selected is ejected.After that disc is ejected, pressingthe Eject button again will eject thenext disc in the numerical order. Bydoing this six times, you can removeall the CDs from the changer.

In any mode, if you press the Ejectbutton and hold it until you hear abeep, the system will eject all of thediscs in the changer.

You can also eject discs when theignition switch is off. The disc thatwas last selected is ejected first. Youcan eject up to five discs, one at atime.


.175

Audio System



162

01/04/26 22:10:21 31S84640_165



FOCUS Error

Mechanical Error

No CD in the CDchanger.

Press the CD eject button and pull out the CDs,check for error indication. Insert the CDs again.If the code does not disappear or the CD cannotbe pulled out, consult your Honda dealer.Press the CD eject button and pull out the CDs,check for error indication. Insert the CD again.If the code does not disappear or the CD cannotbe pulled out, consult your Honda dealer.Insert CD magazine.


Audio System


01/04/26 22:10:30 31S84640_166


SE and U.S. Value Package models

AM/FM/Cassette/CD PlayerAudio System

Audio System


01/04/26 22:10:35 31S84640_167

The band and frequency that theradio was last tuned to is displayed.To change bands, press the AM orFM button. On the FM band, ST willbe displayed if the station is broad-casting in stereo. Stereoreproduction on AM is not available.

The ignition switch must be inACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) tooperate the audio system. Turn thesystem on by pushing the PWR/VOL knob. Adjust the volume byturning the same knob.

CONTINUED

Operating the Radio

Audio System


PPRREESSEETT BBUUTTTTOONNSSPPWWRR//VVOOLL KKNNOOBB TTUUNNEE KKNNOOBB

SSEEEEKK BBUUTTTTOONNSSSSCCAANN BBUUTTTTOONN

AAMM BBUUTTTTOONN

FFMM BBUUTTTTOONN

01/04/26 22:10:42 31S84640_168

－

－

－

－

○ ○－＋

The SCAN functionsamples all the stations with strongsignals on the selected band. Toactivate it, press the SCAN button,then release it. The system will scanup the band for a station with astrong signal. When it finds one, itwill stop and play that station forapproximately five seconds. If you donothing, the system will then scanfor the next strong station and playthat for five seconds. When it plays astation that you want to continuelistening to, press the SCAN buttonagain.


Select the desired band, AM orFM. FM1 and FM2 let you storetwo frequencies with each Presetbutton.Use the TUNE or SEEK functionto tune the radio to a desiredstation.Pick the Preset button you wantfor that station. Press the buttonand hold it until you hear a beep.Repeat steps 1 to 3 to store a totalof six stations on AM and twelveon FM.


You can use any of four methods tofind radio stations on the selectedband: TUNE, SEEK, SCAN or thePreset buttons.

Use the TUNE knob totune the radio to a desired frequency.Turn the knob clockwise to tune to ahigher frequency, orcounterclockwise to tune to a lowerfrequency.

The preset frequencies will be lost ifyour vehicle’s battery goes dead, isdisconnected, or the radio fuse isremoved.


The SEEK functionsearches the band for a station witha strong signal. To activate it, presseither SEEK button ( or ), thenrelease it. Depending on whichSEEK button you press, the systemscans upward or downward from thecurrent frequency. It stops when itfinds a station with a strong signal.

1.

2.

3.

4.

SCAN

TUNE

Preset

SEEK


Audio System

166

01/04/26 22:10:53 31S84640_169


If you are in a remote area, AutoSelect may not find six strong AMstations or twelve strong FM stations.If this happens, you will see a ‘‘0’’displayed when you press any presetbutton that does not have a stationstored.


CONTINUED

AUTO SELECT


Audio System

167

AA.. SSEELL IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

AA.. SSEELL BBUUTTTTOONN

01/04/26 22:11:00 31S84640_170



Audio System


SSEEEEKK BBUUTTTTOONNSSPPRREESSEETT BBUUTTTTOONNSS

TTUUNNEE KKNNOOBB


01/04/26 22:11:07 31S84640_171

－

－

These twocontrols adjust the strength of thesound coming from each speaker.The Balance control adjusts the side-to-side strength, while the Fadercontrol adjusts the front-to-backstrength.

To adjust the fader, push on theBASS/FADER control knob to get itto pop out. Pull it out slightly farther,and adjust the front-to-back sound toyour liking. Push the knob back inwhen you are done so you cannotchange the setting by accidentallybumping it.

To adjust the balance, push on theTREBLE/BALANCE control knobto get it to pop out. Pull it out slightlyfarther, and adjust the side-to-sidesound to your liking. Push the knobback in when you are done so youcannot change the setting byaccidentally bumping it.

Use these controlsto adjust the tone to your liking.

To adjust the Treble level, push onthe TREBLE/BALANCE controlknob to get it to pop out. Withoutpulling it out farther, turn the knobto adjust the treble level. Push theknob back in when you are done soyou cannot change the setting byaccidentally bumping it.

To adjust the Bass level, push on theBASS/FADER control knob to get itto pop out. Without pulling it outfarther, turn the knob to adjust thebass level. Push the knob back inwhen you are done so you cannotchange the setting by accidentallybumping it.

Adjusting the SoundBalance/Fader

Treble/Bass

Audio System


BBAASSSS//FFAADDEERRCCOONNTTRROOLL

TTRREEBBLLEE//BBAALLAANNCCEECCOONNTTRROOLL

01/04/26 22:11:16 31S84640_172

Your Honda’s radio can receive thecomplete AM and FM bands.Those bands cover these frequen-cies:

AM band:530 to 1,710 kilohertzFM band:87.7 to 107.9 megahertz

Radio stations on the AM band areassigned frequencies at least tenkilohertz apart (530, 540, 550).Stations on the FM band areassigned frequencies at least 0.2megahertz apart (87.9, 88.1, 88.3).

Stations must use these exactfrequencies. It is fairly common forstations to round-off the frequency intheir advertising, so your radio coulddisplay a frequency of 100.9 eventhough the announcer may identifythe station as ‘‘FM101.’’

How well your Honda’s radioreceives stations is dependent onmany factors, such as the distancefrom the station’s transmitter,nearby large objects, and atmos-pheric conditions.

A radio station’s signal gets weakeras you get farther away from itstransmitter. If you are listening to anAM station, you will notice the soundvolume becoming weaker, and thestation drifting in and out. If you arelistening to an FM station, you willsee the stereo indicator flickering offand on as the signal weakens.Eventually, the stereo indicator willgo off and the sound will fadecompletely as you get out of range ofthe station’s signal.

Driving very near the transmitter ofa station that is broadcasting on afrequency close to the frequency ofthe station you are listening to canalso affect your radio’s reception.You may temporarily hear bothstations, or hear only the station youare close to.

Audio System


Radio Frequencies Radio Reception

170

01/04/26 22:11:26 31S84640_173

Radio signals, especially on the FMband, are deflected by large objectssuch as buildings and hills. Yourradio then receives both the directsignal from the station’s transmitter,and the deflected signal. This causesthe sound to distort or flutter. This isa main cause of poor radio receptionin city driving.

Radio reception can be affected byatmospheric conditions such asthunderstorms, high humidity, andeven sunspots. You may be able toreceive a distant radio station oneday and not receive it the next daybecause of a change in conditions.

Electrical interference from passingvehicles and stationary sources cancause temporary reception problems.

As required by the FCC:Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’sauthority to operate the equipment.

Audio System


01/04/26 22:11:34 31S84640_174

You operate the CD player with thesame controls used for the radio.

With the system on, insert the discinto the CD slot. Push the disc inhalfway, the drive will pull it in therest of the way and begin to play.The number of the track that isplaying is shown in the display.

You can also play 3-inch (8-cm) discswithout using an adapter ring. In allcases, play only standard round discs.Odd-shaped CDs may jam in thedrive or cause other problems.


Operating the CD Player


Audio System

172

CCDD SSLLOOTT SSKKIIPP BBUUTTTTOONNSS

CCDD BBUUTTTTOONN RRDDMM BBUUTTTTOONNRREEPPEEAATT BBUUTTTTOONN

01/04/26 22:11:42 31S84640_175

－○

○

－

○

○

＋－

＋

－

You can use the SKIP buttons whilea disc is playing to select passagesand change tracks.

This feature,when activated, plays the tracks onthe CD in random order, rather thanin the order they are recorded on theCD. To activate Random Play, pressthe RDM button. You will see RDMin the display. The system will thenselect and play tracks randomly.This continues until you deactivateRandom Play by pressing the RDMbutton again.

To move rapidly within a track, pressand hold an appropriate SKIP button.Press the button to move forward,or the button to move backward.Release the button when the systemreaches the point you want.

To activate the Repeatfeature, press and release the Repeatbutton. You will see REPEAT in thedisplay. The system continuouslyreplays the current track. Press theRepeat button again to turn it off.

Each time you press the buttonand release it, the system skipsforward to the beginning of the nexttrack. Press and release thebutton to skip backward to thebeginning of the current track. Pressand release it again to skip to thebeginning of the previous track.

If you eject the disc, but do notremove it from the slot, the systemwill automatically reload the discafter 15 seconds and put the CDplayer in pause mode. To beginplaying the disc, press the CD button.

Press the eject button to remove thedisc from the drive.

If you turn the system off while a CDis playing, either with the PWR/VOLknob or by turning off the ignition,the disc will stay in the drive. Whenyou turn the system back on, the CDwill begin playing where it left off.

When the system reaches the end ofthe disc, it will return to the begin-ning and play that disc again.

You can switch to the radio while aCD is playing by pressing the AM orFM button. Press the CD button toreturn to playing the CD. The CDwill begin playing where it left off.

RANDOM PLAY

REPEAT

Audio System


01/04/26 22:11:52 31S84640_176

－

A Compact Disc changer is availablefrom your dealer. It holds up to sixdiscs, providing several hours ofcontinuous entertainment. Youoperate this CD changer with thesame controls used for the in-dashCD player.

Load the desired CD’s in themagazine and load the magazine inthe changer according to theinstructions that came with the unit.Play only standard round discs. Odd-shaped CDs may jam in the drive orcause other problems.


To select the CD changer, press theCD button. The disc and tracknumbers will be displayed.

To select a different disc, press theappropriate preset button (1 6). Ifyou select an empty slot in themagazine, the changer will, afterfinding that slot empty, try to loadthe CD in the next slot. Thiscontinues until it finds a CD to loadand play.

If you load a CD in the in-dash playerwhile the changer is playing a CD,the system will stop the changer andbegin playing the in-dash CD. Toselect the changer again, press theCD button. Play will begin where itleft off. Use the CD button to switchbetween the player and the changer.

If you eject the in-dash CD while it isplaying, the system will automaticallyswitch to the CD changer and beginplay where it left off. If there are noCDs in the changer, the display willflash. You will have to select anothermode (AM or FM) with the button.

When you switch back to CD mode,the system selects the same unit (in-dash or changer) that was playingwhen you switched out of CD mode.

To use the SKIP, REPEAT, andRANDOM functions, refer to the in-dash player operating instructions.

Audio System


Operating the CD Changer(Optional)

174

01/04/26 22:12:03 31S84640_177

Never try to insert foreign objects inthe CD player or the magazine.

A new CD may be rough on theinner and outer edges. The smallplastic pieces causing this roughnesscan flake off and fall on the re-cording surface of the disc, causingskipping or other problems. Removethese pieces by rubbing the innerand outer edges with the side of apencil or pen.

To clean a disc, use a clean soft cloth.Wipe across the disc from the centerto the outside edge.

When a CD is not being played, storeit in its case to protect it from dustand other contamination. To preventwarpage, keep CDs out of directsunlight and extreme heat.

Handle a CD by its edges; nevertouch either surface. Do not placestabilizer rings or labels on the CD.These, along with contaminationfrom fingerprints liquids, and felt-tippens, can cause the CD to not playproperly, or possibly jam in the drive.


Audio System


01/04/26 22:12:13 31S84640_178

IndicationIf you see an error indication in thedisplay while operating the CDplayer, find the cause in the chart tothe right. If you cannot clear theerror indication, take the vehicle toyour Honda dealer.

Cause Solution

FOCUS/CLV ErrorData Read ErrorSearch Error

Mechanical Error

Control ErrorLSI Error

Press the EJECT button and pull out the disc.Check if the disc is inserted correctly in the CDplayer.Make sure the disc is not scratched or damaged.Press the EJECT button and pull out the disc.Check the disc for damage or deformation.If the CD cannot be pulled out or the errorindication does not disappear after the disc isejected, see your Honda dealer.Do not try to force the disc out of the player.Consult your Honda dealer.

CD Player Error Indications

Audio System


01/04/26 22:12:22 31S84640_179

IndicationIf you see an error indication in thedisplay while operating the CDchanger, find the cause in the chartto the right. If you cannot clear theerror indication, take the vehicle toyour Honda dealer.

Cause Solution

Disc-changermalfunction.Disc is in changermechanism.Disc-changermalfunction.

Disc-changermalfunction.

CD magazine ejectionimpossible.High temperature.

Misconnection ordisconnection of CDchanger.No CD magazine in theCD changer.No CD in magazine.

Consult your Honda dealer.

Press the magazine eject button, and insert anempty magazine.If the code disappears within a few seconds,unit is OK. If it does not, consult your Hondadealer.Press the magazine eject button and pull outthe magazine, check for error indication. Insertthe magazine again. If the magazine can not bepulled out, consult your Honda dealer.Press the magazine eject button. If the maga-zine does not eject, consult your Honda dealer.Will disappear when the temperature returns tonormal.

See your Honda dealer.

Insert CD magazine.

Insert CD in magazine.


Audio System


01/04/26 22:12:36 31S84640_180

＊

＊


Make sure the tape opening on thecassette is facing to the right, theninsert the cassette most of the wayinto the slot. The system will pull itin the rest of the way, and begin toplay.

2




Audio System


FFFF BBUUTTTTOONN

CCDD BBUUTTTTOONN

PPLLAAYYBBUUTTTTOONN

RREEWWBBUUTTTTOONN DDOOLLBBYY BBUUTTTTOONN

RREEPPEEAATT BBUUTTTTOONN



01/04/26 22:12:45 31S84640_181

▲

－



If you turn the system off while atape is playing, either with the PWR/VOL knob or by turning off theignition, the cassette will remain inthe drive. When you turn the systemback on, the tape will begin playingwhere it left off.


Fast Forward and Re-wind move the tape rapidly. To re-wind the tape, push the REW button.You will see REW in the display. Tofast forward the tape, push the FFbutton. You will see FF displayed.Press the PLAY button to take thesystem out of rewind or fast forward.If the system reaches the end of thetape while in fast forward or rewind,it automatically stops that function,reverses direction, and begins to play.

To switch to the radio or CD playerwhile a tape is playing, press the AM,FM or CD button. To change back tothe cassette player, push the TAPEbutton.

Dolby noise reduction turns on whenyou insert a cassette. If the tape wasnot recorded with Dolby noisereduction, turn it off by pressing theDOLBY button.

CONTINUED


FF/REW

Audio System


01/04/26 22:12:54 31S84640_182

－－

○

○

－

＋


The Repeat functioncontinuously replays the currentsong or passage. Press the REPEATbutton to activate it; you will seeREPEAT displayed as a reminder.When the system reaches the end ofthe song or passage currentlyplaying, it will automatically go intorewind. When it senses thebeginning of the same song orpassage, the system returns to PLAYmode. It will continue to repeat thissame program until you deactivateREPEAT by pressing the buttonagain.

The SKIP function allowsyou to find the beginning of a songor passage. To skip to the beginningof a song or passage currentlyplaying, push the button. You willsee REW flashing in the display asthe tape rewinds. To skip to thebeginning of the next song, push the

button. You will see FF flashing inthe display as the tape fast forwards.When the system finds the begin-ning of a song or passage, it goesback to PLAY.

REPEATSKIP

Audio System


01/04/26 22:13:00 31S84640_183

The cassette player picks up dirt andoxides from the tape. This contami-nation builds up over time andcauses the sound quality to degrade.To prevent this, you should clean theplayer after every 30 hours of use.Your dealer has a cleaning kitavailable.

If you do not clean the cassetteplayer regularly, it may eventuallybecome impossible to remove thecontamination with a normalcleaning kit.

Use 100-minute or shorter cassettes.Cassettes longer than that usethinner tape that may break or jamthe drive.

Look at the cassette before youinsert it. If the tape is loose, tightenit by turning a hub with a pencil oryour finger.If the label is peeling off, remove itfrom the cassette or it could causethe cassette to jam in the player.Never try to insert a warped ordamaged cassette in the player.

When they are not in use, storecassettes in their cases to protectthem from dust and moisture. Neverplace cassettes where they will beexposed to direct sunlight, high heat,or high humidity. If a cassette isexposed to extreme heat or cold, letit reach a moderate temperaturebefore inserting it in the player.

Never try to insert foreign objectsinto the cassette player.

If you see the error indication‘‘ ’’ on the display, pressthe TAPE EJECT button to removethe cassette from the unit. Makesure the tape is not damaged. If thecassette will not eject or the errorindication stays on after the cassetteejects, take the car to your Hondadealer.

U.S. EX, Canada EX-L and all EX V-6models

Caring for the Cassette Player

Audio System


01/04/26 22:13:10 31S84640_184

▲ ▼The top and bottom buttons adjustthe volume up ( ) or down ( ).Press the proper button and hold ituntil the desired volume is reached,then release it.

The AUDIO/CH button has threefunctions, depending on whether youare listening to the radio, or playing acassette or CD.

If you are listening to the radio, usethe AUDIO/CH button to changestations. Each time you press thisbutton, the system advances to thenext preset station on the band youare listening to. You will see thenumber of the selected Preset buttonin the display. To change bands,press the AM or FM button on theaudio system’s front panel.

If you are playing a cassette, use theAUDIO/CH button to advance to thenext selection. You will see ‘‘FF’’blinking in the display when youpress the AUDIO/CH button. Thesystem fast forwards until it senses asilent period, then goes back toPLAY.

If you are playing a CD, the systemskips to the beginning of the nexttrack each time you push theAUDIO/CH button. You will see thedisc and track number in the display.

Two controls for the audio systemare mounted in the steering wheelhub. These let you control basicfunctions without removing yourhand from the wheel.

On all EX models

Remote Audio Controls

Audio System


AAUUDDIIOO//CCHHBBUUTTTTOONN

01/04/26 22:13:19 31S84640_185

You will have to store your favoritestations in the Preset buttons afterthe system begins working. Youroriginal settings were lost whenpower was disconnected.

If your car’s battery is disconnectedor goes dead, or the radio fuse isremoved, the audio system willdisable itself. If this happens, youwill see ‘‘Code’’ in the frequencydisplay the next time you turn on thesystem. Use the Preset buttons toenter the five-digit code. If it isentered correctly, the radio will startplaying.

If you make a mistake entering thecode, do not start over or try tocorrect your mistake. Complete thefive-digit sequence, then enter thecorrect code. You have ten tries toenter the correct code. If you areunsuccessful in ten attempts, youmust then leave the system on forone hour before trying again.

You should have received a card thatlists your audio system’s codenumber and serial number. It is bestto store this card in a safe place athome. In addition, you should writethe audio system’s serial number inthis Owner’s Manual. If you shouldhappen to lose the card, you mustobtain the code number from yourHonda dealer. To do this, you willneed the system’s serial number.

Your car’s audio system will disableitself if it is disconnected fromelectrical power for any reason. Tomake it work again, the user mustenter a specific five-digit code in thePreset buttons. Because there arehundreds of number combinationspossible from five digits, making thesystem work without knowing theexact code is nearly impossible.

On EX, EX V-6, and SE, and U.S. ValuePackage models

Theft Protection

Audio System


01/04/26 22:13:26 31S84640_186

Once the security system is set,opening any door (without using thekey or the remote transmitter), orthe hood, will cause it to alarm. Italso alarms if the radio is removedfrom the dashboard or the wiring iscut.

The security system sets auto-matically fifteen seconds after youlock the doors, hood, and trunk. Forthe system to activate, you must lockthe doors from the outside with thekey, lock tab, door lock switch, orremote transmitter. The securitysystem light next to the driver’s doorlock starts blinking immediately toshow you the system is setting itself.

With the system set, you can stillopen the trunk with the master keyor the remote transmitter withouttriggering the alarm. The alarm willsound if the trunk lock is forced, orthe trunk is opened with the trunkrelease handle.

The security system will not set ifthe hood, trunk, or any door is notfully closed. If the system will not set,check the Door and Brake LampMonitor on the instrument panel(see page ), to see if the doorsand trunk are fully closed. Since it isnot part of the monitor display,manually check the hood.

The security system helps to protectyour car and valuables from theft.The horn sounds and a combinationof headlights, parking lights, sidemarker lights and taillights flashes ifsomeone attempts to break into yourcar or remove the radio. This alarmcontinues for two minutes, then thesystem resets. To reset an alarmingsystem before the two minutes haveelapsed, unlock either front doorwith the key or the remotetransmitter.

Do not attempt to alter this systemor add other devices to it.

58

On EX, SE, and EX V-6 models

Security System


SSEECCUURRIITTYY SSYYSSTTEEMM LLIIGGHHTT

01/04/26 22:13:35 31S84640_187

Cruise control allows you to maintaina set speed above 25 mph (40 km/h)without keeping your foot on theaccelerator pedal. It should be usedfor cruising on straight, openhighways. It is not recommended forconditions such as city driving,winding roads, slippery roads, heavyrain, or bad weather. You shouldhave full control of the car underthose conditions.

Push in the Cruise Control MasterSwitch to the left of the steeringcolumn. The indicator in theswitch will light.

Accelerate to the desired cruisingspeed above 25 mph (40 km/h).

Press and release the SET/decelbutton on the steering wheel. TheCRUISE CONTROL light on theinstrument panel comes on toshow the system is now activated.

1.

2.

3.

CONTINUED

Except for DX and Value Packagemodels in the U.S.

Cruise Control

Using the Cruise Control


CCRRUUIISSEE CCOONNTTRROOLL MMAASSTTEERR SSWWIITTCCHH

CCAANNCCEELL

SSEETT//ddeecceell

RREESSUUMMEE//aacccceell

Improper use of the cruisecontrol can lead to a crash.

Use the cruise control onlywhen traveling on openhighways in good weather.

01/04/26 22:13:45 31S84640_188

Resting your foot on the brake orclutch pedal will cause the cruisecontrol to cancel.

Tap the brake or clutch pedallightly with your foot. TheCRUISE CONTROL light on theinstrument panel will go out.When the car slows to the desiredspeed, press the SET/decel button.The car will then maintain thedesired speed.

Even with the cruise control turnedon, you can still use the acceleratorpedal to speed up for passing. Aftercompleting the pass, take your footoff the accelerator pedal. The carwill return to the set cruising speed.

The cruise control may not hold theset speed when you are going up anddown hills. If your speed increasesgoing down a hill, use the brakes toslow down to the desired speed. Thiswill cancel the cruise control. Toresume the set speed, press theRESUME/accel button. TheCRUISE CONTROL light on theinstrument panel comes on.

To slow down in very smallamounts, tap the SET/decelbutton repeatedly. Each time youdo this, your car will slow downabout 1 mph (1.6 km/h).

Press and hold the SET/decelbutton. The vehicle will decelerate.Release the button when youreach the desired speed.

You can decrease the set cruisingspeed in any of these ways:

To increase your speed in verysmall amounts, tap the RESUME/accel button repeatedly. Each timeyou do this, your car will speed upabout 1 mph (1.6 km/h).

Push on the accelerator pedal. Ac-celerate to the desired cruisingspeed and press the SET/decelbutton.

Press and hold the RESUME/accel button. The car will acceler-ate. When you reach the desiredcruising speed, release the button.

You can increase the set cruisingspeed in any of these ways:

When climbing a steep hill, theautomatic transmission maydownshift to hold the set speed.

Cruise Control


Changing the Set Speed

186

01/04/26 22:13:57 31S84640_189

Pressing the Cruise Control MasterSwitch turns the system completelyoff and erases the previous cruisingspeed from memory. To use thesystem again, refer to

.

When you push the CANCEL button,or tap the brake or clutch pedal, theCRUISE CONTROL light on theinstrument panel will go out and thecar will begin to slow down. You canuse the accelerator pedal in thenormal way.

The system remembers thepreviously-set cruising speed. Toreturn to that speed, accelerate toabove 25 mph (40 km/h), then pressand release the RESUME/accelbutton. The CRUISE CONTROLlight comes on, and the car willaccelerate to the same cruisingspeed as before.

Press the Cruise Control MasterSwitch.

Push the CANCEL button on thesteering wheel.

Tap the brake or clutch pedal.

You can cancel the cruise control inany of these ways:

Cruise Control

Using theCruise Control

Cancelling the Cruise Control


CCAANNCCEELL BBUUTTTTOONN

01/04/26 22:14:06 31S84640_190

The HomeLink UniversalTransceiver built into your car canbe programmed to operate remotely-controlled devices around your home,such as garage doors, lighting, orhome security systems. It canreplace up to three remotetransmitters.

If you have problems with trainingthe HomeLink Universal Transceiver,or would like information on homeproducts that can be operated by thetransmitter, call (800) 355-3515. Onthe Internet, go to www.homelink.com.

Always refer to the operatinginstructions and safety informationthat came with your garage dooropener or other equipment youintend to operate with the HomeLinkUniversal Transceiver. If you do nothave this information, you shouldcontact the manufacturer of theequipment.

While training or using HomeLink,make sure you have a clear view ofthe garage door or gate, and that noone will be injured by its movement.

The HomeLink transceiver storesthe code in a permanent memory.There should be no need to retrainHomeLink if your car’s battery goesdead or is disconnected.

If your garage door opener wasmanufactured before April 1982, youmay not be able to programHomeLink to operate it. Garage dooropeners manufactured before thatdate do not have a safety feature thatcauses them to stop and reverse if anobstacle is detected during closing,increasing the risk of injury. If youhave questions, call (800) 355-3515.

If you are training HomeLink tooperate a garage door or gate, it isrecommended that you unplug themotor for that device during training.Repeatedly pressing the remotecontrol button could burn out themotor.

On EX V-6 model Important Safety Precautions

Customer Assistance

General Information

HomeLink Universal Transceiver


01/04/26 22:14:16 31S84640_191

－

If you are training the second orthird buttons, go directly to Step 1.

Unplug the garage door openermotor from the house current. Press the button on the remote

control and the button on thetransmitter at the same time. Holddown both buttons.

Before you can use HomeLink tooperate devices around your home, itmust ‘‘learn’’ the proper codes. Forexample, to train HomeLink to openand close the garage door:

If you just tookdelivery of your vehicle and have nottrained any of the buttons inHomeLink before, you should eraseany previously learned codes beforetraining the first button. To do this,press and hold the two outsidebuttons on the HomeLinktransceiver for about 20 seconds,until the red light flashes. Releasethe buttons, then proceed to Step 1.

Hold the end of the garage dooropener remote control 2 to 5inches from HomeLink. Makesure you are not blocking yourview of the red light in HomeLink.

Select the HomeLink button youwant to train.

2.

3.

4.1.

CONTINUED


Training HomeLink Before you begin


01/04/26 22:14:27 31S84640_192

Canadian Owners:The remote control you are trainingfrom may stop transmitting after twoseconds. This is not long enough forHomeLink to learn the code. Releaseand press the button on the remotecontrol every two seconds untilHomeLink has learned the code.

For security purposes, newer garagedoor opening systems use a ‘‘rolling’’or variable code. Information fromthe remote control and the garagedoor opener are needed beforeHomeLink can operate the garagedoor opener.

The‘‘Training HomeLink’’ proceduretrains HomeLink to the propergarage door opener code. Thefollowing procedure synchronizesHomeLink to the garage door openerso they send and receive the correctcodes.

The red light in HomeLink shouldbegin flashing. It will flash slowlyat first, then rapidly.

When the red light flashes rapidly,release both buttons. HomeLinkshould have learned the code fromthe remote control.

Plug in the garage door openermotor, then test the HomeLinktransceiver button by pushing it. Itshould operate the garage door.

If the button does not work, repeatthis procedure to train it again. If itstill does not work, you may have a

variable or rolling code garagedoor opener. Test this by pressingand holding the HomeLinktransceiver button you just trained.If the red light blinks for twoseconds, then stays on, you have arolling code garage door opener.You may be able to verify this withthe manufacturer’s documentation.Go to ‘‘Training With a RollingCode System.’’

Repeat these steps to train theother two HomeLink buttons tooperate any other remotely-controlled devices around yourhome (lighting, automatic gate,security system, etc.).

5.

6.8.

7.

Training With a Rolling CodeSystem



01/04/26 22:14:35 31S84640_193

It may be helpful to have someoneassist you with this procedure.

Find the ‘‘Training’’ button on yourgarage door opener unit. Thelocation will vary, depending onthe manufacturer. Themanufacturer’s documentationmay help.

Press the Training button on thegarage door opener unit until thelight next to the button comes on,then release it. The light may blink,or come on and stay on. You thenhave approximately 30 seconds tocomplete the following steps.

Make sure you have properlycompleted the ‘‘TrainingHomeLink’’ procedure.

Press and release the button onHomeLink. (The same button youtrained with the ‘‘TrainingHomeLink’’ procedure.)

Press and release the HomeLinkbutton again. This should turn offthe training light on the garagedoor opener unit. (Some systemsmay require you to press andrelease the button up to threetimes.)

Press the HomeLink button again.It should operate the garage door.

6.

2.

4.

5.

1.

3.



TTRRAAIINNIINNGG BBUUTTTTOONN

01/04/26 22:14:46 31S84640_194




To train an already programmedtransmitter button to operate a newdevice:

To erase the codes stored in all threebuttons, press and hold the twooutside buttons until the red lightbegins to flash, then release thebuttons.

You should erase all three codesbefore selling the car.

Select the HomeLink button youwant to train.

Press and hold the HomeLinkbutton until the red light begins toflash slowly (approximately 20seconds).

While continuing to hold theHomeLink button, place theremote control for the device 2 to5 inches from HomeLink.

Release both buttons. HomeLinkshould now be trained to operatethe device.

Press and hold the button on theremote control. Hold both buttonsuntil the red light begins to flashrapidly.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.Retraining a Button

Erasing Codes



01/04/26 22:15:00 31S84640_195

Before you begin driving your Honda,you should know what gasoline touse, and how to check the levels ofimportant fluids. You also need toknow how to properly store luggageor packages. The information in thissection will help you. If you plan toadd any accessories to your car,please read the information in thissection first.

.............................Break-in Period . 194.........................................Gasoline . 194

.........Service Station Procedures . 194................Filling the Fuel Tank . 194

....................Opening the Hood . 196...............................Oil Check . 198

.........Engine Coolant Check . 200...............................Fuel Economy . 201

.....................Vehicle Condition . 201...........................Driving Habits . 201

...Accessories and Modifications . 202.............................Carrying Cargo . 204

Before Driving

Before Driving 193

01/04/26 22:15:05 31S84640_196

During this period:

Avoid full-throttle starts and rapidacceleration.

We recommend gasolines containingdetergent additives that help preventfuel system and engine deposits.

Avoid hard braking. New brakesneed to be broken-in by moderateuse for the first 200 miles (300km).

Your Honda is designed to operateon unleaded gasoline with a pumpoctane number of 86 or higher. Useof a lower octane gasoline can causea persistent, heavy metallic rappingnoise in the engine that can lead tomechanical damage.

Open the fuel fill door by pushingon the handle to the left of thedriver’s seat.

Help assure your car’s futurereliability and performance by payingextra attention to how you driveduring the first 600 miles (1,000 km).

Because the fuel fill cap is on thedriver’s side of the car, park withthat side closest to the servicestation pumps.In Canada, some gasolines contain

an octane-enhancing additive calledMMT. If you use such gasolines,your emission control systemperformance may deteriorate andthe Malfunction Indicator Lamp onyour instrument panel may turn on.If this happens, contact yourauthorized Honda dealer for service.

Using gasoline containing lead willdamage your car’s emissionscontrols. This contributes to airpollution.

You should follow these same re-commendations with an overhauledor exchanged engine, or when thebrakes are relined.

Do not change the oil until therecommended time or mileageinterval shown in the maintenanceschedule.

1.

2.

Before Driving

Break-in Period Gasoline Filling the Fuel Tank

Break-in Period, Gasoline, Service Station Procedures

194

01/04/26 22:15:20 31S84640_197

Remove the fuel fill cap slowly.You may hear a hissing sound aspressure inside the tank escapes.Place the cap in the holder on thefuel fill door.

Screw the fuel fill cap back on,tighten it until it clicks severaltimes. If you do not properlytighten the cap, the MalfunctionIndicator Lamp may come on (seepage ).

Push the fuel fill door closed untilit latches.

Stop filling the tank after the fuelnozzle automatically clicks off. Donot try to ‘‘top off’’ the tank, leavesome room for the fuel to expandwith temperature changes.

Your car has an on-board refuelingvapor recovery system to helpkeep fuel vapors from going intothe atmosphere. If the fuel nozzlekeeps clicking off even though thetank is not full, there may be aproblem with this system. Consultyour dealer.

3.

4.

5.

6.

327

Service Station Procedures

Before Driving 195

FFUUEELL FFIILLLL CCAAPP

Gasoline is highly flammableand explosive. You can beburned or seriously injuredwhen handling fuel.

Stop the engine and keepheat, sparks, and flame away.Handle fuel only outdoors.Wipe up spills immediately.

01/04/26 22:15:29 31S84640_198

Shift to Park or Neutral and setthe parking brake. Pull the hoodrelease handle located under thelower left corner of the dashboard.The hood will pop up slightly.

Standing in front of the car, putyour fingers under the front edgeof the hood to the right of center.Slide your hand to the left untilyou feel the hood latch handle.Push this handle up until itreleases the hood. Lift the hood.

If you can open the hood withoutlifting the hood latch handle, or thehood latch handle moves stiffly ordoes not spring back as before, themechanism should be cleaned andlubricated (see page ).

1. 2.

272

Opening the Hood


Before Driving196

HHOOOODD RREELLEEAASSEE HHAANNDDLLEE LLAATTCCHH

01/04/26 22:15:37 31S84640_199

CONTINUED

To close the hood, lift it up slightly toremove the support rod from thehole. Put the support rod back intoits holding clip. Lower the hood toabout a foot (30 cm) above thefender, then let it drop.After closing the hood, make sure itis securely latched.

Lift the hood up most of the way.The hydraulic supports will lift itup the rest of the way and hold itup.

Pull the support rod out of its clipand insert the end into the hole onthe front of the hood around thecenter.

3.3.6-cylinder models4-cylinder models

Before Driving


197

SSUUPPPPOORRTT RROODD

01/04/26 22:15:48 31S84640_200

Check the engine oil level every timeyou fill the car with fuel. Wait a fewminutes after turning the engine offbefore you check the oil.

Remove the dipstick (orangehandle).

To close the hood, lower it to about afoot (30 cm) above the fender, thenpress down firmly with your hands.After closing the hood, make sure itis securely latched.

1.


Before Driving

Oil Check

198

44--ccyylliinnddeerr mmooddeellss DDIIPPSSTTIICCKK 66--ccyylliinnddeerr mmooddeellss DDIIPPSSTTIICCKK

01/04/26 22:15:57 31S84640_201

CONTINUED

Insert it all the way back in its tube.Wipe the dipstick with a cleancloth or paper towel.

3.2.


Before Driving 199

44--ccyylliinnddeerr mmooddeellss 66--ccyylliinnddeerr mmooddeellss

01/04/26 22:16:05 31S84640_202

Refer toon page for information

on checking other items in yourHonda.

Look at the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank. Make sure it isbetween the MAX and MIN lines. Ifit is below the MIN line, see

on page forinformation on adding the propercoolant.

Remove the dipstick again andcheck the level. It should bebetween the upper and lowermarks.

If it is near or below the lower mark,see on page .

4.

250

247

255


Before Driving

Owner MaintenanceChecks

AddingEngine Coolant

Adding Oil

Engine Coolant Check

200

MMAAXX

MMIINN44--ccyylliinnddeerr mmooddeellss 66--ccyylliinnddeerr mmooddeellss

RREESSEERRVVEE TTAANNKK MMAAXX

MMIINN

RREESSEERRVVEE TTAANNKK

LLOOWWEERR MMAARRKK

UUPPPPEERR MMAARRKK

01/04/26 22:16:16 31S84640_203

A cold engine uses more fuel than awarm engine. It is not necessary to‘‘warm-up’’ a cold engine by letting itidle for a long time. You can driveaway in about a minute, no matterhow cold it is outside. The enginewill warm up faster, and you getbetter fuel economy. To cut down onthe number of ‘‘cold starts,’’ try tocombine several short trips into one.

You can improve fuel economy bydriving moderately. Rapid acceler-ation, abrupt cornering, and hardbraking use more fuel.

Always drive in the highest gear thatallows the engine to run and acceler-ate smoothly.

The air conditioning puts an extraload on the engine which makes ituse more fuel. Turn off the A/C tocut down on air conditioning use.Use the flow-through ventilationwhen the outside air temperature ismoderate.

The condition of your car and yourdriving habits are the two mostimportant things that affect the fuelmileage you get.

Always maintain your car accordingto the maintenance schedule. Thiswill keep it in top operating condition.

Depending on traffic conditions, tryto maintain a constant speed. Everytime you slow down and speed up,your car uses extra fuel. Use thecruise control, when appropriate, toincrease fuel economy.

An important part of that mainte-nance is the

(see page ). Forexample, an underinflated tirecauses more ‘‘rolling resistance,’’which uses fuel. It also wears outfaster, so check the tire pressure atleast monthly.

In winter, the build-up of snow onyour car’s underside adds weight androlling resistance. Frequent cleaninghelps your fuel mileage and reducesthe chance of corrosion.

247

Vehicle Condition

Driving Habits

Owner MaintenanceChecks

Fuel Economy

Before Driving 201

01/04/26 22:16:27 31S84640_204

Be sure electronic accessories donot overload electrical circuits(see page ).

Have the installer contact yourHonda dealer for assistance beforeinstalling any electronic accessory.

If possible, have your dealer inspectthe final installation.

Before installing any accessory:

Modifying your car, or installingsome non-Honda accessories, canmake your car unsafe. Before youmake any modifications or add anyaccessories, be sure to read thefollowing information.

Your dealer has Genuine Hondaaccessories that allow you topersonalize your car. Theseaccessories have been designed andapproved for your car, and arecovered by warranty.

Non-Honda accessories are usuallydesigned for universal applications.Although aftermarket accessoriesmay fit on your car, they may notmeet factory specifications, andcould adversely affect your car’shandling and stability. (See‘‘Modifications’’ on page foradditional information.)

However, if electronic accessoriesare improperly installed, or exceedyour car’s electrical system capacity,they can interfere with the operation

of your car, or even cause theairbags to deploy.

Make sure the accessory does notobscure any lights, or interferewith proper car operation orperformance.

When properly installed, cellularphones, alarms, two-way radios, andlow-powered audio systems shouldnot interfere with your car’scomputer-controlled systems, suchas the SRS and anti-lock brakesystem.

331

203

Accessories

Accessories and Modifications

Before Driving202

Improper accessories ormodifications can affect yourcar’s handling, stability andperformance, and cause acrash in which you can be hurtor killed.

Follow all instructions in thisowner’s manual regardingaccessories and modifications.

01/04/26 22:16:39 31S84640_205

In addition, any modifications thatdecrease ground clearance increasethe chance of undercarriage partsstriking a curb, speed bump, or otherraised object, which could causeyour airbags to deploy.

Do not modify your steering wheelor any other part of yourSupplemental Restraint System.Modifications could make thesystem ineffective.

Do not remove any originalequipment or modify your car in anyway that would alter its design oroperation. This could make your carunsafe and illegal to drive.

For example, do not make anymodifications that would change theride height of your car, or installwheels and tires with a differentoverall diameter.

Such modifications can adverselyaffect handling, and interfere withthe operation of the car’s anti-lockbrakes and other systems.

Any objectattached to or placed on the coversmarked ‘‘SRS AIRBAG,’’ in thecenter of the steering wheel andon top of the dashboard, couldinterfere with the proper operationof the airbags. Or, if the airbagsinflate, the objects could bepropelled inside the car and hurtsomeone.

If a side airbaginflates, a cup holder or other hardobject attached on or near thedoor could be propelled inside thecar and hurt someone.

Covering the outside edge of afront seat-back, with a non-Hondaseat cover for example, couldprevent the airbag from inflatingproperly.

On models equipped with side airbagsModifications

Additional Safety Precaution

Accessories and Modifications

Before Driving

Do not attach or place objects onthe front airbag covers.

Do not attach hard objects on ornear a front door.

Do not place any objects over theoutside edge of a front seat-back.

203

01/04/26 22:16:51 31S84640_206

The glove box, and the pockets inthe front doors and seat-backs, aredesigned for small, lightweight items.The trunk is intended for larger,heavier items. In addition, the backseat can be folded down to allow youto carry more cargo or longer items.

Your car has several convenientstorage areas so you can stow cargosafely.

However, carrying too much cargo,or improperly storing it, can affectyour car’s handling, stability andoperation and make it unsafe. Beforecarrying any type of cargo, be sure toread the following pages.

Carrying Cargo

Before Driving204

FFRROONNTT DDOOOORR PPOOCCKKEETTCCOONNSSOOLLEE CCOOMMPPAARRTTMMEENNTT

GGLLOOVVEE BBOOXXSSEEAATT--BBAACCKK PPOOCCKKEETTTTRRUUNNKK

01/04/26 22:16:58 31S84640_207

Store or secure all items that couldbe thrown around and hurtsomeone during a crash.

Be sure items placed on the floorbehind the front seats cannot rollunder the seats and interfere withthe driver’s ability to operate thepedals, or with the properoperation of the seats.

Keep the glove box closed whiledriving. If the lid is open, apassenger could injure their kneesduring a crash or sudden stop.

This figure includes the total weightof all occupants, cargo, accessories,and the tongue weight if you aretowing a trailer.

The final number is the total weightof cargo you can carry.

If you are towing a trailer, add thetongue weight to the numberabove.

Add up the weight of all occupants.

To figure out how much cargo youcan carry:

The maximum load for your car is850 lbs (395 kg).

Do not put any items on top of therear shelf. They can block yourview and be thrown around the carduring a crash.

Subtract the total from 850 lbs(395 kg).

Carrying Items in the PassengerCompartment

Load Limit

Carrying Cargo

Before Driving 205

Overloading or improperloading can affect handling andstability and cause a crash inwhich you can be hurt or killed.

Follow all load limits and otherloading guidelines in thismanual.

01/04/26 22:17:11 31S84640_208

If you can carry any items on aroof rack, be sure the total weightof the rack and the items does notexceed the maximum allowableweight. Please contact your Hondadealer for further information.

Distribute cargo evenly on thefloor of the trunk, placing theheaviest items on the bottom andas far forward as possible.

If you fold down the back seat, tiedown items that could be thrownabout the car during a crash orsudden stop.

If you carry large items thatprevent you from closing the trunklid, exhaust gas can enter thepassenger area. To avoid thepossibility of carbon monoxidepoisoning, follow the instructionson page .51

Carrying Cargo

Before Driving

Carrying Cargo in the Trunk or ona Roof Top Carrier

206

01/04/26 22:17:18 31S84640_209

This section gives you tips onstarting the engine under variousconditions, and how to operate the5-speed manual and automatictransmissions. It also includesimportant information on parkingyour car, the braking system, theTraction Control System, and factsyou need if you are planning to tow atrailer.

........................Preparing to Drive . 208.......................Starting the Engine . 209

Starting in Cold Weather....................at High Altitude . 210

....5-speed Manual Transmission . 211.....Recommended Shift Points . 212

..............Engine Speed Limiter . 212

..............Automatic Transmission . 212.Shift Lever Position Indicator . 213

................Shift Lever Positions . 213..............Engine Speed Limiter . 216

....................Shift Lock Release . 216...........................................Parking . 218

.....................The Braking System . 219.............Brake Wear Indicators . 219

...............Brake System Design . 220.......................Anti-lock Brakes . 220

Important Safety.........................Reminders . 221........................ABS Indicator . 221

..............Traction Control System . 222...............TCS ON/OFF Switch . 223

............................TCS Indicator . 223...............Driving in Bad Weather . 225

...........................Towing a Trailer . 227

Driving

Driving 207

01/04/26 22:17:24 31S84640_210

Make sure all windows, mirrors,and outside lights are clean andunobstructed. Remove frost, snow,or ice.

Check that the hood and trunk arefully closed.

Check the adjustment of the seat(see page ).

Check the adjustment of theinside and outside mirrors (seepage ).

Check the adjustment of thesteering wheel (see page ).

Make sure the doors are securelyclosed and locked.

Fasten your seat belt. Check thatyour passengers have fastenedtheir seat belts (see page ).

Turn the ignition switch ON (II).Check the indicator lights in theinstrument panel.

Start the engine (see page ).

Check the gauges and indicatorlights in the instrument panel (seepage ).

Check that any items you may becarrying with you inside are storedproperly or fastened downsecurely.

Visually check the tires. If a tirelooks low, use a gauge to check itspressure.

You should do the following checksand adjustments every day beforeyou drive your car.

3.

2.

1.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

11.

12.

10.82

93

69

15

209

55

Preparing to Drive

Driving208

01/04/26 22:17:39 31S84640_211

Push the clutch pedal down all theway. START (III) does notfunction unless the clutch pedal isdepressed.

Apply the parking brake.

In cold weather, turn off allelectrical accessories to reducethe drain on the battery.

Make sure the shift lever is inPark. Press on the brake pedal.

If the engine still does not start,press the accelerator pedal all theway down and hold it there whilestarting in order to clear flooding.As before, keep the ignition key inthe START (III) position for nomore than 15 seconds. Return tostep 5 if the engine does not start.If it starts, lift your foot off theaccelerator pedal so the enginedoes not race.

Without touching the acceleratorpedal, turn the ignition key to theSTART (III) position. If the enginedoes not start right away, do nothold the key in START (III) formore than 15 seconds at a time.Pause for at least 10 secondsbefore trying again.

If the engine does not start within15 seconds, or starts but stallsright away, repeat step 4 with theaccelerator pedal pressed half-waydown. If the engine starts, releasepressure on the accelerator pedalso the engine does not race.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

Automatic Transmission:

Manual Transmission:

Starting the Engine

Driving 209

01/04/26 22:17:50 31S84640_212

Use the following procedure:

Turn off all electrical accessoriesto reduce the drain on the battery.

Push the accelerator pedal half-way to the floor and hold it therewhile starting the engine. Do nothold the ignition key in START(III) for more than 15 seconds.When the engine starts, releasethe accelerator pedal gradually asthe engine speeds up and smoothsout.

An engine is harder to start in coldweather. The thinner air found athigh altitude above 8,000 feet (2,400meters) adds to the problem.

If the engine fails to start in step 2,push the accelerator pedal to thefloor and hold it there while youtry to start the engine for no morethan 15 seconds. If the enginedoes not start, return to step 2.

1.

2.

3.

Driving

Starting in Cold Weather at HighAltitude (Above 8,000 feet/2,400 meters)

Starting the Engine

210

01/04/26 22:17:58 31S84640_213

Come to a full stop before you shiftinto Reverse. You can damage thetransmission by trying to shift intoReverse with the car moving. Pushdown the clutch pedal, and pause fora few seconds before shifting intoReverse, or shift into one of theforward gears for a moment. Thisstops the gears so they won’t ‘‘grind.’’

When slowing down, you can getextra braking from the engine byshifting to a lower gear. This extrabraking can help you maintain a safespeed and prevent your brakes fromoverheating while going down asteep hill. Before downshifting,make sure engine speed will not gointo the tachometer’s red zone in thelower gear.

The manual transmission is syn-chronized in all forward gears forsmooth operation. It has a lockout soyou cannot shift directly from Fifthto Reverse. When shifting up ordown, make sure you push the clutchpedal down all the way, shift to thenext gear, and let the pedal upgradually. When you are not shifting,do not rest your foot on the clutchpedal. This can cause your clutch towear out faster.

Driving

5-speed Manual Transmission

211

Rapid slowing or speeding-upcan cause loss of control onslippery surfaces. If you crash,you can be injured.

Use extra care when driving onslippery surfaces.

01/04/26 22:18:06 31S84640_214

Your Honda’s transmission has fourforward speeds, and is electronicallycontrolled for smoother shifting. Italso has a ‘‘lock-up’’ torque converterfor better fuel economy. You mayfeel what seems like another shiftwhen the converter locks.

Drive in the highest gear that letsthe engine run and acceleratesmoothly. This will give you the bestfuel economy and effective emis-sions control. The following shiftpoints are recommended:

Shift up

1st to 2nd2nd to 3rd3rd to 4th4th to 5th

Shift up

1st to 2nd2nd to 3rd3rd to 4th4th to 5th

Normal acceleration

15 mph (24 km/h)28 mph (45 km/h)41 mph (66 km/h)52 mph (84 km/h)

Cruise acceleration

7 mph (11 km/h)22 mph (35 km/h)33 mph (53 km/h)48 mph (77 km/h)

If you exceed the maximum speedfor the gear you are in, the enginespeed will enter into the tachometer’sred zone. If this occurs, you may feelthe engine cut in and out. This iscaused by a limiter in the engine’scomputer controls. The engine willrun normally when you reduce theRPM below the red zone.

Before downshifting, make sure theengine will not go into thetachometer’s red zone.

5-speed Manual Transmission, Automatic Transmission

Driving

Automatic TransmissionRecommended Shift Points Engine Speed Limiter

212

01/04/26 22:18:17 31S84640_215

CONTINUED

The shift lever has seven positions.It must be in Park or Neutral to startthe engine. When you are stopped inD , D , 2, 1, N or R, press firmly onthe brake pedal, and keep your footoff the accelerator pedal.

This indicator between the fuelgauge and temperature gauge showswhich position the shift lever is in.

The ‘‘D ’’ indicator comes on for afew seconds when you turn theignition switch ON (II). If it flasheswhile driving (in any shift position),it indicates a possible problem in thetransmission. Avoid rapid acceler-ation and have the transmissionchecked by an authorized Hondadealer as soon as possible.

4 3

To shift from:P to R

R to PN to RD to 22 to 11 to 2

2 to DD to DD to ND to DN to DR to N

Do this:Press the brake pedal andpress the release button.

Press the release button.

Move the lever.

4

3

3

3 4

4

4 3

4

Driving

Automatic Transmission

Shift Lever Position Indicator Shift Lever Positions

213

SSHHIIFFTT LLEEVVEERR

01/04/26 22:18:28 31S84640_216

－

－

－

－This position mechani-cally locks the transmission. UsePark whenever you are turning off orstarting the engine. To shift out ofPark, you must press on the brakepedal and have your foot off theaccelerator pedal. Press the releasebutton on the side of the shift leverto move it.

Use this position foryour normal driving. The transmis-sion automatically selects a suitablegear for your speed and acceleration.You may notice the transmissionshifting up at higher speeds whenthe engine is cold. This helps theengine warm up faster.

To shift to Reversefrom Park, see the explanation underPark. To shift to Reverse fromNeutral, come to a complete stop andthen shift. Press the release buttonbefore shifting into Reverse fromNeutral.

If you have done all of the above andstill cannot move the lever out ofPark, see Shift Lock Release on page

.

You must also press the releasebutton to shift into Park. To avoidtransmission damage, come to acomplete stop before shifting intoPark. The shift lever must be in Parkbefore you can remove the key fromthe ignition switch.

Use Neutral if youneed to restart a stalled engine, or ifit is necessary to stop briefly withthe engine idling. Shift to Park posi-tion if you need to leave the car forany reason. Press on the brake pedalwhen you are moving the shift leverfrom Neutral to another gear.

216

Driving


Park (P)

Drive (D )

Reverse (R)

Neutral (N)

4

214

01/04/26 22:18:36 31S84640_217

－－－This position is similarto D , except only the first threegears are selected. Use D whentowing a trailer in hilly terrain, or toprovide engine braking when goingdown a steep hill. D can also keepthe transmission from cyclingbetween third and fourth gears instop-and-go driving.

To shift to Second,press the release button on the sideof the shift lever. This position locksthe transmission in second gear. Itdoes not downshift to first gearwhen you come to a stop. Secondgives you more power when climbing,and increased engine braking whengoing down steep hills. Use secondgear when starting out on a slipperysurface or in deep snow. It will helpreduce wheelspin.

To shift from Second toFirst, press the release button on theside of the shift lever. With the leverin this position, the transmissionlocks in First gear. By upshifting anddownshifting through 1, 2, D , andD , you can operate thistransmission much like a manualtransmission without a clutch pedal.

For faster acceleration when in D orD , you can get the transmission toautomatically downshift by pushingthe accelerator pedal to the floor.The transmission will shift down oneor two gears, depending on yourspeed.

43

3 34

34

Drive (D ) Second (2) First (1)3


Driving 215

01/04/26 22:18:43 31S84640_218

This allows you to move the shiftlever out of Park if the normalmethod of pushing on the brakepedal and pressing the releasebutton does not work.

Set the Parking brake.

Remove the key from the ignitionswitch.

Insert the key in the Shift LockRelease slot.

If you exceed the maximum speedfor the gear you are in, the enginespeed will enter into the tachometer’sred zone. If this occurs, you may feelthe engine cut in and out. This iscaused by a limiter in the engine’scomputer controls. The engine willrun normally when you reduce theRPM below the red zone.

Put a cloth on the edge of the ShiftLock Release slot cover next tothe shift lever.Use a small flat-tipped screwdriveror small metal plate (neither areincluded in the tool kit) to removethe cover. Carefully pry off theedge of the cover.

1.

2.

3.

4.


Driving

Shift Lock ReleaseEngine Speed Limiter

216

01/04/26 22:18:53 31S84640_219

Push down on the key while youpress the release button on theshift lever and move the shift leverout of Park to Neutral.

If you need to use the Shift LockRelease, it means your car isdeveloping a problem. Have the carchecked by your Honda dealer.

Remove the key from the ShiftLock Release slot, then reinstallthe cover. Make sure the notch onthe cover is on the left side.Depress the brake pedal andrestart the engine.

5.

6.


Driving 217

01/04/26 22:18:59 31S84640_220

－

Make sure the moonroof and thewindows are closed.

Place any packages, valuables, etc.,in the trunk or take them with you.

Turn off the lights.

Make sure the parking brake is fullyreleased before driving away.Driving with the parking brakepartially set can overheat or damagethe rear brakes.

Lock the doors with the key or theremote transmitter.

Check the indicator on the driver’sdoor to verify that the securitysystem is set.

Never park over dry leaves, tallgrass, or other flammablematerials. The three way catalyticconverter gets very hot, and couldcause these materials to catch onfire.

Always use the parking brake whenyou park your car. The indicator onthe instrument panel shows that theparking brake is not fully released; itdoes not indicate that the parkingbrake is firmly set. Make sure theparking brake is set firmly or yourcar may roll if it is parked on anincline.

If your car has an automatictransmission, set the parking brakebefore you put the transmission inPark. This keeps the car frommoving and putting pressure on theparking mechanism in thetransmission making it easier tomove the shift lever out of Parkwhen you want to drive away.

If the car is facing uphill, turn thefront wheels away from the curb. Ifyou have a manual transmission, putit in first gear.

If the car is facing downhill, turn thefront wheels toward the curb. If youhave a manual transmission, put it inreverse gear.

On EX, SE, and EX V-6 models

Parking Tips

Driving

Parking

218

01/04/26 22:19:11 31S84640_221

Your Honda is equipped with frontdisc brakes. The brakes on the rearwheels may be disc or drum,depending on the model. A powerassist helps reduce the effort neededon the brake pedal.

Put your foot on the brake pedal onlywhen you intend to brake. Restingyour foot on the pedal keeps thebrakes applied lightly, causing themto build up heat. Heat build-up canreduce how well your brakes work. Italso keeps your brake lights on allthe time, confusing drivers behindyou.

Your brakes may sometimes squealor squeak when you apply themlightly. Do not confuse this with thebrake wear indicators. They make avery audible ‘‘screeching.’’

Constant application of the brakeswhen going down a long hill buildsup heat and reduces their effective-ness. Use the engine to assist thebrakes by downshifting to a lowergear and taking your foot off theaccelerator pedal.

Check your brakes after drivingthrough deep water. Apply thebrakes moderately to see if they feelnormal. If not, apply them gently andfrequently until they do. Since alonger distance is needed to stopwith wet brakes, be extra cautiousand alert in your driving.

The front disc brakes on all modelshave audible brake wear indicators.They are also on the rear brakes ofcars equipped with ABS as standardequipment.When the brake pads need replacing,you will hear a distinctive metallic‘‘screeching’’ sound when you applythe brakes. If you do not have thebrake pads replaced, they will beginscreeching all the time.

Brake Wear Indicators

The Braking System

Driving 219

01/04/26 22:19:20 31S84640_222

this defeats thepurpose of the ABS. Let the ABSwork for you by always keeping firm,steady pressure on the brake pedalas you steer away from the hazard.This is sometimes referred to as

You will feel a pulsation in the brakepedal when the ABS activates, andyou may hear some noise. This isnormal, it is the ABS rapidlypumping the brakes.

Activation varies with the amount oftraction your tires have. On drypavement, you will need to press onthe brake pedal very hard before youactivate the ABS. However, you mayfeel the ABS activate immediately ifyou are trying to stop on snow or ice.

The hydraulic system that operatesthe brakes has two separate circuits.Each circuit works diagonally acrossthe vehicle (the left-front brake isconnected with the right-rear brake,etc.). If one circuit should develop aproblem, you will still have brakingat two wheels.

The U.S. LX with ABS and EXmodels, Canada SE and EX-L models,and all V6 models have an Anti-lockBrake System (ABS) as standardequipment. It is optional on othermodels.

When the front tires skid, you losesteering control; the car continuesstraight ahead even though you turnthe steering wheel. The ABS helps toprevent lock-up and helps you retainsteering control by pumping thebrakes rapidly; much faster than aperson can do it.

ABS helps to prevent the wheelsfrom locking up and skidding duringhard braking, allowing you to retainsteering control.

‘‘stomp and steer.’’

Anti-lock Brakes You should never pump thebrake pedal,

Brake System Design

The Braking System

Driving220

FFrroonntt

01/04/26 22:19:31 31S84640_223

＊＊

＊＊

such as trying to take acorner too fast or making a suddenlane change. Always drive at a safe,prudent speed for the road andweather conditions.

Always steer moderatelywhen you are braking hard. Severeor sharp steering wheel movementcan still cause your car to veer intooncoming traffic or off the road.

itonly helps with steering controlduring braking. You should alwaysmaintain a safe following distancefrom other vehicles.

on loose oruneven surfaces, such as gravel or

snow, than a vehicle without anti-lock. Slow down and allow a greaterdistance between vehicles underthose conditions.

The ABS is self-checking. If anythinggoes wrong, the ABS indicator onthe instrument panel comes on (seepage ). This means the anti-lockfunction of the braking system hasshut down. The brakes still work likea conventional system without anti-

lock, providing normal stoppingability. You should have the dealerinspect your car as soon as possible.

The TCS indicator will come onalong with the ABS indicator.

57

On U.S. LX V-6 and all EX V-6 models

Important Safety Reminders

ABS Indicator

ABS will not prevent a skid thatresults from changing directionabruptly,

ABS cannot prevent a loss ofstability.

ABS does not reduce the time ordistance it takes to stop the car,

A vehicle with ABS may require alonger distance to stop

The Braking System

Driving 221

UU..SS.. iinnddiiccaattoorr sshhoowwnn

AABBSS IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

01/04/26 22:19:41 31S84640_224

You should still install winter tires onyour vehicle during the winter. Makesure to use the same size originallysupplied with vehicle. Exercise thesame caution in winter driving as youwould if your vehicle was notequipped with TCS.

When starting out or driving at lowspeeds on a loose or slippery roadsurface, you may notice that thevehicle does not respond to theaccelerator in the same way it doesat other times. This is a sign TCS isactivating. You will see the TCSindicator light flash.

Driving with the compact spare tireinstalled (see page ) mayactivate the TCS. You should turn offthe system.

If the brakes overheat while TCS isactivating, the TCS indicator willstop flashing and stay on temporarily.This indicates that TCS has turnedoff. After the brakes have cooleddown (usually for about 10 minutes),TCS will turn back on and theindicator will turn off.

Driving with TCS requires no specialskills or technique. The TCS doesnot control your vehicle’s wholebraking system and cannot preventskidding if you enter a corner toofast. It is still your responsibility todrive at reasonable speeds and toleave a sufficient margin of safety.

TCS monitors the speed of all fourwheels. When it senses a front wheellosing traction, it applies braking tothat wheel. The TCS indicatorflashes when this occurs.

Your Honda is equipped with aTraction Control System (TCS) toassist you in maintaining tractionwhile driving slowly on loose orslippery surfaces. The TCS assistsonly in low-speed, low-tractionconditions; up to approximately 18mph (30 km/h).

312

On LX V-6 and EX V-6 models

Traction Control System

Driving222

TTCCSS IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

01/04/26 22:19:51 31S84640_225

The Traction Control System turnson every time you start the engine,even if you turned it off the last timeyou drove the vehicle.

This switch is under the side vent. Itlets you turn the Traction ControlSystem on and off. You cannot turnoff the TCS while the TCS indicatorlight is flashing.

Deactivate the system by pressingthe TCS On/Off switch. The TCSindicator light comes on as areminder. Pressing the switch againturns the system back on.

The TCS indicator comes on orflashes under the following condi-tions:

When you turn the ignition switchto ON (II).

When you manually turn off TCS.

It flashes when TCS is regulatingwheelspin.

If the system’s diagnostics sensesa problem with TCS, the indicatorwill come on and stay on.

If the brakes overheat, theindicator will come on.

CONTINUED

TCS ON/OFF Switch TCS Indicator


Driving 223

01/04/26 22:20:04 31S84640_226

The TCS indicator may occasionallycome on for one or two seconds andthen go out. This is normal.

This indicator will come on alongwith the ABS indicator if there is aproblem in the anti-lock brakesystem (see on page

).

If the TCS indicator comes on alongwith the Brake System indicator, itindicates a problem in the brakesystem (see

on page ).

If the TCS indicator comes on whiledriving, pull to the side of the roadwhen it is safe and turn off theengine. Reset the system by re-starting the engine, and watch theTCS indicator. If the indicatorremains on, or comes back on whiledriving, have the TCS inspected byyour Honda dealer. You can stilldrive the vehicle without TCS.

57

221ABS Indicator

Brake SystemIndicator


Driving224

01/04/26 22:20:11 31S84640_227

－

CONTINUED

Rain, fog, and snow conditionsrequire a different driving techniquebecause of reduced traction andvisibility. Keep your car well-maintained and exercise greatercaution when you need to drive inbad weather. The cruise controlshould not be used in theseconditions.

Always driveslower than you would in dryweather. It takes your car longer toreact, even in conditions that mayseem just barely damp. Applysmooth, even pressure to all thecontrols. Abrupt steering wheelmovements or sudden, hard appli-cation of the brakes can cause loss ofcontrol in wet weather. Be extracautious for the first few miles(kilometers) of driving while youadjust to the change in drivingconditions. This is especially true insnow. A person can forget somesnow-driving techniques during thesummer months. Practice is neededto relearn those skills.

Exercise extra caution when drivingin rain after a long dry spell. Aftermonths of dry weather, the firstrains bring oil to the surface of theroadway, making it slippery.

Driving in Bad Weather

Driving

Driving Technique

225

01/04/26 22:20:18 31S84640_228

－－Being able to seeclearly in all directions and beingvisible to other drivers are importantin all weather conditions. This ismore difficult in bad weather. To beseen more clearly during daylighthours, turn on your headlights.

Check your tiresfrequently for wear and properpressure. Both are important inpreventing ‘‘hydroplaning’’ (loss oftraction on a wet surface). In thewinter, mount snow tires on all fourwheels for the best handling.

Watch road conditions carefully,they can change from moment tomoment. Wet leaves can be as slip-pery as ice. ‘‘Clear’’ roads can havepatches of ice. Driving conditionscan be very hazardous when theoutside temperature is near freezing.The road surface can becomecovered with areas of water puddlesmixed with areas of ice, so yourtraction can change without warning.

Inspect your windshield wipers andwashers frequently. Keep the wind-shield washer reservoir full of theproper fluid. Have the windshieldwiper blades replaced if they start tostreak the windshield or leave partsunwiped. Use the defrosters and airconditioning to keep the windowsfrom fogging up on the inside (seepage ).

Be careful when downshifting. Iftraction is low, you can lock up thedrive wheels for a moment and causea skid.

Be very cautious when passing, orbeing passed by other vehicles. Thespray from large vehicles reducesyour visibility, and the wind buffetingcan cause you to lose control.109

Visibility Traction

Driving

Driving in Bad Weather

226

01/04/26 22:20:27 31S84640_229

Your Honda has been designedprimarily to carry passengers andtheir cargo. You can use it to tow atrailer if you carefully observe theload limits, use the proper equipment,and follow the guidelines in thissection.

The totalweight of the trailer andeverything loaded in it must notexceed 1,000 lbs (450 kg). Towinga load that is too heavy canseriously affect your vehicle’shandling and performance. It canalso damage the engine anddrivetrain.

The weight thatthe tongue of a fully-loaded trailerputs on the hitch should beapproximately 10 percent of thetrailer weight. Too little tongueload can make the trailer unstableand cause it to sway. Too muchtongue load reduces front-tiretraction and steering control.

Total Trailer Weight: Tongue Load:

Load Limits

Towing a Trailer

Driving 227

01/04/26 22:20:35 31S84640_230

The total weight of the vehicle, alloccupants, all cargo, and thetongue load must not exceed:

To achieve a proper tongue load,start by loading 60 percent of theload toward the front of the trailerand 40 percent toward the rear, thenre-adjust the load as needed.

The total weight of the vehicle, alloccupants, all cargo, and thetongue load must not exceed:

(EX)2,205 lbs (1000 kg)on the front axle1,940 lbs (880 kg)on the rear axle

(U.S. DX, LX, ValuePackage and all SE models)

2,180 lbs (990 kg)on the front axle1,920 lbs (870 kg)on the rear axle

(U.S. DX, LX, ValuePackage and all SE models)

4,035 lbs (1,830 kg)(EX)

4,080 lbs (1,850 kg)

4,255 lbs (1,930 kg)6-cylinder models:

2,315 lbs (1,050 kg)on the front axle1,960 lbs (890 kg)on the rear axle

4-cylinder models:

4-cylinder models:

6-cylinder models:

Towing a Trailer

Driving

Gross Axle Weight Rating(GAWR):

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating(GVWR):

228

Exceeding load limits orimproperly loading your vehicleand trailer can cause a crash inwhich you can be seriouslyinjured or killed.

Check the loading of yourvehicle and trailer carefullybefore starting to drive.

01/04/26 22:20:44 31S84640_231

Always use safety chains. Make surethey are secured to both the trailerand hitch, and that they cross underthe tongue so they can catch thetrailer if it becomes unhitched.Leave enough slack to allow thetrailer to turn corners easily, but donot let the chains drag on the ground.

Honda recommends that any trailerhaving a total weight of 1,000 lbs(450 kg) or more be equipped withits own electric or surge-type brakes.

If you choose electric brakes, besure they are electronically actuated.Do not attempt to tap into yourvehicle’s hydraulic system. Nomatter how successful it may seem,any attempt to attach trailer brakesto your vehicle’s hydraulic systemwill lower braking effectiveness andcreate a potential hazard.

Any hitch used on your vehicle mustbe properly bolted to the underbody.

Discuss your needs with your trailersales or rental agency, and follow theguidelines in the rest of this section.Also make sure that all equipment isproperly installed and that it meetsfederal, state, province, and localregulations.

Towing can require a variety ofequipment, depending on the size ofyour trailer, how it will be used, andhow much load you are towing.

The best way to confirm that vehicleand trailer weights are within limitsis to have them checked at a publicscale.

Using a suitable scale or a specialtongue load gauge, check the tongueload the first time you set up atowing combination (a fully-loadedvehicle and trailer), then recheck thetongue load whenever the conditionschange.

Towing a Trailer

Driving

Safety Chains

Trailer Brakes

Hitches

Towing Equipment andAccessories

Checking Loads

229

01/04/26 22:20:56 31S84640_232

Your vehicle has a trailer lightingconnector in the trunk. Refer to thedrawing in this page for the wiringcolor code and purpose of each pin.

If you use a converter, you can getthe connector and pins that matewith the connector in your vehiclefrom your Honda dealer.

Since lighting and wiring vary intrailer type and brand, you shouldalso have a qualified mechanic installa suitable connector between thevehicle and the trailer.

Trailer Lights

Towing a Trailer

Driving230

GGRROOUUNNDD((BBLLAACCKK))

BBAACCKK--UUPP LLIIGGHHTT((GGRREEEENN//BBLLAACCKK))

LLEEFFTT TTUURRNN SSIIGGNNAALL((GGRREEEENN//BBLLUUEE))

RRIIGGHHTT TTUURRNN SSIIGGNNAALL((GGRREEEENN//YYEELLLLOOWW))

TTAAIILLLLIIGGHHTT((RREEDD//BBLLAACCKK))

BBRRAAKKEE LLIIGGHHTT((WWHHIITTEE//BBLLAACCKK))

01/04/26 22:21:04 31S84640_233

Many states and Canadian provincesrequire special outside mirrors whentowing a trailer. Even if they don’t,you should install special mirrors ifyou cannot clearly see behind you, orif the trailer creates a blind spot.

Ask your trailer sales or rentalagency if any other items arerecommended or required for yourtowing situation.

When preparing to tow, and beforedriving away, be sure to check thefollowing:

Your vehicle tires and spare areproperly inflated (see page ),and the trailer tires and spare areinflated as recommended by thetrailer maker.

The vehicle has been properlyserviced, and the tires, brakes,suspension, and cooling systemare in good operating condition.

All weights and loads are withinlimits (see pages and ).

The hitch, safety chains, and anyother attachments are secure.

All items on and in the trailer areproperly secured and cannot shiftwhile you drive.

The lights and brakes on yourvehicle and the trailer are workingproperly.

227 228

285Additional Trailer Equipment Pre-Tow Checklist

Towing a Trailer

Driving 231

01/04/26 22:21:15 31S84640_234

The added weight, length, andheight of a trailer will affect yourvehicle’s handling and performance,so driving with a trailer requiressome special driving skills andtechniques.

For your safety and the safety ofothers, take time to practice drivingmaneuvers before heading for theopen road, and follow the guidelinesdiscussed below.

Make turns more slowly and widerthan normal. The trailer tracks asmaller arc than your vehicle, and itcan hit or run over something thevehicle misses. Allow more time anddistance for braking. Do not brake orturn suddenly as this could cause thetrailer to jackknife or turn over.

If you must stop when facing uphill,use the foot brake or parking brake.Do not try to hold the vehicle inplace by pressing on the accelerator,as this can cause the automatictransmission to overheat.

When driving down hills, reduceyour speed and shift down to 2ndgear. Do not ‘‘ride’’ the brakes, andremember it will take longer to slowdown and stop when towing a trailer.

Drive slower than normal in alldriving situations, and obey postedspeed limits for vehicles with trailers.If you have an automatictransmission, use D position whentowing a trailer on level roads. D isthe proper shift lever position to usewhen towing a trailer in hilly terrain.(See ‘‘ ’’ in the nextcolumn for additional gearinformation.)

When climbing hills, closely watchyour temperature gauge. If it nearsthe red (Hot) mark, turn the airconditioning off, reduce speed and, ifnecessary, pull to the side of theroad to let the engine cool.

If the automatic transmission shiftsfrequently between 3rd and 4thgears while going up a hill, shift toD .

43

3

Driving Safely With a Trailer

Towing Speeds and Gears

Making Turns and Braking

Driving on Hills

Driving on Hills

Towing a Trailer

Driving232

01/04/26 22:21:27 31S84640_235

Crosswinds and air turbulencecaused by passing trucks can disruptyour steering and cause trailerswaying. When being passed by alarge vehicle, keep a constant speedand steer straight ahead. Do not tryto make quick steering or brakingcorrections.

Always drive slowly and havesomeone guide you when backing up.Grip the of the steeringwheel; then turn the wheel to the leftto get the trailer to move to the left,and turn the wheel right to move thetrailer to the right.

Follow all normal precautions whenparking, including firmly setting theparking brake and putting thetransmission in Park (automatic) orin 1st or Reverse (manual). Also,place wheel chocks at each of thetrailer’s tires.

bottom

Handling Crosswinds and Buffeting

Backing Up

Parking

Towing a Trailer

Driving 233

01/04/26 22:21:34 31S84640_236

234

01/04/26 22:21:37 31S84640_237

This section also includesMaintenance Schedules for normaldriving and severe driving conditions,a Maintenance Record, and instruc-tions for simple maintenance tasksyou may want to take care ofyourself.

If you have the skills and tools to per-form more complex maintenancetasks on your Honda, you may wantto purchase the Service Manual. Seepage for information on how toobtain a copy, or see your Hondadealer.

This section explains why it isimportant to keep your car wellmaintained and to follow basicmaintenance safety precautions.

......................Maintenance Safety . 236.Important Safety Precautions . 237

.................Maintenance Schedule . 238...Required Maintenance Record . 245

.......Owner Maintenance Checks . 247..............................Fluid Locations . 248

......................................Engine Oil . 250..................................Adding Oil . 250

....................Recommended Oil . 250..............................Synthetic Oil . 251

....................................Additives . 252.....Changing the Oil and Filter . 252

.............................Cooling System . 255............Adding Engine Coolant . 255

.......Replacing Engine Coolant . 257....................Windshield Washers . 262

.......................Transmission Fluid . 263Automatic

.........................Transmission . 2635-speed Manual

.........................Transmission . 265................Brake and Clutch Fluid . 267

............................Brake System . 267...........................Clutch System . 268

..............................Power Steering . 268.....................Air Cleaner Element . 269

....................................Hood Latch . 272

....................................Spark Plugs . 272..............................Replacement . 272............................Specifications . 273

...........................................Battery . 276.................................Wiper Blades . 279

..............Air Conditioning System . 281..................Dust and Pollen Filter . 282

.....................................Drive Belts . 282....................................Timing Belt . 283

...............................................Tires . 283......................................Inflation . 284

..................................Inspection . 286..............................Maintenance . 286.............................Tire Rotation . 287

...Replacing Tires and Wheels . 287......................Wheels and Tires . 288

..........................Winter Driving . 289.............................Snow Tires . 289............................Tire Chains . 289

.............................................Lights . 290........................Replacing Bulbs . 292

...........................Storing Your Car . 301

359

Maintenance

Maintenance 235

01/04/26 22:21:44 31S84640_238

This section includes instructions forsimple maintenance tasks, such aschecking and adding oil. Any serviceitems not detailed in this sectionshould be performed by a Hondatechnician or other qualifiedmechanic.

Some of the most important safetyprecautions are given here. However,we cannot warn you of everyconceivable hazard that can arise inperforming maintenance. Only youcan decide whether or not youshould perform a given task.

Regularly maintaining your car is thebest way to protect your investment.Proper maintenance is essential toyour safety and the safety of yourpassengers. It will also reward youwith more economical, trouble-freedriving and help reduce air pollution.

Maintenance Safety

Maintenance236

Failure to properly followmaintenance instructions andprecautions can cause you tobe seriously hurt or killed.

Always follow the proceduresand precautions in this owner’smanual.

Improperly maintaining this caror failing to correct a problembefore driving can cause acrash in which you can beseriously hurt or killed.

Always follow the inspectionand maintenancerecommendations andschedules in this owner’smanual.

01/04/26 22:21:52 31S84640_239

Be surethere is adequate ventilationwhenever you operate the engine.

Let theengine and exhaust system coolbefore touching any parts.

Donot run the engine unless in-structed to do so.

Read the instructions before youbegin, and make sure you have thetools and skills required.

Before you begin any maintenance,make sure your car is parked onlevel ground and that the parkingbrake is set. Also, be sure the engineis off. This will help to eliminateseveral potential hazards:

You should wear eye protection andprotective clothing when workingnear the battery or when usingcompressed air.

To reduce the possibility of fire orexplosion, be careful when workingaround gasoline or batteries. Use acommercially available degreaser orparts cleaner, not gasoline, to cleanparts. Keep cigarettes, sparks, andflames away from the battery and allfuel-related parts.

Maintenance Safety

Maintenance

Important Safety Precautions

Carbon monoxide poisoningfrom engine exhaust.

Burns from hot parts.

Injury from moving parts.

237

01/04/26 22:22:01 31S84640_240

The services and time or distanceintervals shown in the maintenanceschedule assume you will use yourvehicle as normal transportation forpassengers and their possessions.You should also follow theserecommendations:

The Maintenance Schedule specifieshow often you should have your carserviced and what things needattention. It is essential that you haveyour car serviced as scheduled toretain its high level of safety,dependability, and emissions controlperformance.

Avoid exceeding your car’s loadlimit. This puts excess stress onthe engine, brakes, and manyother parts of your car. The loadlimit is shown on the label on thedriver’s doorjamb.

Operate your car on reasonableroads within the legal speed limit.

Drive your car regularly over adistance of several miles(kilometers).

Always use unleaded gasoline withthe proper octane rating (see page

).

Service your car according to thetime and mileage periods on one ofthe Maintenance Schedules on thefollowing pages. Select the schedulefor ‘‘Severe Conditions’’ if most ofyour driving is done under one ormore of the conditions listed on thatpage. Otherwise, follow the schedulefor ‘‘Normal Conditions.’’

194

Maintenance Schedule

Maintenance

Which Schedule to Follow:

238

01/04/26 22:22:10 31S84640_241

＃

We recommend the use of genuineHonda parts and fluids whenever youhave maintenance done. These aremanufactured to the same high-quality standards as the originalcomponents, so you can be confidentof their performance and durability.

U.S. Vehicles:

According to state and federalregulations, failure to performmaintenance on the items markedwith will not void your emissionswarranties. However, Hondarecommends that all maintenanceservices be performed at therecommended time or mileageperiod to ensure long-term reliability.

Your authorized Honda dealerknows your car best and can providecompetent, efficient service.However, service at a dealer is notmandatory to keep your warrantiesin effect. Maintenance may be doneby any qualified service facility orperson who is skilled in this type ofautomotive service. Keep all thereceipts as proof of completion, andhave the person who does the workfill out the Maintenance Record.Check your warranty booklet formore information.

Maintenance Schedule

Maintenance

Maintenance, replacement orrepair of emissions controldevices and systems may be doneby any automotive repairestablishment or individual usingparts that are ‘‘certif ied’’ to EPAstandards.

239

01/04/26 22:22:17 31S84640_242

－

＃＊＊

＃＃

＊＊＊

NOTE: If you onlydrive under a

‘‘severe’’ condition, you shouldfollow the Normal ConditionsMaintenance Schedule.

Follow the Normal ConditionsMaintenance Schedule if thesevere driving conditionsspecified in the SevereConditions MaintenanceSchedule do not apply.

Follow the MaintenanceSchedule for Severe Conditions.

OCCASIONALLY

Maintenance

U.S. Owners

Canadian Owners

240

Visually inspect the following items:

Service at the indicateddistance or time whichevercomes first.

miles x 1,000km x 1,000months

Replace every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 1 year

Check oil and coolant at each fuel stop

Balancer belt applies to 4-cylinder models only.See timing belt on page to determine need for replacement.See information on maintenance and emissions warranty, last column, page .

Tie rod ends, steering gear box, and bootsSuspension components, driveshaft bootsBrake hoses and lines (including ABS)All fluid levels and condition of fluidsCooling system hoses and connectionsExhaust system, fuel lines and connections

152412

304824

457236

609648

7512060

9014472

10516884

12019296

Every 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 6 years120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 6 years, then every

90,000 miles (144,000 km) or 5 years

Every 3 years (independent of mileage)

Rotate tires every 7,500 miles (12,000 km)

120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 10 years, then every60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 5 years

Replace engine oilReplace engine oil filterCheck engine oil and coolantReplace air cleaner elementInspect valve clearanceReplace spark plugsReplace timing belt , balancer belt , andinspect water pumpInspect and adjust drive beltsInspect idle speedReplace engine coolant

Replace transmission fluid

Inspect front and rear brakesReplace brake fluidCheck parking brake adjustmentReplace dust and pollen filterRotate tires (Check tire inflation and conditionat least once per month)

Adjust only if noisy

:1 :2 :

MTAT

239283

1 1, 2

Main

tenance

Sch

edule

for

Norm

alC

onditi

ons

01/04/26 22:22:43 31S84640_243

－－

□□□□□□□□□□

□□□□□□□

□

□ □□

□

□

□

＃

＃

＊

＃

＊

Maintenance 241

A, B, C, D

U.S. Owners

Canadian Owners

A

B

C

D

Balancer belt applies to 4-cylinder models only.

See information on maintenance and emissions warranty, lastcolumn, page .

Check engine oil and coolant at each fuel stop.Check and adjust valve clearance, cold engine, only if noisy.

:

1 :

240

239

Service at the indicated distance or time, whichever comes first. Do the items in as required for each distance/time interval.Refer to page to determine which schedule to use.

Use the Maintenance Schedule for Severe Conditions.

Replace engine oil.Rotate tires (follow pattern on page ).Replace engine oil filter.Inspect front and rear brakes.Check parking brake adjustment.Inspect tie rod ends, steering gear box and boots.Inspect suspension components.Inspect driveshaft boots.Inspect brake hoses and lines (including ABS).Check all fluid levels, condition of fluids, and checkfor leaks.Inspect cooling system hoses and connections.Inspect exhaust system.Inspect fuel lines and connections.

Replace air cleaner element.Inspect and adjust drive belts.Replace dust and pollen filter.Replace brake fluid every 3 years.(independent of mileage)

7,500 mi/12,000 km15,000 mi/24,000 km/1 yr22,500 mi/36,000 km30,000 mi/48,000 km/2 yrs37,500 mi/60,000 km3 yrs (independent of mileage)45,000 mi/72,000 km/3 yrs52,500 mi/84,000 km60,000 mi/96,000 km/4 yrs67,500 mi/108,000 km75,000 mi/120,000 km/5 yrs82,500 mi/132,000 km6 yrs (independent of mileage)90,000 mi/144,000 km/6 yrs97,500 mi/156,000 km105,000 mi/168,000 km/7 yrs

112,500 mi/180,000 km120,000 mi/192,000 km/8 yrs120,000 mi/192,000 km/10 yrs,then replace every 60,000 mi/96,000 km/5yrsEvery 120,000 mi/192,000 km/6yrs120,000 mi/192,000 km/6yrsthen replace every 90,000 mi/144,000 km/5yrs

Do items in A.Do items in A, B.Do items in A.Do items in A, B, C.Do items in A, B.Do item in D.Do items in A, B.Do items in A.Do items in A, B, C.Do items in A.Do items in A, B.Do items in A.Do item in D.Do items in A, B, C.Do items in A.

Replace timing belt, balancer belt , inspectwater pump.

Inspect valve clearance. Check idle speed.Replace spark plugs. Do items in A, B.

Do items in A.Do items in A, B, C.

Replace engine coolant

Replace manual transmission fluid

Replace automatic transmission fluid

287

NOTE:

1

Main

tenance

Sch

edule

for

Norm

alC

onditio

ns

(listed

by

dista

nce

/time)

01/04/26 22:22:53 31S84640_244

－

＃

＊＊＊

＃＊＊＊

＊

＃＃

Follow the MaintenanceSchedule for Severe Conditions.

Follow the Severe ConditionsMaintenance Schedule if youdrive your vehicleunder one or more of thefollowing conditions:

Driving less than 5 miles (8km) per trip or, in freezingtemperatures, driving lessthan 10 miles (16 km) per trip.Driving in extremely hot[over 90°F (32°C)] conditions.Extensive idling or longperiods of stop-and-go driving.Trailer towing, driving with acar top carrier, or driving inmountainous conditions.Driving on muddy, dusty, orde-iced roads.

MAINLY

Maintenance

U.S. Owners

Canadian Owners

242

Visually inspect the following items:

Replace every 3,750 miles (6,000 km) or 6 monthsCheck oil and coolant at each fuel stop

Service at the indicateddistance or time whichevercomes first.

miles x 1,000km x 1,000months

Balancer belt applies to 4-cylinder models only.See timing belt on page to determine need for replacement.

See information on maintenance and

emissions warranty, last column, page .

Every 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 3 years

120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 10 years, then every60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 5 years

See Dust and Pollen Filter on page for replacement information under special driving conditions.

Replace engine oil and oil filterCheck engine oil and coolantClean ( ) or replace ( ) air cleaner elementUse normal schedule except in dusty conditonsInspect valve clearanceReplace spark plugsReplace timing belt , balancer belt , and

inspect water pumpInspect and adjust drive beltsInspect idle speedReplace engine coolant

Replace transmission fluid

Inspect front and rear brakesReplace brake fluidCheck parking brake adjustmentReplace dust and pollen filterLubricate all hinges, locks and latchesRotate tires (Check tire inflation and conditionat least once per month)

Every 3 years (independent of mileage)

Tie rod ends, steering gear box, and bootsSuspension components, driveshaft bootsBrake hoses and lines (including ABS)All fluid levels and conditions of fluidsCooling system hoses and connectionsExhaust system, fuel lines and connections

Lights and controls, vehicle underbody

152412

304824

457236

609648

7512060

9014472

10516884

12019296

Rotate tires every 7,500 miles (12,000 km)

Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 6 months

Adjust only if noisy

Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 6 months

:

1 :2 :3 :

239

283

MTAT

282

60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 3 years, then every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 2 years

1 1, 2

3

Main

tenance

Sch

edule

for

Seve

reC

onditi

ons

01/04/26 22:23:18 31S84640_245

－－

□□□□□□□□

□□

□□□□□□□□□

□

□

□□

□＃

＃

＃

＊

＃＊＊＊

＊＊＊

CONTINUEDMaintenance 243

A, B, C, D, E

U.S. Owners

Canadian Owners

A

B

C

D

E

Service at the indicated distance or time, whichever comes first. Do the items in as required for each distance/time.Refer to page to determine which schedule to use.

Use the Maintenance Schedule for Severe Conditions.Replace engine oil and filter.Inspect front and rear brakes.Rotate tires (follow pattern on page ).Inspect tie rod ends, steering gear box and boots.Inspect suspension components.Inspect driveshaft boots.Check parking brake adjustment.Lubricate all hinges, locks and latches withmultipurpose grease.Inspect brake hoses and lines (including ABS)Check all fluid leves, condition of fluids, and checkfor leaks.Inspect cooling system hoses and connections.Inspect exhaust system.Inspect fuel lines and connections

Check all lights.Inspect the underbody.Replace air cleaner element.Inspect and adjust drive belts.Replace dust and pollen filter .Replace brake fluid every 3 years(independent of mileage).

Do items in A.Do items in A, B.Do items in A.

Clean air cleaner element.Do items in A, B, C.Do items in A.Do items in A, B.Do items in A.Do items in A, B, C, D.Do items in A.Do items in A, B.Do items in A.Do item in E.

Clean air cleaner element. Do items in A, B, C.Do items in A.Do items in A, B.Do items in A.

Replace MT fluid.Replace AT fluid.

Replace timing belt , balancer belt , inspectwater pump.Do items in A, B, C, D.Do items in A.

3,750 mi/6,000 km7,500 mi/12,000 km11,250 mi/18,000 km15,000 mi/24,000 km/1 yr

18,750 mi/30,000 km22,500 mi/36,000 km26,250 mi/42,000 km30,000 mi/48,000 km/2 yrs33,750 mi/54,000 km37,500 mi/60,000 km41,250 mi/66,000 km3 yrs (independent ofmileage)45,000 mi/72,000 km/3 yrs48,750 mi/78,000 km52,500 mi/84,000 km56,250 mi/90,000 km60,000 mi/96,000 km/3 yrs60,000 mi/96,000 km/3 yrs,then replace every 30,000 mi/48,000 km/2 yrs.60,000 mi/96,000 km/4 yrs

63,750 mi/102,000 km

287

:

242


See information on maintenance and emissions warranty, lastcolumn, page .

See timing belt on page to determine need for replacement.Balancer belt applies to 4-cylinder models only.See Dust and Pollen Filter on page for replacementinformation under special driving conditions.

NOTE:283

282

239

1 :2 :3 :

3

1 1, 2

Main

tenance

Sch

edule

for

Seve

reC

onditio

ns

(listed

by

dista

nce

/time)

01/04/26 22:23:32 31S84640_246

□

□

□

□□□□

□

□

□□

＊＊＊

＊＊＊

＃

＊＊＊

Maintenance244

See information on maintenance and emissions warranty, lastcolumn, page .See timing belt on page to determine need for replacement.Balancer belt applies to 4-cylinder models only.


See Dust and Pollen Filter on page for replacementinformation under special driving conditions.

:

1 :2 :3 :

239283

NOTE:

282

67,500 mi/108,000 km71,250 mi/114,000 km75,000 mi/120,000 km/5 yrs

78,750 mi/126,000 km82,500 mi/132,000 km86,250 mi/138,000 km90,000 mi/144,000 km/5 yrs6 yrs (independent ofmileage)90,000 mi/144,000 km/6 yrs93,750 mi/150,000 km97,500 mi/156,000 km101,250 mi/162,000 km105,000 mi/168,000 km/7 yrs

108,750 mi/174,000 km112,500 mi/180,000 km116,250 mi/186,000 km120,000 mi/192,000 km/8 yrs

120,000 mi/192,000 km/10 yrs,then replace every 60,000 mi/96,000 km/5 yrs120,000 mi/192,000 km/6 yrs120,000 mi/192,000 km/7 yrs

Do items in A,B.Do items in A.

Crean air cleaner element.Do items in A, B, C.Do items in A.Do items in A, B.Do items in A.

Replace AT fluid.Do item in E.

Do items in A, B, C, D.Do items in A.Do items in A, B.Do items in A.

Replace timing belt , balancer belt , andinspect water pump.

Inspect valve clearance.Check idle speed.Clean air cleaner element.Replace spark plugs.

Do items in A, B, C.Do items in A.Do items in A, B.Do items in A.

Replace timing belt , balancer belt , andinspect water pump.Do items in A, B, C, D.

Replace engine coolant

Replace MT fluidReplace AT fluid

1 1, 2

1 1, 2

Main

tenance

Sch

edule

for

Seve

reC

onditi

ons

(lis

ted

by

dis

tance

/tim

e)

01/04/26 22:23:40 31S84640_247

CONTINUEDMaintenance

Required Maintenance Record (for Normal and Severe Schedules)

245

3,750 mi

7,500 mi

11,250 mi

15,000 mi

18,750 mi

22,500 mi

26,250 mi

30,000 mi

33,750 mi

37,500 mi

41,250 mi

45,000 mi

48,750 mi

52,500 mi

56,250 mi

60,000 mi

You or the servicing dealer can record all completed maintenance here, whether you follow the schedule for normal conditions (page ) or severeconditions (page ). Keep the receipts for all work done on your vehicle.

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

Signature or dealer stamp Signature or dealer stamp mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

6,000 km

12,000 km

18,000 km

24,000 km(or 1 year)

30,000 km

36,000 km

42,000 km

48,000 km(or 2 years)

54,000 km

60,000 km

66,000 km


78,000 km

84,000 km

90,000 km


240242

01/04/26 22:23:51 31S84640_248

Maintenance

Required Maintenance Record (for Normal and Severe Schedules)

246

63,750 mi

67,500 mi

71,250 mi

75,000 mi

78,750 mi

82,500 mi

86,250 mi

90,000 mi

93,750 mi

97,500 mi

101,250 mi

105,000 mi

108,750 mi

112,500 mi

116,250 mi

120,000 mi

Signature or dealer stamp mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

Signature or dealer stamp mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

102,000 km

108,000 km

114,000 km


126,000 km

132,000 km

138,000 km


150,000 km

156,000 km

162,000 km


174,000 km

180,000 km

186,000 km


01/04/26 22:23:58 31S84640_249

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

You should check the followingitems at the specified intervals. Ifyou are unsure of how to performany check, turn to the page given.

Engine oil level Check everytime you fill the fuel tank. Seepage .

Engine coolant level Check theradiator reserve tank every timeyou fill the fuel tank. See page .

Windshield washer fluid Checkthe level in the reservoir monthly.If weather conditions cause you touse the washers frequently, checkthe reservoir each time you stopfor fuel. See page .

Lights Check the operation ofthe headlights, parking lights,taillights, high-mount brake light,turn signals, brake lights, andlicense plate lights monthly. Seepage .

Tires Check the tire pressuremonthly. Examine the tread forwear and foreign objects. See page

.

Automatic transmission Checkthe fluid level monthly. See page

.

Brakes Check the fluid levelmonthly. See page .

198

200

262

263

267

283

290

Owner Maintenance Checks

Maintenance 247

01/04/26 22:24:07 31S84640_250

Maintenance

Fluid Locations

4-cylinder Models

248

BBRRAAKKEE FFLLUUIIDD((GGrraayy ccaapp))

EENNGGIINNEE OOIILLFFIILLLL CCAAPP

CCOOOOLLAANNTTRREESSEERRVVOOIIRR

AAUUTTOOMMAATTIICCTTRRAANNSSMMIISSSSIIOONNFFLLUUIIDD DDIIPPSSTTIICCKK((YYeellllooww lloooopp))

PPOOWWEERR SSTTEEEERRIINNGGFFLLUUIIDD ((RReedd ccaapp))

EENNGGIINNEE OOIILL DDIIPPSSTTIICCKK((OOrraannggee lloooopp))

CCLLUUTTCCHH FFLLUUIIDD((55--ssppeeeedd MMaannuuaallTTrraannssmmiissssiioonn oonnllyy))((GGrraayy ccaapp))

WWAASSHHEERR FFLLUUIIDD((BBlluuee ccaapp))

RRAADDIIAATTOORR CCAAPP

01/04/26 22:24:13 31S84640_251

Fluid Locations

Maintenance

6-cylinder Models

249

EENNGGIINNEE OOIILLFFIILLLL CCAAPP

PPOOWWEERR SSTTEEEERRIINNGGFFLLUUIIDD ((RReedd ccaapp))

BBRRAAKKEE FFLLUUIIDD((GGrraayy ccaapp))

WWAASSHHEERR FFLLUUIIDD((BBlluuee ccaapp))

CCOOOOLLAANNTTRREESSEERRVVOOIIRR

AAUUTTOOMMAATTIICCTTRRAANNSSMMIISSSSIIOONNFFLLUUIIDD DDIIPPSSTTIICCKK((YYeellllooww lloooopp))

EENNGGIINNEE OOIILL DDIIPPSSTTIICCKK((OOrraannggee lloooopp))


01/04/26 22:24:19 31S84640_252

To add oil, unscrew and remove theengine oil fill cap on top of the valvecover. Pour in the oil, and install theengine oil fill cap. Tighten it securely.Wait a few minutes and recheck theoil level. Do not fill above the uppermark; you could damage the engine.

Oil is major contributor to yourengine’s performance and longevity.Always use a premium-gradedetergent oil displaying the APICertification Seal. This seal indicatesthe oil is energy conserving, and thatit meets the American PetroleumInstitute’s latest requirements. It ishighly recommended that you useHonda Motor Oil in your vehicle foras long as you own it.

Adding Oil Recommended Oil

Maintenance

Engine Oil

250

EENNGGIINNEE OOIILL FFIILLLL CCAAPP

44--ccyylliinnddeerr mmooddeellss

EENNGGIINNEE OOIILL FFIILLLL CCAAPP


01/04/26 22:24:27 31S84640_253

Make sure the API Certification Sealsays ‘‘For Gasoline Engines.’’

The oil’s viscosity or weight isprovided on the container’s label.Select the oil for your vehicleaccording to this chart.

You may use a synthetic motor oil ifit meets the same requirementsgiven for a conventional motor oil: itdisplays the API Certification Seal,and it is the proper weight as shownon the chart. When using syntheticoil, you must follow the oil and filterchange intervals given in themaintenance schedule.

If 5W-20 oil is not available, a 5W-30oil may be used. However, it shouldbe replaced with 5W-20 at the nextoil change.

5W-20 oil is formulated for year-round protection of your Honda, toimprove cold weather starting, andto help your engine use less fuel.

Engine Oil

Maintenance

Synthetic Oil

251

AAPPII CCEERRTTIIFFIICCAATTIIOONN SSEEAALL

AAmmbbiieenntt TTeemmppeerraattuurree

01/04/26 22:24:38 31S84640_254

Run the engine until it reachesnormal operating temperature,then shut it off.

Changing the oil and filter requiresspecial tools and access fromunderneath the car. The car shouldbe raised on a service station-typehydraulic lift for this service. Unlessyou have the knowledge and properequipment, you should have thismaintenance done by a skilledmechanic.

Always change the oil and filteraccording to the time and distance(miles/kilometers) recommenda-tions in the maintenance schedule.The oil and filter collect contami-nants that can damage your engine ifthey are not removed regularly.

Your Honda does not need any oiladditives. Purchasing additives forthe engine or transmission will notincrease your car’s performance orlongevity. It only increases the costof operating your car.

1.

Maintenance

Engine Oil

Changing the Oil and FilterAdditives

252

01/04/26 22:24:45 31S84640_255

Open the hood and remove theengine oil fill cap. Remove the oildrain bolt and washer from thebottom of the engine. Drain the oilinto an appropriate container.

Remove the oil filter and let theremaining oil drain. A specialwrench (available from yourHonda dealer) is required toremove the filter.

Install a new oil filter according toinstructions that come with it.

Put a new washer on the drain bolt,then reinstall the drain bolt.Tighten it to:

4.

5.

3.2.

CONTINUED

Engine Oil

Maintenance 253


DDRRAAIINN BBOOLLTT


DDRRAAIINN BBOOLLTTWWAASSHHEERR OOIILL FFIILLTTEERRWWAASSHHEERR

33 lbf·ft (44 N·m , 4.5 kgf·m)

01/04/26 22:24:56 31S84640_256

Refill the engine with the recom-mended oil.Engine oil change capacity(including filter):

Let the engine run for severalminutes and check the drain boltand oil filter for leaks.

Turn off the engine, let it sit forseveral minutes, then check the oillevel. If necessary, add oil to bringthe level to the upper mark on thedipstick.

Replace the engine oil fill cap.Start the engine. The oil pressureindicator light should go out withinfive seconds. If it does not, turn offthe engine and reinspect yourwork.

9.

8.

7.

6.

(4-cylinder models)

(6-cylinder models)

Engine Oil

Maintenance254

OOIILL FFIILLTTEERR


4.6 US qt (4.4 , 3.9 Imp qt)

4.5 US qt (4.3 , 3.8 Imp qt)

Improper disposal of engine oil can beharmf ul to the environment. If youchange your own oil, please dispose ofthe used oil properly. Put it in a sealedcontainer and take it to a recyclingcenter. Do not discard it in a trash binor dump it on the ground.

01/04/26 22:25:05 31S84640_257

If the coolant level in the reservetank is at or below the MIN line, addcoolant to bring it up to the MAX line.Inspect the cooling system for leaks.This coolant should always be amixture of 50 percent antifreeze and50 percent water. Never add straightantifreeze or plain water.

Always use Honda All SeasonAntifreeze/Coolant Type 2. Thiscoolant is pre-mixed with 50 percentantifreeze and 50 percent water. Itdoes not require any additionalmixing. If it is not available, you mayuse another major-brand non-silicatecoolant as a temporary replacement.Make sure it is a high-quality coolantrecommended for aluminum engines.However, continued use of any non-Honda coolant can result in

corrosion, causing the coolingsystem to malfunction or fail. Havethe cooling system flushed andrefilled with Honda antifreeze/coolant as soon as possible.

If the reserve tank is completelyempty, you should also check thecoolant level in the radiator.

CONTINUED

Adding Engine Coolant

Maintenance

Cooling System

255

66--ccyylliinnddeerr mmooddeellss44--ccyylliinnddeerr mmooddeellss RREESSEERRVVEE TTAANNKK RREESSEERRVVEE TTAANNKK Removing the radiator capwhile the engine is hot cancause the coolant to spray out,seriously scalding you.

Always let the engine andradiator cool down beforeremoving the radiator cap.

01/04/26 22:25:15 31S84640_258

Remove the radiator cap bypushing down and turningcounterclockwise.

The coolant level should be up tothe base of the filler neck. Addcoolant if it is low.

Put the radiator cap back on.Tighten it fully.

Make sure the engine and radiatorare cool.

Turn the radiator cap counter-clockwise, without pressing downon it, until it stops. This relievesany pressure remaining in thecooling system.

3.

1.

2.

4.

5.

Cooling System

Maintenance256

44--ccyylliinnddeerr mmooddeellss 66--ccyylliinnddeerr mmooddeellss RRAADDIIAATTOORR CCAAPP


01/04/26 22:25:25 31S84640_259

CONTINUED

Pour coolant into the reserve tank.Fill it to halfway between the MAXand MIN marks. Put the cap backon the reserve tank.

Do not add any rust inhibitors orother additives to your car’s coolingsystem. They may not be compatiblewith the coolant or engine compo-nents.

The cooling system should becompletely drained and refilled withnew coolant according to the timeand distance recommendations inthe maintenance schedule. Only useHonda All Season Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2. Use of any non-Honda coolant or plain water canresult in corrosion and deposits inthe cooling system.

Draining the coolant requires accessto the underside of the car. Unlessyou have the tools and knowledge,you should have this maintenancedone by a skilled mechanic.

6.

Replacing Engine Coolant

Cooling System

Maintenance 257

44--ccyylliinnddeerr mmooddeellss RREESSEERRVVEE TTAANNKK 66--ccyylliinnddeerr mmooddeellss RREESSEERRVVEE TTAANNKK

01/04/26 22:25:35 31S84640_260

Loosen the drain plug on thebottom of the radiator. Thecoolant will drain through thesplash guard. Remove the drainbolt and washer from the engineblock.

Open the hood. Make sure theengine and radiator are cool to thetouch.

Turn the ignition ON (II). Turnthe temperature control dial to90°F (32°C). Turn off the ignitionand remove the key.

Remove the radiator cap.Turn the ignition ON (II). Turnthe temperature control Dial allthe way clockwise. Turn off theignition and remove the key.

1.3.

2.

4-cylinder modelsEX V-6 model

Except EX V-6 model

Maintenance

Cooling System

258

44--ccyylliinnddeerr mmooddeellss 66--ccyylliinnddeerr mmooddeellss 44--ccyylliinnddeerr mmooddeellss

DDRRAAIINNBBOOLLTT

DDRRAAIINNPPLLUUGG

01/04/26 22:25:46 31S84640_261

Remove the reserve tank from itsholder by pulling it straight up.Drain the coolant, then put thetank back in its holder.

Loosen the drain plug on thebottom of the radiator. Thecoolant will drain through thesplash guard. Loosen the drainbolt.

When removing the reserve tank,first remove the cruise control cableand the ground cable from their clips.After installing the tank back inplace, put the cables back in theirclips.

4.3.6-cylinder models 6-cylinder models

CONTINUED

Cooling System

Maintenance 259


RREESSEERRVVEE TTAANNKK RREESSEERRVVEE TTAANNKK CCAAPP

44--ccyylliinnddeerr mmooddeellss HHOOLLDDEERR

DDRRAAIINN PPLLUUGG

DDRRAAIINN BBOOLLTT 66--ccyylliinnddeerr mmooddeellss

01/04/26 22:25:57 31S84640_262

When the coolant stops draining,tighten the drain plug at thebottom of the radiator.

Put a new washer on the drain bolt,then reinstall the drain bolt in theengine block. Tighten it securely.

Tightening torque:

Tighten the drain bolt at the rearof the engine cylinder blocksecurely.

Tightening torque:

Loosen the bleeder bolt on top ofthe engine.Pour Honda All SeasonAntifreeze/Coolant Type 2 intothe radiator. This coolant is amixture of 50 percent anti-freezeand 50 percent water. Pre-mixingis not required.Tighten the bleeder bolt whencoolant comes out in a steadystream with no bubbles.

7.

6.

5.

4-cylinder models

6-cylinder models 4-cylinder models

Cooling System

Maintenance260

FFIILLLLEERR NNEECCKK

44--ccyylliinnddeerr mmooddeellss FFiillll uupp ttoo hheerree

FFIILLLLEERR NNEECCKK

66--ccyylliinnddeerr mmooddeellss FFiillll uupp ttoo hheerree

RREESSEERRVVEE TTAANNKK CCAAPPRREESSEERRVVEE TTAANNKK

66--ccyylliinnddeerr mmooddeellss HHOOLLDDEERR

61 lbf·ft (83 N·m , 8.5 kgf·m)

7 lbf·ft (10 N·m , 1.0 kgf·m)

01/04/26 22:26:12 31S84640_263

Start the engine and hold it at1,500 rpm until the cooling fancomes on. Turn off the engine.Check the coolant level in theradiator and add coolant if needed.

Start the engine and let it run forabout 30 seconds. Then turn offthe engine.

Fill the radiator with coolant up tothe base of the filler neck.

Fill the reserve tank to the MAXmark. Install the reserve tank cap.

Install the radiator cap, andtighten it to the first stop.

Start the engine and let it run untilthe radiator cooling fan comes onat least twice. Then stop theengine.

Remove the radiator cap. Pourcoolant into the radiator up to thebase of the filler neck and into thereserve tank up to the MAX mark.

If necessary, fill the reserve tankto the MAX mark. Install thereserve tank cap.

Install the radiator cap, andtighten it fully.

Pour coolant into the radiator upto the base of the filler neck.

The cooling system capacity is:

8.

9.

10.

11.

12.

13.

14.

15.

16.

With automatic transmission:

6-cylinder models

With 5-speed manual transmission:

6-cylinder models

Cooling System

Maintenance 261

44--ccyylliinnddeerr mmooddeellss BBLLEEEEDDEERR BBOOLLTT

1.45 US gal (5.5 , 1.21 Imp gal)

1.43 US gal (5.4 , 1.19 Imp gal)

1.48 US gal (5.6 , 1.23 Imp gal)

01/04/26 22:26:27 31S84640_264

Check the level in the windshieldwasher reservoir at least monthlyduring normal usage. In bad weather,when you use the washers often,check the level every time you stopfor fuel.

The windshield washer reservoir islocated behind the headlight.

Check the reservoir’s fluid level byremoving the cap and looking at thelevel gauge attached to the cap.

The low washer level indicator willlight when the level is low (see page

).

Fill the reservoir with a good-qualitywindshield washer fluid. Thisincreases the cleaning capability andprevents freezing in cold weather.

When you refill the reservoir, cleanthe edges of the windshield wiperblades with windshield washer fluidon a clean cloth. This will help tocondition the blade edges.59

Canadian Models

Windshield Washers

Maintenance262

LLEEVVEELL GGAAUUGGEE


Do not use engine antif reeze or avinegar/water solution in thewindshield washer reservoir.

Antif reeze can damage your car’s paint,while a vinegar/water solution candamage the windshield washer pump.

Use only commercially-availablewindshield washer f luid.

01/04/26 22:26:38 31S84640_265

Remove the dipstick (yellow loop)from the transmission and wipe itwith a clean cloth.

Check the fluid level with the engineat normal operating temperature.

Insert the dipstick all the way intothe transmission securely asshown in the illustration.

Remove the dipstick and checkthe fluid level. It should bebetween the upper and lowermarks.

Park the car on level ground. Shutoff the engine.

To thoroughly flush the transmission,the technician should drain and refillit with Honda ATF-Z1 (AutomaticTransmission Fluid), then drive thevehicle a short distance. Do thisthree times. Then drain and refill thetransmission a final time.

If the level is below the lowermark, add fluid into the tube tobring it to the upper mark. Alwaysuse Honda ATF-Z1 (AutomaticTransmission Fluid). If it is notavailable, you may use aDEXRON III automatictransmission fluid as a temporaryreplacement. However, continueduse can affect shift quality. Havethe transmission flushed andrefilled with Honda ATF-Z1 assoon as it is convenient.

1.

2.

3.

5.

4.

4-cylinder models

CONTINUED


Transmission Fluid

Maintenance 263

UUPPPPEERR MMAARRKK

LLOOWWEERR MMAARRKK

DDIIPPSSTTIICCKK

01/04/26 22:26:51 31S84640_266

Insert the dipstick all the way intothe transmission securely asshown in the illustration.

Remove the dipstick and checkthe fluid level. It should bebetween the upper and lowermarks.

Check the fluid level with the engineat normal operating temperature.

Park the car on level ground. Shutoff the engine.

Remove the dipstick (yellow loop)from the transmission and wipe itwith a clean cloth.

Insert the dipstick all the way backinto the transmission securely asshown in the illustration.

The transmission should be drainedand refilled with new fluid accordingto the time and distance recommen-dations in the maintenance schedule.

1.

2.

3.

4.

6.6-cylinder models

Transmission Fluid

Maintenance


264

UUPPPPEERR MMAARRKK

DDIIPPSSTTIICCKKLLOOWWEERR MMAARRKK

01/04/26 22:27:05 31S84640_267

To thoroughly flush the transmission,the technician should drain and refillit with Honda ATF-Z1 (AutomaticTransmission Fluid), then drive thevehicle a short distance. Do thisthree times. Then drain and refill thetransmission a final time.

Insert the dipstick all the way backinto the transmission securely asshown in the illustration.


If the level is below the lowermark, add fluid into the tube tobring it to the upper mark. Alwaysuse Honda ATF-Z1 (AutomaticTransmission Fluid). If it is notavailable, you may use aDEXRON III automatictransmission fluid as a temporaryreplacement. However, continueduse can affect shift quality. Havethe transmission flushed andrefilled with Honda ATF-Z1 assoon as it is convenient.

Check the fluid level with thetransmission at normal operatingtemperature and the car sitting onlevel ground. Remove thetransmission filler bolt and carefullyfeel inside the bolt hole with yourfinger. The fluid level should be upto the edge of the bolt hole. If it isnot, add Honda Manual Transmis-sion Fluid (MTF) until it starts torun out of the hole. Reinstall thefiller bolt and tighten it securely.

5. 6.

Transmission Fluid

Maintenance


265

CCoorrrreecctt lleevveell

FFIILLLLEERRBBOOLLTT

01/04/26 22:27:15 31S84640_268

If Honda MTF is not available, youmay use an API service SG, SH or SJgrade motor oil with a viscosity ofSAE 10W-30 or 10W-40 as atemporary replacement. An SGgrade is preferred, but an SH or SJgrade may be used if SG is notavailable. However, motor oil doesnot contain the proper additives andcontinued use can cause stiffershifting. Replace as soon as it isconvenient.


Transmission Fluid

Maintenance266

01/04/26 22:27:20 31S84640_269

The fluid level should be betweenthe MIN and MAX marks on the sideof the reservoir. If the level is at orbelow the MIN mark, your brakesystem needs attention. Have thebrake system inspected for leaks orworn brake pads.

Always use Honda Heavy DutyBrake Fluid DOT 3. If it is notavailable, you should use only DOT 3or DOT 4 fluid, from a sealedcontainer, as a temporaryreplacement. However, the use ofany non-Honda brake fluid can causecorrosion and decrease the life of thesystem. Have the brake systemflushed and refilled with HondaHeavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3 assoon as possible.

Check the fluid level in the reser-voirs monthly. There are up to tworeservoirs, depending on the model.They are:

Brake fluid reservoir (all models)Clutch fluid reservoir(manual transmission only)

Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is notcompatible with your car’s brakingsystem and can cause extensivedamage.

The brake fluid should be replacedaccording to the time recommenda-tion in the maintenance schedule.

CONTINUED

Brake System

Brake and Clutch Fluid

Maintenance 267

MMAAXX

44--ccyylliinnddeerr mmooddeellss MMIINN

01/04/26 22:27:31 31S84640_270

The fluid should be between theMIN and MAX marks on the side ofthe reservoir. If it is not, add brakefluid to bring it up to that level. Usethe same fluid specified for thebrake system.

Low fluid level can indicate a leak inthe clutch system. Have this systeminspected as soon as possible.

Check the level when the engine iscold. Look at the side of thereservoir. The fluid should bebetween the UPPER LEVEL andLOWER LEVEL. If it is below theLOWER LEVEL, add power steeringfluid to the UPPER LEVEL.

Power SteeringClutch System

Brake and Clutch Fluid, Power Steering

Maintenance268

UUPPPPEERR LLEEVVEELL

LLOOWWEERR LLEEVVEELL

MMAAXX

MMIINN

MMAAXX

MMIINN 44--ccyylliinnddeerr mmooddeellss66--ccyylliinnddeerr mmooddeellss

01/04/26 22:27:40 31S84640_271

The air cleaner element should becleaned or replaced according to thetime and distance recommendationsin the maintenance schedule.

Clean the air cleaner element byblowing compressed air through it inthe opposite direction to normal airflow. If you do not have access tocompressed air (such as a servicestation), ask your Honda dealer to dothis service.

Follow the replacement procedurefor removal and reinstallation.

Always use Honda Power SteeringFluid. If it is not available, you mayuse another power steering fluid asan emergency replacement.However, continued use can causeincreased wear and poor steering incold weather. Have the powersteering system flushed and refilledwith Honda PSF as soon as possible.

A low power steering fluid level canindicate a leak in the system. Checkthe fluid level frequently and havethe system inspected as soon aspossible.

Cleaning (Severe Conditions)

Air Cleaner Element

Power Steering, Air Cleaner Element

Maintenance 269

UUPPPPEERR LLEEVVEELL

66--ccyylliinnddeerr mmooddeellss LLOOWWEERR LLEEVVEELL

Turning the steering wheel to f ull lef tor right lock and holding it there candamage the power steering pump.

01/04/26 22:27:50 31S84640_272

The air cleaner element is inside theair cleaner housing on the passenger’sside of the engine compartment.To replace it:

Unsnap the four hold-down clampsand remove the air cleanerhousing cover.

Remove the old air cleanerelement.

Carefully clean the inside of theair cleaner housing with a damprag.

Place the new air cleaner elementin the air cleaner housing.

Reinstall the air cleaner housingcover, snap the four hold-downclamps back into place.

1.

3.

4.

5.2.

Replacement

Air Cleaner Element (4-cylinder Models)

Maintenance270

AAIIRR CCLLEEAANNEERR EELLEEMMEENNTT

CCLLAAMMPPSS

01/04/26 22:28:01 31S84640_273

Place the new air cleaner elementin the air cleaner housing.

Loosen the four bolts and removethe air cleaner housing cover.

Remove the old air cleanerelement.

Reinstall the air cleaner housingcover, tighten the four bolts.

To replace it:

The air cleaner element is inside theair cleaner housing on the driver’sside of the engine compartment.

Carefully clean the inside of theair cleaner housing with a damprag.

1.

3.

4.

5.2.

Replacement

Air Cleaner Element (6-cylinder Models)

Maintenance 271

AAIIRR CCLLEEAANNEERR EELLEEMMEENNTT

BBOOLLTTSS

01/04/26 22:28:14 31S84640_274

Clean up any dirt and oil aroundthe spark plug caps.

Remove the spark plug cap bypulling it straight out.

Remove the spark plug witha five-eighths inch (16 mm) sparkplug socket.

The spark plugs in your car shouldbe replaced according to the timeand distance recommendations inthe maintenance schedule.

Clean the hood latch assembly with amild cleaner, then lubricate it with amultipurpose grease. Lubricate allthe moving parts, including the pivot.Follow the time and distancerecommendations in theMaintenance Schedule. If you arenot sure how to clean and grease thelatch, contact your Honda dealer.

1.

2.

3.

ReplacementSpark PlugsHood Latch

Hood Latch, Spark Plugs (4-cylinder Models)

Maintenance272

SSPPAARRKK PPLLUUGG CCAAPPLLAATTCCHH AASSSSEEMMBBLLYY

01/04/26 22:28:25 31S84640_275

＋－

Spark Plug Gap:

Install the spark plug cap.

Repeat this procedure for theother three spark plugs.

Torque the spark plug. (If you donot have a torque wrench, tightenthe spark plug two-thirds of a turnafter it contacts the cylinder head.)Tightening torque:

Put the new spark plug into thesocket; then screw it into the hole.Screw it in by hand so you do notcrossthread it.

5.

6.

7.

NGK:DENSO:

4.Specifications:

Spark Plugs (4-cylinder Models)

Maintenance 273

PZFR5F-11PKJ16CR-L11

0.04 in (1.1 mm)13 lbf·ft (18 N·m , 1.8 kgf·m) 00.1 mm

Tighten the spark plugs caref ully. Aspark plug that is too loose canoverheat and damage the engine.Overtightening can cause damage tothe threads in the cylinder head.

01/04/26 22:28:36 31S84640_276

The spark plugs in your car shouldbe replaced according to the timeand distance recommendations inthe maintenance schedule.

Loosen the two holding clips byturning the heads one-quarter turncounterclockwise with a flat-tippedscrewdriver. Remove the cover onthe front cylinder bank by pullingit straight up.

Disconnect the wire connectorfrom the ignition coil by pushingon the lock tab and pulling on theconnector. Pull on the plasticconnector, not the wires.

Remove the spark plug witha five-eighths inch (16 mm) sparkplug socket.

Use a wrench to remove thehexagon socket head cap boltholding the ignition coil. Removethe ignition coil by pulling itstraight out.

Clean up any dirt and oil that havecollected around the ignition coils.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

Replacement


Maintenance274

HHOOLLDDIINNGG CCLLIIPP

HHEEXXAAGGOONN SSOOCCKKEETT HHEEAADD CCAAPP BBOOLLTT

01/04/26 22:28:47 31S84640_277

＋－

Torque the spark plug. (If you donot have a torque wrench, tightenthe spark plug two-thirds of a turnafter it contacts the cylinder head.)Tightening torque:

Put the new spark plug into thesocket; then screw it into the hole.Screw it in by hand so you do notcrossthread it.

Install the ignition coil. Reinstallthe hexagon socket head cap bolt.

Push the wire connector onto theignition coil. Make sure it locks inplace.

Spark Plug Gap:

Reinstall the cover on the frontcylinder bank while putting itsmounting clip in the hole on thepassenger’s side. Secure the coverby turning the heads of the twoholding clips one-quarter turnclockwise with a flat-tippedscrewdriver.

Repeat this procedure for theother five spark plugs.

NGK:DENSO:

6.

7.

8.

9.

10.

11.

Specifications:


Maintenance 275

13 lbf·ft (18 N·m , 1.8 kgf·m)

0.04 in (1.1 mm)

PKJ16CR-L11PZFR5F-11

00.1 mm

Tighten the spark plugs caref ully. Aspark plug that is too loose canoverheat and damage the engine.Overtightening can cause damage tothe threads in the cylinder head.

01/04/26 22:29:01 31S84640_278

Check the battery condition bylooking at the test indicator windowon the battery.The label on the battery explains thetest indicator’s colors.

Check the battery terminals forcorrosion (a white or yellowishpowder). To remove it, cover theterminals with a solution of bakingsoda and water. It will bubble up andturn brown. When this stops, wash itoff with plain water. Dry off thebattery with a cloth or paper towel.Coat the terminals with grease tohelp prevent future corrosion.

Check the condition of your car’sbattery monthly. You should checkthe color of the test indicator window,and for corrosion on the terminals.

Battery

Maintenance276

TTEESSTT IINNDDIICCAATTOORR WWIINNDDOOWW


TTEESSTT IINNDDIICCAATTOORR WWIINNDDOOWW


01/04/26 22:29:08 31S84640_279

－

If you need to connect the battery toa charger, disconnect both cables toprevent damage to the car’selectrical system.

If the terminals are severely cor-roded, clean them with baking sodaand water. Then use a wrench toloosen and remove the cables fromthe terminals. Always disconnect thenegative ( ) cable first and recon-nect it last. Clean the battery termi-nals with a terminal cleaning tool orwire brush. Reconnect and tightenthe cables, then coat the terminalswith grease.

Battery posts,terminals and related accessoriescontain lead and lead compounds.

CONTINUED

Battery

Maintenance

WARNING:

Wash hands after handling.

277


01/04/26 22:29:16 31S84640_280

If your car’s battery is disconnectedor goes dead, the audio system willdisable itself. The next time you turnon the radio you will see ‘‘Code’’ inthe frequency display. Use thePreset buttons to enter the five-digitcode (see page ).183

On EX, EX V-6, SE, and U.S. ValuePackage models

Battery

Maintenance278

The battery gives off explosivehydrogen gas during normaloperation.

A spark or flame can cause thebattery to explode with enoughforce to kill or seriously hurt you.

Wear protective clothing and aface shield, or have a skilledmechanic do the batterymaintenance.

Charging the battery with the cablesconnected can seriously damage yourcar’s electronic controls. Detach thebattery cables bef ore connecting thebattery to a charger.

01/04/26 22:29:22 31S84640_281

Check the condition of the wiperblades at least every six months.Look for signs of cracking in therubber, or areas that are gettinghard. Replace the blades if you findthese signs, or they leave streaksand unwiped areas when used.

Disconnect the blade assemblyfrom the wiper arm by pushing inthe lock tab. Hold it in while youpush the blade assembly towardthe base of the arm.

Raise the wiper arm off thewindshield.

To replace the blade:

Raise the driver’s side first, thenthe passenger’s side.

2.

1.

CONTINUED

Wiper Blades

Maintenance 279

WWIIPPEERR AARRMMSS

LLOOCCKK TTAABB

01/04/26 22:29:32 31S84640_282

Remove the blade from its holderby grasping the tabbed end of theblade. Pull firmly until the tabscome out of the holder.

Examine the new wiper blades. Ifthey have no plastic or metal rein-forcement along the back edge,remove the metal reinforcementstrips from the old wiper blade andinstall them in the slots along theedge of the new blade.

Slide the new wiper blade into theholder until the tabs lock.

Lower the wiper arm down againstthe windshield.

Slide the wiper blade assemblyonto the wiper arm. Make sure itlocks in place.

Lower the passenger’s side first,then the driver’s side.

3. 4.

5.

6.

7.

Wiper Blades

Maintenance280

RREEIINNFFOORRCCEEMMEENNTT

BBLLAADDEE BBLLAADDEE

01/04/26 22:29:41 31S84640_283

Run the air conditioning at least oncea week during the cold weathermonths. Run it for at least tenminutes while you are driving at asteady speed with the engine atnormal operating temperature. Thiscirculates the lubricating oil con-tained in the refrigerant.

If the air conditioning does not get ascold as before, have your dealercheck the system. Recharge thesystem with Refrigerant HFC-134a(R-134a). (See Specifications on page

.)

Periodically check the engine’sradiator and air conditioningcondenser for leaves, insects, anddirt stuck to the front surface. Theseblock the air flow and reduce coolingefficiency. Use a light spray from ahose or a soft brush to remove them.

Your car’s air conditioning is a sealedsystem. Any major maintenance,such as recharging, should be doneby a qualified mechanic. You can doa couple of things to make sure theair conditioning works efficiently.

342

Optional for U.S. DX and Value Packagemodels

Air Conditioning System

Maintenance 281

AAIIRR CCOONNDDIITTIIOONNIINNGG CCOONNDDEENNSSEERR

Whenever you have the air conditioningsystem serviced, make sure the servicef acility uses a ref rigerant recyclingsystem. This system captures theref rigerant f or reuse. Releasingref rigerant into the atmosphere candamage the environment.

The condenser and radiator f ins bendeasily. Only use a low-pressure sprayor sof t-bristle brush to clean them.

01/04/26 22:29:50 31S84640_284

－－

－－

－－

Check the condition of the drivebelts (two on 4-cylinder models, oneon 6-cylinder models). Examine theedges of each belt for cracks orfraying. (On vehicles with A/C)

(On vehicles without A/C)Alternator belt:

Power steering belt:

The belts should have the following‘‘play’’ or deflection.

Check the tension of each belt bypushing on it with your thumbmidway between the pulleys.

The dust and pollen filter removespollen and dust that is brought infrom the outside through the heatingand cooling system.

This filter should be replaced every30,000 miles (48,000 km) undernormal conditions. It should bereplaced every 15,000 miles (24,000km) if you drive primarily in urbanareas that have high concentrationsof soot in the air from industry anddiesel-powered vehicles. Replace itmore often if air flow from theclimate control system becomes lessthan usual. Have the dust and pollenfilter replaced by your Honda dealer.

4-cylinder models

Drive BeltsDust and Pollen Filter

Maintenance

Dust and Pollen Filter, Drive Belts

282


AALLTTEERRNNAATTOORR BBEELLTT

PPOOWWEERR SSTTEEEERRIINNGGBBEELLTT

PPOOWWEERR SSTTEEEERRIINNGG BBEELLTT

0.28 0.35 in (7.0 9.0 mm)

0.41 0.49 in (10.5 12.5 mm)

0.51 0.63 in (13.0 16.0 mm)

01/04/26 22:30:04 31S84640_285

－－

－－The timing belt and balancer beltshould normally be replaced at theintervals shown in the maintenanceschedule.

In very high temperatures(over 110°F, 43°C).In very low temperatures(under 20°F, 29°C).

Power steering belt:

If you see signs of wear or looseness,have your dealer adjust or replacethe belts.

To safely operate your car, your tiresmust be the proper type and size, ingood condition with adequate tread,and correctly inflated. The followingpages give more detailed informationon how and when to check airpressure, how to inspect your tiresfor damage and wear, and what to dowhen your tires need to be replaced.

Replace these belts at 60,000 miles(U.S.) or 100,000 km (Canada) if youregularly drive your car in one ormore of these conditions:

6-cylinder models TiresTiming Belt

Drive Belts, Timing Belt, Tires

Maintenance 283

0.51 0.65 in (13.0 16.5 mm)

Using tires that are excessivelyworn or improperly inflated cancause a crash in which you canbe seriously hurt or killed.

Follow all instructions in thisowner’s manual regarding tireinflation and maintenance.

01/04/26 22:30:16 31S84640_286

We recommend that you visuallycheck your tires every day. If youthink a tire might be low, check itimmediately with a tire gauge.

Use a gauge to measure the airpressure at least once a month. Eventires that are in good condition maylose one to two psi (10 to 20 kPa, 0.1to 0.2 kgf/cm ) per month.Remember to check the spare tire atthe same time you check all theother tires.

You should get your own tirepressure gauge and use it wheneveryou check your tire pressures. Thiswill make it easier for you to tell if apressure loss is due to a tire problemand not due to a variation betweengauges.

Keeping the tires properly inflatedprovides the best combination ofhandling, tread life and ridingcomfort. Underinflated tires wearunevenly, adversely affect handlingand fuel economy, and are morelikely to fail from being overheated.Overinflated tires can make your carride more harshly, are more prone todamage from road hazards, and wearunevenly.

If you check the pressure when thetires are hot (the car has been drivenseveral miles), you will see readings4 to 6 psi (30 to 40 kPa, 0.3 to 0.4kgf/cm ) higher than the coldreading. This is normal. Do not letair out to match the specified coldpressure. The tire will beunderinflated.

Check the pressure in the tires whenthey are cold. This means the carhas been parked for at least threehours. If you have to drive the carbefore checking the tire pressure,the tires can still be considered‘‘cold’’ if you drive less than 1 mile(1.6 km).

Inflation

Tires

Maintenance284

01/04/26 22:30:24 31S84640_287

Tubeless tires have some ability toself-seal if they are punctured.However, because leakage is oftenvery slow, you should look closelyfor punctures if a tire starts losingpressure.

The following chart shows therecommended cold tire pressures formost normal driving conditions andspeeds. Tire pressures for highspeed driving are the same as fornormal driving.

These pressures are also given onthe tire information label on thedriver’s doorjamb.

The compact spare tire pressure is:

U.S. DX, and Value Package

U.S. : LX V-6, EX V-6Canada : EX V-6, SE V-6

U.S. : LX, EX, and SECanada : LX 4-cylinder, SE 4-cylinder

and EX-L

Tire Size Cold Tire Pressurefor Normal Driving



Recommended Tire Pressures forNormal Driving

Tires

Maintenance 285

P195/70R14 90S 29 psi (200 kPa ,2.0 kgf/cm )

P195/65R15 89H 30 psi (210 kPa ,2.1 kgf/cm )

P205/65R15 92V 30 psi (210 kPa ,2.1 kgf/cm )

60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

01/04/26 22:30:38 31S84640_288

Every time you check inflation, youshould also examine the tires fordamage, foreign objects, and wear.

You should look for:

Bumps or bulges in the tread orside of the tire. Replace the tire ifyou find either of these conditions.

Cuts, splits, or cracks in the sideof the tire. Replace the tire if youcan see fabric or cord.

Excessive tread wear.

In addition to proper inflation,correct wheel alignment helps todecrease tire wear. If you find a tireis worn unevenly, have your dealercheck the wheel alignment.

The tires were properly balanced bythe factory. They may need to berebalanced at some time before theyare worn out. Have your dealercheck the tires if you feel a consis-tent vibration while driving. A tireshould always be rebalanced if it isremoved from the wheel for repair.

Your car’s tires have wear indicatorsmolded into the tread. When thetread wears down to that point, youwill see a 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) wideband running across the tread. Thisshows there is less than 1/16 inch(1.6 mm) of tread left on the tire. Atire that is this worn gives very littletraction on wet roads. You shouldreplace the tire if you can see thetread wear indicator in three or moreplaces around the tire.

Inspection Maintenance

Tires

Maintenance286

IINNDDIICCAATTOORR LLOOCCAATTIIOONN MMAARRKKSS

TTRREEAADD WWEEAARR IINNDDIICCAATTOORRSS

01/04/26 22:30:57 31S84640_289

When shopping for replacementtires, you may find that some tiresare ‘‘directional.’’ This means theyare designed to rotate only in onedirection. If you use directional tires,

they should be rotated only front-to-back.

To help increase tire life anddistribute wear more evenly, youshould have the tires rotated every7,500 miles (12,000 km). Move thetires to the positions shown in thechart each time they are rotated.

Make sure the installer balances thewheels when you have new tiresinstalled. This increases ridingcomfort and tire life. Your car’soriginal tires were dynamic or ‘‘spin’’balanced at the factory. For bestresults, have the installer perform adynamic balance.

The tires that came with your carwere selected to match the perform-ance capabilities of the car whileproviding the best combination ofhandling, ride comfort, and long life.You should replace them with radialtires of the same size, load range,speed rating, and maximum cold tirepressure rating (as shown on thetire’s sidewall). Mixing radial andbias-ply tires on your car can reduceits braking ability, traction, andsteering accuracy.

(U.S. LX with ABS, SE, EX, EX V-6)

CONTINUED

Tire Rotation

Replacing Tires and Wheels

Tires

Maintenance 287

FFrroonntt FFrroonntt

((FFoorr NNoonn--ddiirreeccttiioonnaallTTiirreess aanndd WWhheeeellss))

((FFoorr DDiirreeccttiioonnaallTTiirreess aanndd WWhheeeellss))Improper wheel weights can damage

your car’s aluminum wheels. Use onlyGenuine Honda wheel weights f orbalancing.

01/04/26 22:31:08 31S84640_290

It is best to replace all four tires atthe same time. If that is not possibleor necessary, then replace the twofront tires or the two rear tires as apair. Replacing just one tire canseriously affect your car’s handling.

The ABS works by comparing thespeed of the wheels. When replacingtires, use the same size originallysupplied with the car. Tire size andconstruction can affect wheel speedand may cause the system to work

inconsistently.

If you ever need to replace a wheel,make sure the wheel’s specificationsmatch those of the original wheelthat came on your car. Replacementwheels are available at your Hondadealer.

Wheel:

Tire:

See page for information aboutDOT Tire Quality Grading.

345

U.S. : DX and Value Package

U.S. : LX, EX, and SECanada : LX 4-cylinder, SE 4-cylinder,

and EX-L


U.S. : DX and Value Package

U.S. : LX, EX and SECanada : LX 4-cylinder, SE 4-cylinder,

and EX-L


Tires

Maintenance

Wheels and Tires

288

14 x 5 1/2 JJ

15 x 6 JJ

15 x 6 1/2 JJ

P195/65R15 89H

P195/70R14 90S

P205/65R15 92V

Installing improper tires on yourcar can affect handling andstability. This can cause a crashin which you can be seriouslyhurt or killed.

Always use the size and type oftires recommended in thisowner’s manual.

01/04/26 22:31:19 31S84640_291

＋When installing chains, follow themanufacturer’s instructions andmount them as tightly as you can.Drive slowly with chains installed. Ifyou hear the chains contacting thebody or chassis, stop and investigate.Make sure the chains are installedtightly, and that they are notcontacting the brake lines orsuspension. Remove the chains assoon as you begin driving on clearedroads.

Tires that are marked ‘‘M S’’ or‘‘All Season’’ on the sidewall have anall-weather tread design. Theyshould be suitable for most winterdriving conditions. Tires withoutthese markings are designed foroptimum traction in dry conditions.They may not provide adequateperformance in winter driving.For the best performance in snowyor icy conditions, you should installsnow tires or tire chains. They maybe required by local laws undercertain conditions.

If metal chains are used, they mustbe SAE class ‘‘S’’. Cable-type tractiondevices can also be used.

Use only SAE class ‘‘S’’ cable-typetraction devices.

Mount snow chains on your vehiclewhen warranted by driving condi-tions or required by local laws. Makesure the chains are the correct sizefor your tires. Install them only onthe front tires.

If you mount snow tires on yourHonda, make sure they are radialtires of the same size and load rangeas the original tires. Mount snowtires on all four wheels to balanceyour car’s handling in all weatherconditions. Keep in mind the tractionprovided by snow tires on dry roadsmay not be as high as your car’s

original equipment tires. You shoulddrive cautiously even when the roadsare clear. Check with the tire dealerfor maximum speed recommenda-tions.

4-cylinder models

6-cylinder models

Winter Driving

Snow Tires

Tire Chains

Tires

Maintenance 289

Chains of the wrong size or that areimproperly installed can damage yourcar’s brake lines, suspension, body, andwheels. Stop driving if you hear thechains hitting any part of the car.

01/04/26 22:31:34 31S84640_292

Check the operation of your car’sexterior lights at least once a month.A burned out bulb can create anunsafe condition by reducing yourcar’s visibility and the ability tosignal your intentions to otherdrivers.

Lights

Maintenance290

HHEEAADDLLIIGGHHTT TTUURRNN SSIIGGNNAALL//SSIIDDEE MMAARRKKEERR LLIIGGHHTT

PPAARRKKIINNGG LLIIGGHHTT

01/04/26 22:31:39 31S84640_293

Check the following:

Headlights (low and high beam)Parking lightsTaillightsBrake lightsHigh-mount brake lightTurn signalsBack-up lightsHazard light functionLicense plate lightSide marker lightsDaytime running lights(Canadian models)

If you find any bulbs are burned out,replace them as soon as possible.Refer to the chart on page todetermine what type of replacementbulb is needed.

343

Lights

Maintenance 291

SSTTOOPP//TTAAIILLLLIIGGHHTT TTUURRNN SSIIGGNNAALL LLIIGGHHTT

HHIIGGHH--MMOOUUNNTT BBRRAAKKEE LLIIGGHHTT

TTAAIILLLLIIGGHHTT

BBAACCKK--UUPP LLIIGGHHTT

01/04/26 22:31:45 31S84640_294

Open the hood.Turn on the headlights to test thenew bulb.

Push the electrical connector backonto the bulb. Make sure it is onall the way.

Remove the bulb by turning itapproximately one-quarter turncounterclockwise.

Insert the new bulb into the holeand turn it one-quarter turn clock-wise to lock it in place.

If you need to change a bulb onthe passenger’s side (on thedriver’s side on 6-cylinder models),remove the radiator reserve tank.

Remove the electrical connectorfrom the bulb by squeezing theconnector to unlock the tab, thenslide the connector off the bulb.

Reinstall the radiator reserve tank.

The headlights were properly aimedwhen your car was new. If youregularly carry heavy items in thetrunk, readjustment may be required.Adjustment of the headlights shouldbe performed by a Honda technicianor other qualified mechanic.

Your car has two bulbs on each side,four in total. Make sure you arereplacing the bulb that is burned out.Your car uses halogen headlightbulbs. When replacing a bulb, handleit by its plastic case and protect theglass from contact with your skin orhard objects. If you touch the glass,clean it with denatured alcohol and aclean cloth.

1.

2.

3.

4.

7.

6.

5.

(Passenger’s side on 4-cylindermodels, driver’s side on 6-cylindermodels)

Lights

Maintenance

Headlight Aiming

Replacing a Headlight Bulb

292

BBUULLBB

TTAABB

Halogen headlight bulbs get very hotwhen lit. Oil, perspiration, or a scratchon the glass can cause the bulb tooverheat and shatter.

01/04/26 22:32:00 31S84640_295

Test the lights to make sure thenew bulb is working.

Insert the socket back into theheadlight assembly. Turn itclockwise to lock it in place.

Install the new bulb in the socket.Turn it clockwise to lock it in place.

Remove the burned out bulb fromthe socket by pushing it in andturning the bulb counterclockwiseuntil it unlocks.

Remove the socket from theheadlight assembly by turning itone-quarter turn counterclockwise.

If you are changing the bulb onthe driver’s side, start the engine,turn the steering wheel all the wayto the right, and turn off theengine. If you are changing thebulb on the passenger’s side, turnthe steering wheel to the left.

Use a flat-tipped screwdriver toremove the holding clip from theinner fender.

Pull the inner fender cover awayfrom the fender and bumper.

Put the inner fender cover in place.Install the holding clip. Lock it inplace by pushing on the center.

1.

3.

2.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

Replacing Front Turn Signal andSide Marker Light Bulbs

Lights

Maintenance 293

HHOOLLDDIINNGG CCLLIIPP

01/04/26 22:32:14 31S84640_296

The parking light bulb is under theheadlight bulb.

Turn the bulb holder one-quarterturn counterclockwise to remove itfrom the lens.

Pull the bulb straight out of itssocket.Push the new bulb straight intothe socket until it bottoms.

Put the bulb holder back into itshole in the lens, and turn itclockwise until it locks.

Turn on the parking lights tomake sure the new bulb works.

1.

3.

2.

4.

Replacing a Parking Light Bulb

Lights

Maintenance294

01/04/26 22:32:24 31S84640_297

Open the trunk.Put the fastener in the hole on theside of the trunk lining and pushon the center until it locks (thecenter is flush with the head).

Reinstall the trunk lining. Makesure it is installed under the edgeof the trunk seal.


Reinstall the socket into the lightassembly by turning it clockwiseuntil it locks.

Push the new bulb straight intothe socket until it bottoms.

Pull the bulb straight out of itssocket.

Determine which of the two bulbsis burned out: stop/taillight or turnsignal.

Remove the socket by turning itone-quarter turn counterclockwise.

Remove the fastener from the sideof the trunk lining by turning itcounterclockwise with a coin. Pullthe lining back.

1.

3.

2.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

Replacing Rear Bulbs(in Fenders)

Lights

Maintenance 295

FFAASSTTEENNEERR

01/04/26 22:32:38 31S84640_298

Open the trunk.

Install the new bulb in the socket.

Reinstall the socket into the lightassembly.


Remove the socket by turning itone-quarter turn counterclockwise.

Remove the burned out bulb fromthe socket by pulling it straight outof its socket.

Determine which of the two bulbsis burned out: taillight or back-uplight.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

Replacing Rear Bulbs(in Trunk Lid)

Lights

Maintenance296

01/04/26 22:32:50 31S84640_299

Open the trunk and remove thesocket from the light assembly byturning it one-quarter turn counter-clockwise.

Remove the burned-out bulb bypulling it straight out of the socket.

Install the new bulb and reinstallthe socket. Make sure the newbulb is working.

Remove the license light assemblyby carefully prying on the leftedge of the lens with a flat-tipscrewdriver and pulling theassembly out.

Remove the lens from the bulbholder by pulling the lens whilesqueezing the tabs on both sidesof the holder.

1.

2.

3.

1. 2.

CONTINUED

Replacing a High-mount BrakeLight Bulb

Replacing a Rear License PlateBulb

Lights

Maintenance 297

BBUULLBB

01/04/26 22:33:01 31S84640_300

Remove the bulb by pulling itstraight out of its metal tabs.

Push the new bulb into the metaltabs. Snap the lens back in place.

The ceiling light, door light andvanity mirror light come apart thesame way, but they do not use thesame type of bulb.

Remove the lens by carefullyprying on the edge of the lens witha fingernail file or a small flat-tipscrewdriver. Do not pry on theedge of the housing around thelens.

Turn on the parking lights andcheck that the new bulb isworking.

Pull the bulb straight out of itssocket. Push the new bulb in untilit bottoms in the socket.

Put the lens back on the bulbholder and push it until it latches.

Slide the left side of the lightassembly into the hole. Push onthe right side to latch theassembly into place. Door light:

Pry on the top middle of the lens.Ceiling light:

Pry on the front edge of the lensnear both sides.

Spotlight:

Pry on the front edge in front ofboth spotlights.

1.

4.

5.

2.

3.

3.

6.

Not available on U.S. DX and ValuePackage models

Not available on U.S. DX and ValuePackage models

Replacing Bulbs in the InteriorLights

Lights

Maintenance298

CCEEIILLIINNGG LLIIGGHHTT

01/04/26 22:33:15 31S84640_301




Lights

Maintenance 299

SSPPOOTTLLIIGGHHTT DDOOOORR LLIIGGHHTT SSUUNN VVIISSOORR

01/04/26 22:33:20 31S84640_302

Open the trunk. Pull down thetrunk light cover.

Remove the bulb by pulling itstraight out of its metal tabs.

Push the new bulb into the metaltabs.

Push the cover back in place.

1.

2.

3.

4.

Replacing the Trunk Light Bulb

Lights

Maintenance300

TTRRUUNNKK LLIIGGHHTT

01/04/26 22:33:28 31S84640_303

Block the rear wheels.

Fill the fuel tank.

Change the engine oil and filter(see page ).

Wash and dry the exteriorcompletely.

Clean the interior. Make sure thecarpeting, floor mats, etc. arecompletely dry.

Leave the parking brake off. Putthe transmission in Reverse(5-speed manual) or Park(automatic).

If you need to park your car for anextended period (more than onemonth), there are several things youshould do to prepare it for storage.Proper preparation helps preventdeterioration and makes it easier toget your car back on the road. Ifpossible, store your car indoors.

If the car is to be stored for alonger period, it should besupported on jackstands so thetires are off the ground.

Leave one window open slightly (ifthe car is being stored indoors).

Disconnect the battery.

Support the front wiper bladearms with a folded towel or rag sothey do not touch the windshield.

To minimize sticking, apply asilicone spray lubricant to all doorand trunk seals. Also, apply avehicle body wax to the paintedsurfaces that mate with the doorand trunk seals.

Cover the car with a ‘‘breathable’’cover, one made from a porousmaterial such as cotton.Nonporous materials, such asplastic sheeting, trap moisture,which can damage the paint.

If possible, run the engine for awhile periodically (preferably oncea month).

If you store your car for 12 monthsor longer, have your Honda dealerperform the inspections called for inthe 24 months/30,000 miles (48,000km) maintenance schedule (NormalConditions) as soon as you take itout of storage (see page ). Thereplacements called for in themaintenance schedule are notneeded unless the car has actuallyreached that time or mileage.

252

240

Storing Your Car

Maintenance 301

01/04/26 22:33:44 31S84640_304

302

01/04/26 22:33:47 31S84640_305

Regular cleaning and polishing ofyour Honda helps to keep it ‘‘new’’looking. This section gives you hintson how to clean your car andpreserve its appearance: the paint,brightwork, wheels and interior. Alsoincluded are several things you cando to help prevent corrosion.

.................................Exterior Care . 304.....................................Washing . 304

.......................................Waxing . 305....................Aluminum Wheels . 305

..........................Paint Touch-up . 305..................................Interior Care . 306...................................Carpeting . 306.................................Floor Mats . 306

.........................................Fabric . 307...........................................Vinyl . 307

.......................................Leather . 307...................................Seat Belts . 307....................................Windows . 308

..........................Air Fresheners . 308....................Corrosion Protection . 309

.................................Body Repairs . 310

Appearance Care

Appearance Care 303

01/04/26 22:33:53 31S84640_306

When you have washed and rinsedthe whole exterior, dry it with achamois or soft towel. Letting itair-dry will cause dulling and waterspots.

Fill a bucket with cool water. Mixin a mild detergent, such asdishwashing liquid or a productmade especially for car washing.

Only use the solvents and cleanersrecommended in this Owner’sManual.

Frequent washing helps preserveyour car’s beauty. Dirt and grit canscratch the paint, while tree sap andbird droppings can permanently ruinthe finish.

Wash your car in a shady area, not indirect sunlight. If the car is parked inthe sun, move it into the shade andlet the exterior cool down before youstart.

Rinse the car thoroughly with coolwater to remove loose dirt.

As you dry the car, inspect it forchips and scratches that could allowcorrosion to start. Repair them withtouch-up paint (see page ).

Wash the car using the water anddetergent solution and a soft-bristle brush, sponge, or soft cloth.Start at the top and work your waydown. Rinse frequently.

Check the body for road tar, treesap, etc. Remove these stains withtar remover or turpentine. Rinse itoff immediately so it does notharm the finish. Remember to re-wax these areas, even if the rest ofthe car does not need waxing.

305

Exterior Care

Appearance Care

Washing

304

Chemical solvents and strong cleanerscan damage the paint, metal, andplastic on your car.

01/04/26 22:34:04 31S84640_307

－

－

Always wash and dry the whole carbefore waxing it. You should waxyour car, including the metal trim,whenever water sits on the surfacein large patches. It should form intobeads or droplets after waxing.

You should use a quality liquid orpaste wax. Apply it according to theinstructions on the container. Ingeneral, there are two types ofproducts:

Waxes A wax coats the finish andprotects it from damage by exposureto sunlight, air pollution, etc. Youshould use a wax on your Hondawhen it is new.

Polishes Polishes and cleaner/waxes can restore the shine to paintthat has oxidized and lost some of itsshine. They normally contain mildabrasives and solvents that removethe top layer of the finish. You

should use a polish on your Honda ifthe finish does not have its originalshine after using a wax.

Cleaning tar, insects, etc. withremovers also takes off the wax.Remember to re-wax those areas,even if the rest of the car does notneed waxing.

Clean your Honda’s aluminum alloywheels as you do the rest of theexterior. Wash them with the samesolution, and rinse them thoroughly.

Inspect your car frequently for chipsor scratches in the paint. Repairthem right away to prevent corrosionof the metal underneath. Use thetouch-up paint only on small chipsand scratches. More extensive paintdamage should be repaired by aprofessional.

Your dealer has touch-up paint tomatch your car’s color. The colorcode is printed on a sticker on thedriver’s doorjamb. Take this code toyour dealer so you are sure to getthe correct color.

The wheels have a protective clear-coat that keeps the aluminum fromcorroding and tarnishing. Usingharsh chemicals, including somecommercial wheel cleaners, or stiffbrushes can damage this clear-coat.Only use a mild detergent and soft

brush or sponge to clean the wheels.

On U.S. LX with ABS, EX, SE, andEX V-6 and Canada SE, LX V-6, EX-Land EX V-6 models

Exterior Care

Appearance Care

Waxing

Aluminum Wheels

Paint Touch-up

305

01/04/26 22:34:17 31S84640_308

Vacuum the carpeting frequently toremove dirt. Ground-in dirt will makethe carpet wear out faster.Periodically shampoo the carpet tokeep it looking new. Use one of thefoam-type carpet cleaners on themarket. Follow the instructions thatcome with the cleaner, applying itwith a sponge or soft brush. Keepthe carpeting as dry as possible bynot adding water to the foam.

If you replace it, use a genuineHonda floor mat that is designed tobe used with the floor mat anchor inyour car.

If you use a non-Honda floor mat inthe driver’s footwell, make sure itfits properly and that it can be usedwith the floor mat anchor.

Do not put additional floor mats ontop of the anchored mat, otherwisethe additional mats may slideforward and interfere with the pedals.

The Genuine Honda driver’s floormat that came with your car wasdesigned to be hooked over the floormat anchor. This keeps the floor matfrom sliding forward and possiblyinterfering with the pedals.

If you remove the floor mat, makesure to re-anchor it when you put itback in your car.

On all U.S. EX models, Value Package,SE, and LX V-6 models

Carpeting Floor Mats

Interior Care

Appearance Care306

01/04/26 22:34:27 31S84640_309

Vacuum dirt and dust out of thematerial frequently. For generalcleaning, use a solution of mild soapand lukewarm water, letting it air dry.To clean off stubborn spots, use acommercially-available fabric cleaner.Test it on a hidden area of the fabricfirst, to make sure it does not bleachor stain the fabric. Follow theinstructions that come with thecleaner.

Remove dirt and dust with a vacuumcleaner. Wipe the vinyl with a softcloth dampened in a solution of mildsoap and water. Use the samesolution with a soft-bristle brush onmore difficult spots. You can also usecommercially-available spray orfoam-type vinyl cleaners.

Vacuum dirt and dust from theleather frequently. Pay particularattention to the pleats and seams.Clean the leather with a soft clothdampened with clear water, thenbuff it with a clean, dry cloth. Iffurther cleaning is needed, use asoap specifically for leather, such assaddle soap. Apply this soap with adamp, soft cloth. Wipe down andbuff as described above.

If your seat belts get dirty, you canuse a soft brush with a mixture ofmild soap and warm water to cleanthem. Do not use bleach, dye, orcleaning solvents. They can weakenthe belt material. Let the belts air-dry before you use the car.

CONTINUED

On EX with leather and EX V-6 modelsFabric

Vinyl

Leather Seat Belts


Interior Care

307

LLOOOOPP

01/04/26 22:34:38 31S84640_310

Dirt build-up in the loops of the seatbelt anchors can cause the belts toretract slowly. Wipe the insides ofthe loops with a clean clothdampened in mild soap and warmwater or isopropyl alcohol.

Clean the windows, inside and out,with a commercially-available glasscleaner. You can also use a mixtureof one part white vinegar to ten partswater. This will remove the haze thatbuilds up on the inside of thewindows. Use a soft cloth or papertowels to clean all glass and clearplastic surfaces.

If you want to use an air freshener/deodorizer in the interior of your car,it is best to use a solid type. Someliquid air fresheners contain chemi-cals that may cause parts of theinterior trim and fabric to crack ordiscolor.

If you use a liquid air freshener,make sure you fasten it securely so itdoes not spill as you drive.

Interior Care

Appearance Care

Windows Air Fresheners

308

The rear window def ogger andantenna wires are bonded to the insideof the glass. Wiping vigorously up-and-down can dislodge and break thesewires. When cleaning the rear window,use gentle pressure and wipe side-to-side.

01/04/26 22:34:46 31S84640_311

Repair chips and scratches in thepaint as soon as you discover them.

Inspect and clean out the drainholes in the bottom of the doorsand body.

Check the floor coverings fordampness. Carpeting and floormats may remain damp for a longtime, especially in winter. Thisdampness can eventually causethe floor panels to corrode.

Two factors normally contribute tocausing corrosion in your car:

Moisture trapped in body cavities.Dirt and road salt that collects inhollows on the underside of thecar stays damp, promotingcorrosion in that area.

Removal of paint and protectivecoatings from the exterior andunderside of the car.

Many corrosion-preventive measuresare built into your Honda. You canhelp keep your car from corrodingby performing some simple periodicmaintenance:

Use a high-pressure spray to cleanthe underside of your car. This isespecially important in areas thatuse road salt in winter. It is also agood idea in humid climates andareas subject to salt air. Carsequipped with ABS have a sensorand wiring at each wheel. Becareful not to damage them.

Have the corrosion-preventivecoatings on the underside of yourcar inspected and repairedperiodically.

1.

2.

Appearance Care

Corrosion Protection

309

01/04/26 22:34:56 31S84640_312

Make sure the repair facility usesgenuine Honda replacement bodyparts. Some companies make sheetmetal pieces that seem to duplicatethe original Honda body parts, butare actually inferior in fit, finish, andcorrosion resistance. Once installed,they do not give the same high-quality appearance.

When reporting your collision to theinsurance company, tell them youwant genuine Honda parts used inthe repair. Although most insurersrecognize the quality of originalparts, some may try to specify thatthe repairs be done with otheravailable parts. You should investi-gate this before any repairs havebegun.

Body repairs can affect your car’sresistance to corrosion. If your carneeds repairs after a collision, payclose attention to the parts used inthe repair and the quality of thework.

Take your car to your authorizedHonda dealer for inspection after therepairs are completed. Your dealercan make sure that quality materialswere used, and that corrosion-preventive coatings were applied toall repaired and replaced parts.

Body Repairs

Appearance Care310

01/04/26 22:35:02 31S84640_313

This section covers the more-common problems that motoristsexperience with their vehicles. Itgives you information about how tosafely evaluate the problem and whatto do to correct it. If the problem hasstranded you on the side of the road,you may be able to get going again.If not, you will also find instructionson getting your car towed.

......................Compact Spare Tire . 312....................Changing a Flat Tire . 313

..........If Your Engine Won’t Start . 318Nothing Happens or theStarter Motor Operates

............................Very Slowly . 319The Starter Operates

................................Normally . 319

................................Jump Starting . 320............If Your Engine Overheats . 323

.........Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 325..........Charging System Indicator . 326

.......Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 327.......................Readiness Codes . 328

...............Brake System Indicator . 329..................Closing the Moonroof . 330

..............................................Fuses . 331..........Checking and Replacing . 332

......................Emergency Towing . 336

Taking Care of the Unexpected

Taking Care of the Unexpected 311

01/04/26 22:35:06 31S84640_314

The compact spare tire has a shortertread life than a regular tire. Replaceit when you can see the tread wearindicator bars. The replacementshould be the same size and designtire, mounted on the same wheel.The compact spare tire is notdesigned to be mounted on a regularwheel, and the compact wheel is notdesigned for mounting a regular tire.

Check the inflation pressure of thecompact spare tire every time youcheck the other tires. It should beinflated to:

Your car has a compact spare tirethat takes up less space. Use thisspare tire as a temporary replace-ment only. Get your regular tirerepaired or replaced and put it backon your car as soon as you can.

Follow these precautions wheneveryou are using the compact spare tire:

Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h)under any circumstances.

This tire gives a harsher ride andless traction on some road sur-faces than the regular tire. Usegreater caution while driving onthis tire.

Do not mount snow chains on thecompact spare.

The wheel of the compact sparetire is designed especially to fityour car. Do not use your sparetire on another vehicle unless it isthe same make and model.

Turn off the Traction ControlSystem (see page ). Drivingwith the compact spare tire mayactivate the TCS.

223

On U.S. LX V-6 and all EX V-6 models

Compact Spare Tire

Taking Care of the Unexpected312

IINNDDIICCAATTOORR LLOOCCAATTIIOONN MMAARRKK

TTRREEAADD WWEEAARR IINNDDIICCAATTOORR BBAARR60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

01/04/26 22:35:23 31S84640_315

If you have a flat tire while driving,stop in a safe place to change it.Stopping in traffic or on the shoulderof a busy road is dangerous. Driveslowly along the shoulder until youget to an exit or an area to stop thatis far away from the traffic lanes.

Open the trunk. Raise the trunkfloor by lifting up on the back edge.

Unscrew the wing bolt and takethe spare tire out of its well.

The tools are in the tool box onthe right side of the trunk. Takethe tools out of the tool box.

Park the car on firm, level andnon-slippery ground away fromtraffic. Put the transmission inPark (automatic) or Reverse(manual). Apply the parking brake.

Turn on the hazard warning lightsand turn the ignition switch toLOCK (0). Have all thepassengers get out of the car whileyou change the tire.

5.

4.

3.

2.

1.

CONTINUED

Changing a Flat Tire


JJAACCKKSSPPAARREE TTIIRREE

TTOOOOLL BBOOXXTTRRUUNNKK FFLLOOOORR

The car can easily roll off thejack, seriously injuring anyoneunderneath.

Follow the directions forchanging a tire exactly, andnever get under the car when itis supported only by the jack.

01/04/26 22:35:36 31S84640_316

Turn the jack’s end bracketcounterclockwise to loosen it, thenremove the jack.

Loosen the wheel nuts (four forthe 4-cylinder models, five for theV-6 models) 1/2 turn with thewheel wrench.

The jack is behind a cover in theright fender. Remove the cover byturning the handle counterclock-wise, then pulling on the cover.

6. 7. 8.



314

JJAACCKK

WWHHEEEELL NNUUTTSS

01/04/26 22:35:44 31S84640_317

CONTINUED

Use the extension and wheelwrench as shown to raise thevehicle until the flat tire is off theground.

Remove the wheel nuts and flattire. Temporarily place the flat tireon the ground with the outsidesurface of the wheel facing up.Placing the wheel face down couldmar its finish.

Locate the jacking point nearestthe tire you need to change. It ispointed to by an arrow molded intothe underside of the body. Placethe jack under the jacking point.Turn the end bracket clockwiseuntil the top of the jack contactsthe jacking point. Make sure thejacking point tab is resting in thejack notch.

Do not attempt to forcibly pry thewheel cover off with a screwdriveror other tool. The wheel covercannot be removed without firstremoving the wheel nuts.

9. 10. 11.

U.S. DX, Value Package, and LXmodels:



JJAACCKKIINNGG PPOOIINNTT WWHHEEEELL WWRREENNCCHH

EEXXTTEENNSSIIOONN

01/04/26 22:35:55 31S84640_318

Put on the spare tire. Put thewheel nuts back on finger-tight,then tighten them in a crisscrosspattern with the wheel wrenchuntil the wheel is firmly againstthe hub. Do not try to tightenthem fully.

Before mounting the spare tire,wipe any dirt off the mountingsurface of the wheel and hub witha clean cloth. Wipe the hubcarefully, it may be hot fromdriving.

Lower the car to the ground andremove the jack.

12. 13. 14.



316

BBRRAAKKEE HHUUBB

01/04/26 22:36:03 31S84640_319

Tighten the wheel nuts securely inthe same crisscross pattern. Havethe wheel nut torque checked atthe nearest automotive servicefacility.Tighten the wheel nuts to:

Remove the center cap beforestoring the flat tire in the trunkwell.

15. 16.

CONTINUED

LX with ABS, SE, EX, EX V-6 models



66--ccyylliinnddeerr mmooddeell44--ccyylliinnddeerr mmooddeell

80 lbf·ft (108 N·m , 11 kgf·m)

01/04/26 22:36:12 31S84640_320

Store the wheel cover or centercap in the trunk. Make sure it doesnot get scratched or damaged.

Store the jack in its holder. Turnthe jack’s end bracket to lock it inplace. Replace the cover. Store thetools.

Place the flat tire face down in thespare tire well.

Remove the spacer cone from thewing bolt, turn it over, and put itback on the bolt.

Secure the flat tire by screwingthe wing bolt back into its hole.

Diagnosing why your engine won’tstart falls into two areas, dependingon what you hear when you turn thekey to START (III):

You hear nothing, or almostnothing. The engine’s startermotor does not operate at all, oroperates very slowly.

You can hear the starter motoroperating normally, or the startermotor sounds like it is spinningfaster than normal, but the enginedoes not start up and run.

17.

18.

19.

20.

21.


Changing a Flat Tire, If Your Engine Won’t Start

If Your Engine Won’t Start

318

WWIINNGG BBOOLLTT SSPPAACCEERRCCOONNEE

Loose items can fly around theinterior in a crash and couldseriously injure the occupants.

Store the wheel, jack, and toolssecurely before driving.

01/04/26 22:36:25 31S84640_321

When you turn the ignition switch toSTART (III), you do not hear thenormal noise of the engine trying tostart. You may hear a clicking soundor series of clicks, or nothing at all.Check these things:

Check the transmission interlock.If you have a manual transmission,the clutch pedal must be pushedall the way to the floor or thestarter will not operate. With anautomatic transmission, it must bein Park or Neutral.

Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).Turn on the headlights and checktheir brightness. If the headlightsare very dim or don’t light at all,the battery is discharged. See

on page .

If the headlights dim noticeably orgo out when you try to start theengine, either the battery is dis-charged or the connections arecorroded. Check the condition ofthe battery and terminal connec-tions (see page ). You canthen try jump starting the car froma booster battery (see page ).

Turn the ignition switch to START(III). If the headlights do not dim,check the condition of the fuses. Ifthe fuses are OK, there is proba-bly something wrong with theelectrical circuit for the ignitionswitch or starter motor. You willneed a qualified technician todetermine the problem. (See

on page .)

In this case, the starter motor’sspeed sounds normal, or even fasterthan normal, when you turn theignition switch to START (III), butthe engine does not run.

Are you using the proper startingprocedure? Refer to

on page .

Your car has the ImmobilizerSystem. You should use aproperly-coded master or valet keyto start the engine (see page ).A key that is not properly codedwill cause the immobilizer systemindicator in the dash panel to blinkrapidly.

71

209

320

336

276

320

If Your Engine Won’t Start


Nothing Happens or the StarterMotor Operates Very Slowly

Jump Starting

Emergency Towing

The Starter Operates Normally

Starting theEngine

319

01/04/26 22:36:37 31S84640_322

Turn off all the electrical acces-sories: climate control, stereosystem, lights, etc.Put the transmission in Neutral orPark, and set the parking brake.

Open the hood and check thephysical condition of the battery(see page ). In very coldweather, check the condition ofthe electrolyte. If it seems slushyor like ice, do not try jump startinguntil it thaws.

If your car’s battery has run down,you may be able to start the engineby using a booster battery. Althoughthis seems like a simple procedure,you should take several precautions.

You cannot start a Honda with anautomatic transmission by pushingor pulling it.

To jump start your car, follow thesedirections closely:

Do you have fuel? Turn theignition switch to ON (II) for aminute and watch the fuel gauge.The low fuel level warning lightmay not be working, so you werenot reminded to fill the tank.

There may be an electricalproblem, such as no power to thefuel pump. Check all the fuses(see page ).

If you find nothing wrong, you willneed a qualified technician to findthe problem. See

on page .

1.

2.

276

336

331

Jump Starting

EmergencyTowing

If Your Engine Won’t Start, Jump Starting


A battery can explode if you donot follow the correct procedure,seriously injuring anyonenearby.

Keep all sparks, open flames,and smoking materials awayfrom the battery.

If a battery sits in extreme cold, theelectrolyte inside can f reeze.Attempting to jump start with a f rozenbattery can cause it to rupture.

01/04/26 22:36:50 31S84640_323

－＋

＋

Connect the second jumper cableto the negative ( ) terminal onthe booster battery. Connect theother end to the grounding strapas shown. Do not connect thisjumper cable to any other part ofthe engine.

If the booster battery is in anothervehicle, have an assistant startthat vehicle and run it at a fast idle.

Connect one jumper cable to thepositive ( ) terminal on yourHonda’s battery. Connect theother end to the positive ( )terminal on the booster battery.

5.

3. 4.

CONTINUED

Jump Starting


44--ccyylliinnddeerr mmooddeellss 66--ccyylliinnddeerr mmooddeellss 44--ccyylliinnddeerr mmooddeellss

01/04/26 22:36:59 31S84640_324

Once your car is running, discon-nect the negative cable from yourcar, then from the booster battery.Disconnect the positive cable fromyour car, then the booster battery.

Keep the ends of the jumpercables away from each other andany metal on the car until all aredisconnected. Otherwise, you maycause an electrical short.

Start your car. If the starter motorstill operates slowly, check thejumper cable connections to makesure they have good metal-to-metal contact.

The numbers in the illustrationsshow you the order to connect thejumper cables.

7.

6.

Jump Starting


66--ccyylliinnddeerr mmooddeellss 44--ccyylliinnddeerr mmooddeellssBBOOOOSSTTEERRBBAATTTTEERRYY

BBOOOOSSTTEERRBBAATTTTEERRYY66--ccyylliinnddeerr mmooddeellss

01/04/26 22:37:11 31S84640_325

If you see steam and/or spraycoming from under the hood, turnoff the engine.

If you do not see steam or spray,leave the engine running andwatch the temperature gauge. Ifthe high heat is due to overloading(climbing a long, steep hill on ahot day with the A/C running, forexample), the engine should startto cool down almost immediately.If it does, wait until the tempera-ture gauge comes down to the mid-point then continue driving.

Safely pull to the side of the road.Put the transmission in Neutral orPark, and set the parking brake.Turn off the heating and coolingsystem and all other accessories.Turn on the hazard warningindicators.

The pointer of your car’s tempera-ture gauge should stay in the mid-range under most conditions. It maygo higher if you are driving up a longsteep hill on a very hot day. If itclimbs to the red mark, you shoulddetermine the reason.

Your car can overheat for severalreasons, such as lack of coolant or amechanical problem. The onlyindication may be the temperaturegauge climbing to or above the redmark. Or you may see steam orspray coming from under the hood.In either case, you should takeimmediate action.

1.

2.

3.

CONTINUED

If Your Engine Overheats


Steam and spray from anoverheated engine canseriously scald you.

Do not open the hood if steamis coming out.

Driving with the temperature gaugepointer at the red mark can causeserious damage to your engine.

01/04/26 22:37:21 31S84640_326

If the temperature gauge stays atthe red mark, turn off the engine.

Wait until you see no more signsof steam or spray, then open thehood.

If there was no coolant in thereserve tank, you may also have toadd coolant to the radiator. Let theengine cool down until the pointer

reaches the middle of the tempera-ture gauge, or lower, before check-ing the radiator.

Using gloves or a large heavycloth, turn the radiator capcounterclockwise, without pushingdown, to the first stop. Thisreleases any remaining pressure inthe cooling system. After thepressure releases, push down onthe cap and turn it until it comesoff.

If you don’t find an obvious leak,check the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank (see page

). If the level is below theMIN mark, add coolant to halfwaybetween the MIN and MAX marks.

Start the engine and set thetemperature control dial tomaximum (climate control toFULL AUTO at 90°F/32°C). Addcoolant to the radiator up to thebase of the filler neck. If you donot have the proper coolantmixture available, you can addplain water. Remember to havethe cooling system drained andrefilled with the proper mixture assoon as you can.

If the temperature stays normal,check the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank. If it hasgone down, add coolant to theMAX mark. Put the cap back ontightly.

Look for any obvious coolant leaks,such as a split radiator hose.Everything is still extremely hot,so use caution. If you find a leak, itmust be repaired before youcontinue driving (see

on page ). Put the radiator cap back ontightly. Run the engine and watchthe temperature gauge. If it goesback to the red mark, the engineneeds repair. (See

on page .)

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

11.

12.

10.

336

200 336


If Your Engine Overheats

EmergencyTowing

EmergencyTowing

324

Removing the radiator capwhile the engine is hot cancause the coolant to spray out,seriously scalding you.

Always let the engine andradiator cool down beforeremoving the radiator cap.

01/04/26 22:37:35 31S84640_327

This indicator should light when theignition switch is ON (II), and go outafter the engine starts. It shouldnever come on when the engine isrunning. If it starts flashing, itindicates that the oil pressuredropped very low for a moment, thenrecovered. If the indicator stays onwith the engine running, it showsthat the engine has lost oil pressureand serious engine damage ispossible. In either case, you shouldtake immediate action.

Safely pull off the road and shutoff the engine. Turn on the hazardwarning indicators.

If necessary, add oil to bring thelevel back to the full mark on thedipstick (see page ).

Let the car sit for a minute. Openthe hood and check the oil level(see page ). Although oil leveland oil pressure are not directlyconnected, an engine that is verylow on oil can lose pressure duringcornering and other drivingmaneuvers.

Start the engine and watch the oilpressure indicator. If the lightdoes not go out within ten seconds,turn off the engine. There is amechanical problem that needs tobe repaired before you cancontinue driving. (See

on page .)1.

2.

3.

4.

198

250

336

Low Oil Pressure Indicator


EmergencyTowing

325

LLOOWW OOIILL PPRREESSSSUURREE IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

Running the engine with low oilpressure can cause serious mechanicaldamage almost immediately. Turn of fthe engine as soon as you can saf ely getthe car stopped.

01/04/26 22:37:45 31S84640_328

By eliminating as much of theelectrical load as possible, you candrive several miles (kilometers)before the battery is too dischargedto keep the engine running. Drive toa service station or garage whereyou can get technical assistance.

Immediately turn off all electricalaccessories: radio, heater, A/C, reardefogger, cruise control, etc. Try notto use other electrically-operatedcontrols such as the power windows.Keep the engine running and takeextra care not to stall it. Starting theengine will discharge the batteryrapidly.

This indicator should come on whenthe ignition switch is ON (II), and goout after the engine starts. If itcomes on brightly when the engineis running, it indicates that thecharging system has stoppedcharging the battery.


Charging System Indicator

326

CCHHAARRGGIINNGG SSYYSSTTEEMM IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

01/04/26 22:37:52 31S84640_329

If the indicator remains on past threedriving trips, or the fuel cap was notloose or missing, have the carchecked by the dealer as soon aspossible. Drive moderately until thedealer has inspected the problem.Avoid full-throttle acceleration anddriving at high speed.

You should also have the dealerinspect your car if this indicatorcomes on repeatedly, even though itmay turn off as you continue driving.

This indicator comes on for a fewseconds when you turn the ignitionswitch ON (II). If it comes on at anyother time, it indicates one of theengine’s emissions control systemsmay have a problem. Even thoughyou may feel no difference in yourcar’s performance, it can reduceyour fuel economy and cause yourcar to put out excessive emissions.Continued operation may causeserious damage.

This indicator should light when theignition switch is ON (II), and go outafter the engine starts. If it comes onat any other time, it indicates one ofthe engine’s emissions controlsystems may have a problem. Eventhough you may feel no difference inyour car’s performance, it canreduce your fuel economy and causeyour car to put out excessiveemissions. Continued operation maycause serious damage.

If you have recently refueled yourcar, the cause of this indicatorcoming on could be a loose ormissing fuel fill cap. Check the capand tighten it until it clicks severaltimes. Replace the fuel fill cap if it ismissing. Tightening the cap will notmake the indicator turn offimmediately; it takes at least threedriving trips.

On V6 and 4-cylinder ULEV

On 4-cylinder LEV

Malfunction Indicator Lamp


MMAALLFFUUNNCCTTIIOONN IINNDDIICCAATTOORR LLAAMMPP

If you keep driving with themalf unction indicator lamp on, you candamage your car’s emissions controlsand engine. Those repairs may not becovered by your car’s warranties.

01/04/26 22:38:02 31S84640_330

Your car has certain ‘‘readinesscodes’’ that are part of the on-boarddiagnostics for the emissionssystems. In some states, part of theemissions testing is to make surethese codes are set. If they are notset, the test cannot be completed.

If your car’s battery has beendisconnected or gone dead, thesecodes are erased. It takes severaldays of driving under variousconditions to set the codes again.

If possible, do not take your car for astate emissions test until thereadiness codes are set. To check ifthey are set, turn the ignition ON (II),but do not start the engine. TheMalfunction Indicator Lamp willcome on for 20 seconds. If it thengoes off, the readiness codes are set.If it blinks 5 times, the readinesscodes are not set. See StateEmissions Testing on pages and

.352

353

4-cylinder ULEV, V6

Malfunction Indicator Lamp


Readiness Codes

328

01/04/26 22:38:08 31S84640_331

＊＊

＊＊ If it comes on at any other time, itindicates a problem with the car’sbrake system. In most cases, theproblem is a low fluid level in thebrake fluid reservoir. Press lightly onthe brake pedal to see if it feelsnormal. If it does, check the brakefluid level the next time you stop at aservice station (see page ). If thefluid level is low, take the car to yourdealer and have the brake systeminspected for leaks or worn brakepads.

However, if the brake pedal does notfeel normal, you should takeimmediate action. Because of thebrake system’s dual-circuit design, aproblem in one part of the systemwill still give you braking at twowheels. You will feel the brake pedalgo down much farther before the carbegins to slow down, and you willhave to press harder on the pedal.The distance needed to stop will bemuch longer.

Slow down by shifting to a lowergear, and pull to the side of the roadwhen it is safe. Because of thelonger distance needed to stop, it ishazardous to drive the car. Youshould have it towed, and repaired assoon as possible. (See

on page .)

If you must drive the car a shortdistance in this condition, driveslowly and cautiously.

The Brake System Indicatornormally comes on when you turnthe ignition switch ON (II). It is areminder to check the parking brake.It comes on and stays lit if you do notfully release the parking brake.

267336

EmergencyTowing

Brake System Indicator


UU..SS.. iinnddiiccaattoorr sshhoowwnn

BBRRAAKKEE SSYYSSTTEEMM IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

01/04/26 22:38:17 31S84640_332

Use a screwdriver or coin toremove the round plug in thecenter of the headliner.

Remove the wrench. Replace theround plug.

If the electric motor will not closethe moonroof, do the following:

Check the fuse for the moonroofmotor (see page ). If the fuseis blown, replace it with one of thesame or lower rating.

Try closing the moonroof. If thenew fuse blows immediately or themoonroof motor still does notoperate, you can close themoonroof manually.

Insert the moonroof wrench intothe socket behind this plug. Turnthe wrench until the moonroof isfully closed.

Get the moonroof wrench out ofthe tool kit in the trunk.

5.

6.

4.

1.

2.

3.

331

Closing the Moonroof


SSOOCCKKEETTRROOUUNNDD PPLLUUGG

01/04/26 22:38:28 31S84640_333

The under-hood fuse box is locatedin the back of the engine compart-ment on the passenger’s side. Toopen it, push the tabs as shown.

All the electrical circuits in your carhave fuses to protect them from ashort circuit or overload. Thesefuses are located in three fuse boxes.

The interior fuse boxes are locatedon each side of the dashboard. Toopen an interior fuse box, open thecar door. Pull the cover open, thentake it out of its hinges by pulling ittoward you.

Fuses


IINNTTEERRIIOORR UUNNDDEERR--HHOOOODD TTAABB

01/04/26 22:38:36 31S84640_334

Turn the ignition switch to LOCK(0). Make sure the headlights andall other accessories are off.

Remove the cover from the fusebox.

Check each of the large fuses inthe under-hood fuse box bylooking through the top at the wireinside. Removing these fusesrequires a Phillips-head screw-driver.

Check the smaller fuses in theunder-hood fuse box and all thefuses in the interior fuse boxes bypulling out each fuse with the fusepuller provided in the under-hoodfuse box.

If something electrical in your carstops working, the first thing youshould check for is a blown fuse.Determine from the chart on pages

and , or the diagram on thefuse box lid, which fuse or fusescontrol that component. Check thosefuses first, but check all the fusesbefore deciding that a blown fuse isnot the cause. Replace any blownfuses and check the component’soperation.

3.1.

2.

4.

334 335

Checking and Replacing Fuses

Fuses


BBLLOOWWNN

FFUUSSEE PPUULLLLEERR

01/04/26 22:38:47 31S84640_335

Look for a burned wire inside thefuse. If it is burned, replace it withone of the spare fuses of the samerating or lower.

If the replacement fuse of thesame rating blows in a short time,there is probably a seriouselectrical problem in your car.Leave the blown fuse in thatcircuit and have your car checkedby a qualified mechanic.

If you cannot drive the car withoutfixing the problem, and you do nothave a spare fuse, take a fuse of thesame rating or a lower rating fromone of the other circuits. Make sureyou can do without that circuittemporarily (such as the cigarettelighter or radio).

If you replace the blown fuse with aspare fuse that has a lower rating, itmight blow out again. This does notindicate anything wrong. Replace thefuse with one of the correct rating assoon as you can.

If the radio fuse is removed, theaudio system will disable itself. Thenext time you turn on the radio youwill see ‘‘Code’’ in the frequencydisplay. Use the Preset buttons toenter the five-digit code (see page

).

5.

6.

183 CONTINUED

On EX, EX V-6, SE, and U.S. ValuePackage models

Fuses


BBLLOOWWNN

Replacing a f use with one that has ahigher rating greatly increases thechances of damaging the electricalsystem. If you do not have a replace-ment f use with the proper rating f or thecircuit, install one with a lower rating.

01/04/26 22:38:57 31S84640_336

－

－

No. No.Amps. Amps. Circuits ProtectedCircuits Protected

123456789

1011

12131415161718192021

20 A(7.5A)20 A20 A20 A15 A30 A15 A

100 A20 A

40 A40 A

40 A20 A40 A40 A20 A20 A50 A

Back Up, ACCPower Window MotorSpare FusePower SeatBSCHeater MotorRear DefrosterHeated SeatCondenser FanIG1 Main

Left Headlight(Dimmer Relay)Right HeadlightABS F/SStopACGABS MotorHazardSpare FuseBatteryCooling Fan

Fuses


UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX

01/04/26 22:39:06 31S84640_337

＊

＊

＊

＊ On Canadian models

123456

789

10111213

15 A10 A

7.5 A7.5 A7.5 A15 A

7.5 A7.5 A7.5 A

7.5 A15 A30 A

7.5 A

IG1 Fuel PumpIG1 SRSIG2 HACR/C MirrorIG2 Day LightECU (ECM/PCM), CruiseControlIG1 Moonroof, WasherACCInstrument Panel, Back-upLightsIG1 Turn SignalsIG1 CoilIG1 WiperSTS

MoonroofDriver Power Seat ReclineAssistant Power SeatReclineDriver Power Seat SlideAssistant Power Seat SlideDaytime Running LightRear Left Power WindowFront Right Power WindowRadio, Cigarette LighterSmall LightsInterior Light, CourtesyLightsPower Door LocksClockABS Motor CheckFront Left Power WindowRear Right Power Window

On Canadian models

123

456789

1011

1213141516

30 A20 A20 A

20 A20 A10 A20 A20 A20 A10 A

7.5 A

20 A7.5 A7.5 A20 A20 A

No. Amps. Circuits Protected Circuits ProtectedNo. Amps.

Fuses


INTERIOR FUSE BOXES

:

DRIVER’S SIDE PASSENGER’S SIDE

:

01/04/26 22:39:18 31S84640_338

－

－

－

Release the parking brake.Start the engine.Shift to D , then to N.Turn off the engine.

If your car needs to be towed, call aprofessional towing service or, if youbelong to one, an organization thatprovides roadside assistance. Nevertow your car behind another vehiclewith just a rope or chain. It is verydangerous.

There are three popular types ofprofessional towing equipment.

The operatorloads your car on the back of a truck.

The towtruck uses two pivoting arms that gounder the tires (front or rear) and liftthem off the ground. The other twotires remain on the ground.

The towtruck uses metal cables with hookson the ends. These hooks go aroundparts of the frame or suspension andthe cables lift that end of the car offthe ground. Your car’s suspensionand body can be seriously damaged.

If your Honda cannot be transportedby flat-bed, it should be towed bywheel-lift equipment with the frontwheels off the ground. If due todamage, your car must be towedwith the front wheels on the ground,do the following:

Release the parking brake.Shift the transmission to Neutral.

With the front wheels on the ground,it is best to tow the car no fartherthan 50 miles (80 km), and keep thespeed below 35 mph (55 km/h).

4

Automatic Transmission:


Flat-bed Equipment

Wheel-lif t Equipment

Sling-type Equipment

This is the best way to transportyour Honda.

This isan acceptable way to tow yourHonda.

This method of towing isunacceptable.

Emergency Towing


Improper towing preparation willdamage the transmission. Follow theabove procedure exactly. If you cannotshif t the transmission or start theengine (automatic transmission), yourcar must be transported with the f rontwheels of f the ground.

01/04/26 22:39:31 31S84640_339

If you decide to tow your car with allfour wheels on the ground, makesure you use a properly-designed andattached tow bar. Prepare the car fortowing as described above, and leavethe ignition switch in Accessory (I)so the steering wheel does not lock.Make sure the radio and any itemsplugged into the accessory powersocket are turned off so they do notrun down the battery.

Emergency Towing


The steering system can be damaged ifthe steering wheel is locked. Leave theignition switch in Accessory (I), andmake sure the steering wheel turnsf reely bef ore you begin towing.

Trying to lif t or tow your car by thebumpers will cause serious damage.The bumpers are not designed tosupport the car’s weight.

01/04/26 22:39:36 31S84640_340

338

01/04/26 22:39:39 31S84640_341

The diagrams in this section giveyou the dimensions and capacities ofyour Honda, and the locations of theidentification numbers. It alsoincludes information you shouldknow about your vehicle’s tires andemissions control systems.

................Identification Numbers . 340................................Specifications . 342

..........DOT Tire Quality Grading . 345.................................Treadwear . 345

......................................Traction . 345.............................Temperature . 346

.........................Oxygenated Fuels . 347......Driving in Foreign Countries . 348

.......................Emissions Controls . 349.....................The Clean Air Act . 349

Crankcase Emissions Control....................................System . 349

Evaporative Emissions Control....................................System . 349

Onboard Refueling Vapor................................Recovery . 349

...Exhaust Emissions Controls . 350....................PGM-FI System . 350

Ignition Timing Control................................System . 350

Three Way Catalytic...........................Converter . 350

....................Replacement Parts . 350..Three Way Catalytic Converter . 351

..............State Emissions Testing . 352

Technical Information

Technical Information 339

01/04/26 22:39:45 31S84640_342

Your car has several identifyingnumbers located in various places.

The Vehicle Identification Number(VIN) is the 17-digit number yourHonda dealer uses to register yourcar for warranty purposes. It is alsonecessary for licensing and insuringyour car. The easiest place to findthe VIN is on a plate fastened to thetop of the dashboard. You can see itby looking through the windshieldon the driver’s side. It is also on theCertification label attached to thedriver’s doorjamb, and is stamped onthe engine compartment bulkhead.The VIN is also provided in bar codeon the Certification label.

Identif ication Numbers

Technical Information340

VVEEHHIICCLLEE IIDDEENNTTIIFFIICCAATTIIOONN NNUUMMBBEERR

CCEERRTTIIFFIICCAATTIIOONN LLAABBEELL

01/04/26 22:39:51 31S84640_343

The Transmission Number is on alabel on top of the transmission.

The Engine Number is stamped intothe engine block. It is on the front.

Identif ication Numbers


4-cylinder Models 6-cylinder Models

341

MMAANNUUAALLTTRRAANNSSMMIISSSSIIOONNNNUUMMBBEERR AAUUTTOOMMAATTIICC TTRRAANNSSMMIISSSSIIOONN NNUUMMBBEERR

EENNGGIINNEE NNUUMMBBEERRAAUUTTOOMMAATTIICC TTRRAANNSSMMIISSSSIIOONN NNUUMMBBEERR

EENNGGIINNEE NNUUMMBBEERR

01/04/26 22:39:58 31S84640_344

－－－－

＊

＊＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

Specifications


Dimensions

Weights

Capacities

Air Conditioning

Capacities

188.8 in (4,795 mm)1.45 US gal (5.5 , 1.21 Imp gal)1.43 US gal (5.4 , 1.19 Imp gal)

1.85 US gal (7.0 , 1.54 Imp gal)1.82 US gal (6.9 , 1.52 Imp gal)

70.3 in (1,785 mm)56.9 in (1,445 mm)

106.9 in (2,715 mm)61.2 in (1,555 mm)60.4 in (1,535 mm)

HFC-134a (R-134a)25 27 oz (700 750 g)

4.5 US qt (4.3 , 3.8 Imp qt)

4.2 US qt (4.0 , 3.5 Imp qt)

5.9 US qt (5.6 , 4.9 Imp qt)

2.0 US qt (1.9 , 1.7 Imp qt)2.1 US qt (2.0 , 1.8 Imp qt)2.6 US qt (2.5 , 2.2 Imp qt)

6.4 US qt (6.1 , 5.4 Imp qt)

2.6 US qt (2.5 , 2.2 Imp qt)

Excluding the oil remaining in the engine.

Including the coolant in the reserve tank and that remaining in theengine.Reserve tank capacity: 0.16 US gal (0.6 , 0.13 Imp gal)

4.8 US qt (4.5 , 4.0 Imp qt)

57.3 in (1,455 mm) 1.48 US gal (5.6 , 1.23 Imp gal)

1.98 US gal (7.5 , 1.65 Imp gal)

4.6 US qt (4.4 , 3.9 Imp qt)

5.3 US qt (5.0 , 4.4 Imp qt)

3.1 US qt (2.9 , 2.6 Imp qt)

7.6 US qt (7.2 , 6.3 Imp qt)

LengthWidthHeight

WheelbaseTrack

Gross vehicle weight rating See the certification label attachedto the driver’s doorjamb.

Enginecoolant

Engine oil

Manual trans-mission oilAutomatictransmissionfluid

Windshieldwasherreservoir

ND-OIL8

Refrigerant typeCharge quantity

Lubricant type16 18 oz (450 500 g)

Fuel tank Approx.

FrontRear

6-cylinder models

ChangeManualAutomatic

TotalManualAutomatic

ChangeIncludingfilterWithoutfilter

Total

ChangeTotalChange

Total

U.S. CarsCanada Cars

1 :

2 :3 : 6-cylinder models

:

6-cylinder models:

17.12 US gal (64.8 , 14.26 Imp gal)

1

2

3

3

3

3

3

3

01/04/26 22:40:23 31S84640_345

－

－－－

－－－－－－－－－－－

－－

＊＊＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

CONTINUED

Specifications


Battery

Fuses

Alignment

EngineLights

3.39 x 3.82 in (86.0 x 97.0 mm)

137.5 cu-in (2,254 cm )

12 V 60 W (HB3)12 V 51 W (HB4)12 V 24/2.2 CP

12 V 3 CP12 V 21 W12 V 21/5 W12 V 3 CP12 V 21 W12 V 21 W12 V12 V12 V12 V12 V

3 CP7 W5 W2 CP1.8 W

12 V12 V

52 AH/5 HR55 AH/5 HR

3°00’0°30’0°

0.08 in (2.0 mm)0.00 in (0.0 mm)

3.39 x 3.39 in (86.0 x 86.0 mm)

182.8 cu-in (2,997 cm )8.8 : 19.3 : 19.4 : 1

Capacity

Interior

Under-hood

Toe-in

Camber

Caster

Type

Bore x Stroke

Displacement

Compression ratio

Spark plugs

Water cooled 4-stroke SOHC,SOHC VTEC 4-cylinder, SOHC

6-cylinder (V6), gasoline engine

Headlights

Front turn signal/side markerlightsFront parking lightsRear turn signal lightsStop/TaillightsTaillightHigh-mount brake lightBack-up lightsLicense plate lightsCeiling lightTrunk lightsDoor courtesy lightsVanity mirror light

See page 335 or the fuse labelattached to the inside of the fusebox door on each side of thedashboard.See page 334 or the fuse boxcover.

See spark plug maintenance sec-tion pages 273 and 275 .

FrontRearFrontRearFront

HighLow

4-cylinder6-cylinder

1 : DX, Value Package2 : LX, EX, SE3 : 6-cylinder models

3

3

1

2

3

01/04/26 22:40:49 31S84640_346

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊＊

＊＊＊＊

Specifications


Tires

T125/70D15

29 psi (200 kPa , 2.0 kgf/cm )

60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

P195/70R14 90SP195/65R15 89HP205/65R15 92V

T135/90D15

30 psi (210 kPa , 2.1 kgf/cm )

Size

Pressure

Front/Rear

Spare

Front/Rear

Spare

1 : DX, Value Package2 : LX, EX, SE3 : 4-cylinder models4 : 6-cylinder models

1

2

4

3

4

1

2 4

01/04/26 22:40:57 31S84640_347

－The treadwear grade is a compara-tive rating based on the wear rate ofthe tire when tested under controlledconditions on a specified governmenttest course. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on thegovernment course as a tire graded100. The relative performance oftires depends upon the actual condi-tions of their use, however, and maydepart significantly from the normdue to variations in driving habits,service practices and differences inroad characteristics and climate.

The traction grades, from highest tolowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Thosegrades represent the tire’s ability tostop on wet pavement as measuredunder controlled conditions onspecified government test surfacesof asphalt and concrete. A tiremarked C may have poor tractionperformance.

Warning: The traction gradeassigned to this tire is based onstraight-ahead braking traction tests,and does not include acceleration,cornering, hydroplaning, or peaktraction characteristics.

All passenger car tires must conformto Federal Safety Requirements inaddition to these grades.

Quality grades can be found whereapplicable on the tire sidewallbetween the tread shoulder and themaximum section width. Forexample:

The tires on your car meet all U.S.Federal Safety Requirements. Alltires are also graded for treadwear,traction, and temperature perform-ance according to Department ofTransportation (DOT) standards.The following explains thesegradings.


DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)

Treadwear Traction AA, A, B, C

Treadwear 200Traction AATemperature A

Uniform Tire Quality Grading

345

01/04/26 22:41:08 31S84640_348

－ Warning: The temperature grade forthis tire is established for a tire thatis properly inflated and not over-loaded. Excessive speed, underinfla-tion, or excessive loading, eitherseparately or in combination, cancause heat buildup and possible tirefailure.

The temperature grades are A (thehighest), B, and C, representing thetire’s resistance to the generation ofheat and its ability to dissipate heatwhen tested under controlledconditions on a specified indoorlaboratory test wheel. Sustained hightemperature can cause the materialof the tire to degenerate and reducetire life, and excessive temperaturecan lead to sudden tire failure. Thegrade C corresponds to a level ofperformance which all passenger cartires must meet under the FederalMotor Vehicle Safety Standard No.109. Grades B and A representhigher levels of performance on thelaboratory test wheel than theminimum required by law.


DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)

Temperature A, B, C

346

01/04/26 22:41:13 31S84640_349

Some conventional gasolines arebeing blended with alcohol or anether compound. These gasolinesare collectively referred to asoxygenated fuels. To meet clean airstandards, some areas of the UnitedStates and Canada use oxygenatedfuels to help reduce emissions.

If you use an oxygenated fuel, besure it is unleaded and meets theminimum octane rating requirement.

Before using an oxygenated fuel, tryto confirm the fuel’s contents. Somestates/provinces require thisinformation to be posted on thepump.

The following are the U.S. EPA andCanadian CGSB approvedpercentages of oxygenates:

If you notice any undesirableoperating symptoms, try anotherservice station or switch to anotherbrand of gasoline.

Fuel system damage or performanceproblems resulting from the use ofan oxygenated fuel containing morethan the percentages of oxygenatesgiven above are not covered underwarranty.

(methyl or woodalcohol)Your vehicle was not designed to usefuel that contains methanol.Methanol can corrode metal parts inthe fuel system, and also damageplastic and rubber components. Thisdamage would not be covered byyour warranties.

(Methyl Tertiary ButylEther)You may use gasoline containing upto 15 percent MTBE by volume.

(ethyl or grain alcohol)You may use gasoline containing upto 10 percent ethanol by volume.Gasoline containing ethanol may bemarketed under the name ‘‘Gasohol.’’


Oxygenated Fuels

METHANOL

MTBE

ETHANOL

347

01/04/26 22:41:23 31S84640_350

If you are planning to take yourHonda outside the U.S. or Canada,contact the tourist bureaus in theareas you will be traveling in to findout about the availability of unleadedgasoline with the proper octanerating.

If unleaded gasoline is not available,be aware that using leaded gasolinein your Honda will affect perfor-mance and fuel mileage, and damageits emissions controls. It will nolonger comply with U.S. andCanadian emissions regulations, andwill be illegal to operate in NorthAmerica. To bring your car back intocompliance will require the replace-ment of several components, such asthe oxygen sensors and the threeway catalytic converter. These re-placements are not covered underwarranty.

Driving in Foreign Countries


01/04/26 22:41:28 31S84640_351

＊

＊

In Canada, Honda vehicles complywith the Canadian Motor VehicleSafety Standards (CMVSS) forEmissions valid at the time they aremanufactured.

The burning of gasoline in your car’sengine produces several byproducts.Some of these are carbon monoxide(CO), oxides of nitrogen (NOx) andhydrocarbons (HC). Gasolineevaporating from the tank alsoproduces hydrocarbons. Controllingthe production of NOx, CO, and HCis important to the environment.Under certain conditions of sunlightand climate, NOx and HC react toform photochemical ‘‘smog.’’ Carbonmonoxide does not contribute tosmog creation, but it is a poisonousgas.

The United States Clean Air Actsets standards for automobileemissions. It also requires thatautomobile manufacturers explain toowners how their emissions controlswork and what to do to maintainthem. This section summarizes howthe emissions controls work.Scheduled maintenance is on page

.

Your car has a Positive CrankcaseVentilation System. This keepsgasses that build up in the engine’scrankcase from going into theatmosphere. The Positive CrankcaseVentilation valve routes them from

the crankcase back to the intakemanifold. They are then drawn intothe engine and burned.

As gasoline evaporates in the fueltank, an evaporative emissionscontrol canister filled with charcoaladsorbs the vapor. It is stored in thiscanister while the engine is off. Afterthe engine is started and warmed up,the vapor is drawn into the engineand burned during driving.

The Onboard Refueling VaporRecovery (ORVR) system capturesthe fuel vapors during refueling. Thevapors are adsorbed in a canisterfilled with activated carbon. Whiledriving, the fuel vapors are drawninto the engine and burned off.

240

The Clean Air Act

Crankcase Emissions ControlSystem

Evaporative Emissions ControlSystem

Onboard Refueling VaporRecovery


Emissions Controls

349

01/04/26 22:41:38 31S84640_352

The three way catalytic converter isin the exhaust system. Throughchemical reactions, it converts HC,CO, and NOx in the engine’s exhaustto carbon dioxide (CO ), dinitrogen(N ), and water vapor.

This system constantly adjusts theignition timing, reducing the amountof HC, CO and NOx produced.

The exhaust emissions controlsinclude three systems: PGM-FI,Ignition Timing Control and ThreeWay Catalytic Converter. Thesethree systems work together tocontrol the engine’s combustion andminimize the amount of HC, CO, andNOx that comes out the tailpipe. Theexhaust emissions control systemsare separate from the crankcase andevaporative emissions controlsystems.

The PGM-FI System uses sequentialmultiport fuel injection.It has three subsystems: Air Intake,Engine Control, and Fuel Control.The Engine Control Module (ECM)or the Powertrain Control Module(PCM) uses various sensors todetermine how much air is goinginto the engine. It then controls howmuch fuel to inject under all operat-ing conditions.

The emissions control systems arecovered by warranties separate fromthe rest of your car. Read yourwarranty manual for more informa-tion.

The emissions control systems aredesigned and certified to work to-gether in reducing emissions tolevels that comply with the Clean AirAct. To make sure the emissionsremain low, you should use only newGenuine Honda replacement parts ortheir equivalent for repairs. Usinglower quality parts may increase theemissions from your car.

2

2

Replacement PartsExhaust Emissions Controls PGM-FI System

Three Way Catalytic Converter

Ignition Timing Control System

Emissions Controls


01/04/26 22:41:49 31S84640_353

Keep the engine tuned-up.

Always use unleaded gasoline.Even a small amount of leadedgasoline can contaminate thecatalyst metals, making the threeway catalytic converter ineffective.

The three way catalytic convertercontains precious metals that serveas catalysts, promoting chemicalreactions to convert the exhaustgasses without affecting the metals.The catalytic converter is referred toas a three-way catalyst, since it actson HC, CO, and NOx. A replacementunit must be an original Honda partor its equivalent.

The three way catalytic convertermust operate at a high temperaturefor the chemical reactions to takeplace. It can set on fire any com-bustible materials that come near it.Park your car away from high grass,dry leaves, or other flammables.

A defective three way catalyticconverter contributes to air pollution,and can impair your engine’s per-formance. Follow these guidelines toprotect your car’s three way catalyticconverter.

Have your car diagnosed andrepaired if it is misfiring, back-firing, stalling, or otherwise notrunning properly.

Three Way Catalytic Converter


TTHHRREEEE WWAAYY CCAATTAALLYYTTIICC CCOONNVVEERRTTEERR

01/04/26 22:41:57 31S84640_354

If you take your vehicle for a stateemissions test shortly after thebattery has been disconnected orgone dead, it may not pass the test.This is because of certain ‘‘readinesscodes’’ that must be set in the on-board diagnostics for the emissionssystems. These codes are erasedwhen the battery is disconnected,and set again only after several daysof driving under a variety ofconditions.

If the testing facility determines thatthe readiness codes are not set, youwill be requested to return at a laterdate to complete the test. If you mustget the vehicle re-tested within thenext two or three days, you cancondition the vehicle for re-testingby doing the following.

Make sure the gas tank is nearly,but not completely, full (around3/4).

Make sure the vehicle has beenparked with the engine off for 8hours or more.

Make sure the ambienttemperature is between 20° and95°F.

Without touching the acceleratorpedal, start the engine and let itidle for 20 seconds.

Keep the vehicle in Park(automatic transmission) orNeutral (manual transmission).Increase the engine speed to 2,000rpm and hold it there until thetemperature gauge rises to at least1/4 of the scale (approximately 3minutes).

State Emissions Testing


Testing of Readiness Codes

352

01/04/26 22:42:06 31S84640_355

Select a nearby lightly traveledmajor highway where you canmaintain a speed of 50 to 60 mph(80 to 97 km/h) for at least 20minutes. Drive on the highway inD (A/T) or 5th (M/T). Do notuse the cruise control. Whentraffic allows, drive for 90 secondswithout moving the acceleratorpedal. (Vehicle speed may varyslightly; this is okay.) If you cannotdo this for a continuous 90seconds because of trafficconditions, drive for at least 30seconds, then repeat it two moretimes (for a total of 90 seconds).

Then drive in city/suburbantraffic for at least 10 minutes.When traffic conditions allow, letthe vehicle coast for severalseconds without using theaccelerator pedal or the brakepedal.

If the testing facility determines thereadiness codes are still not set, seeyour Honda dealer.

4

State Emissions Testing


01/04/26 22:42:12 31S84640_356

354

01/04/26 22:42:14 31S84640_357

Customer Relations................................Information . 356

....................Warranty Coverages . 357Reporting Safety Defects

..........................(U.S. Vehicles) . 358.....................Authorized Manuals . 359

Warranty and Customer Relations

Warranty and Customer Relations 355

01/04/26 22:42:18 31S84640_358

Honda dealership personnel aretrained professionals. They shouldbe able to answer all your questions.If you encounter a problem that yourdealership does not solve to yoursatisfaction, please discuss it withthe dealership’s management. TheService Manager or GeneralManager can help. Almost allproblems are solved in this way.

If you are dissatisfied with thedecision made by the dealership’smanagement, contact your HondaCustomer Relations Office.

U.S. Owners:

Canadian Owners:

In Puerto Rico and the U.S. VirginIslands:

When you call or write, please giveus this information:

Vehicle Identification Number(see page )Name and address of the dealerwho services your carDate of purchaseMileage on your carYour name, address, and tele-phone numberA detailed description of theproblemName of the dealer who sold thecar to you

340

Customer Relations Information

Warranty and Customer Relations356

CUSTMER RELATIONS

RELATIONS AVEC LA CLIENTÉLE

American Honda Motor Co.Automobile Customer Relations

Department1919 Torrance Boulevard

Torrance, California 90501-2746

(800) 999-1009

Honda Canada Inc.715 Milner AvenueToronto, ONM1B 2K8

Tel: 1-888-9-HONDA-9

Fax: Toll-free 1-877-939-0909Toronto (416) 287-4776

Bella InternationalP.O. Box 190816

San Juan, Puerto Rico 00919-0816

(787) 250-4318

01/04/26 22:42:28 31S84640_359

－－

－

－

－－

－

－

－

a seatbelt that fails to function properly iscovered for the useful life of thevehicle.

provides proratedcoverage for a replacement batterypurchased from a Honda dealer.

Your new Honda is covered by thesewarranties:

covers all genuineHonda replacement parts againstdefects in materials and workman-ship.

Genuine Honda Accessories arecovered under this warranty. Timeand mileage limits depend on thetype of accessory and other factors.Please read your warranty manualfor details.

all exterior body panels arecovered for rust-through from theinside for the specified time periodwith no mileage limit.

providescoverage for as long as the pur-chaser of the muffler owns the car.

these twowarranties cover your vehicle’s emis-sions control systems. Time, mileage,and coverage are conditional. Pleaseread the warranty manual for exactinformation.

this warranty gives upto 100 percent credit toward areplacement battery.

coversyour new vehicle, except for thebattery, emissions control systemsand accessories, against defects inmaterials and workmanship.

Restrictions and exclusions apply toall these warranties. Please read the2002 Honda Warranty Informationbooklet that came with your car forprecise information on warrantycoverages. Your Honda’s originaltires are covered by theirmanufacturer. Tire warranty infor-mation is in a separate booklet.

Please refer to the 2002 WarrantyManual that came with your car.

Seat Belt Limited Warranty Replacement Battery LimitedWarranty

Replacement Parts LimitedWarranty

Accessory Limited Warranty

Rust Perforation Limited Warranty Replacement Muffler LifetimeLimited Warranty

Emissions Control Systems DefectsWarranty and EmissionsPerformance Warranty

Original Equipment Battery LimitedWarranty

New Car Limited Warranty

U.S. Owners

Canadian Owners

Warranty Coverages

Warranty and Customer Relations 357

01/04/26 22:42:42 31S84640_360

If you believe that your vehicle has adefect which could cause a crash orcould cause injury or death, youshould immediately inform theNational Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration (NHTSA) in additionto notifying American Honda MotorCo., Inc.

If NHTSA receives similar com-plaints, it may open an investigation,and if it finds that a safety defectexists in a group of vehicles, it mayorder a recall and remedy campaign.However, NHTSA cannot becomeinvolved in individual problemsbetween you, your dealer, orAmerican Honda Motor Co., Inc.

To contact NHTSA, you may eithercall the Auto Safety Hotline toll-freeat 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 inWashington D.C. area) or write to:NHTSA, U.S. Department ofTransportation, Washington,D.C. 20590. You can also obtainother information about motorvehicle safety from the Hotline.

Warranty and Customer Relations

Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Vehicles)

358

01/04/26 22:42:47 31S84640_361

＊

＊

＊

－

＊２００２

ＨＯＮ

The following publications covering the operation andservicing of your vehicle can be obtained from HelmIncorporated, either by filling out the attached form or,for credit card holders, calling the toll-free phone numberon the form. For manuals prior to the year shown below,contact Helm Incorporated, P.O. Box 07280, Detroit,Michigan 48207, or call 1-800-782-4356.

Valid only for sales within the U.S. Canadian owners shouldcontact their authorized Honda dealer.

Authorized Manuals

Purchasing Factory Authorized Manuals(U.S. only)

359

ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-782-4356

OR

(NOTE: For Credit Card Holder Orders Only)

MINIMUM CREDIT CARD PURCHASE $10.00

Publication

Form Number

61S8400

61S8401

61S8400EL

61S8030

31S84640

31S84910

HON-R

Form Description

1998-2002 Honda Accord 2/4 Door L4

Service Manual Base Book

1998-2002 Honda Accord 2/4 Door V6

Service Manual Supplement

Electrical Troubleshooting Manual

Body Repair Manual

2002 Honda Accord 4 Door L4/V6

Owner’s Manual Base Book

Owner’s Manual Supplement

Order Form for Previous Years-

Indicate Year and Model Desired

Price

Each

$68.00

$38.00

$48.00

$42.00

$32.00

$12.00

FREE

1998-2002 Honda Accord 2/4 Door L4/V6

1998-2002 Honda Accord 2/4 Door L4/V6

2002 Honda Accord 4 Door L4/V6

PUBLICATION NUMBERVEHICLE MODEL

Name YearQty

Price

Each

Total

Price

GRAND TOTAL

HANDLING CHARGE

Mich. Purchases

Add 6% Sales Tax

TOTAL MATERIAL

$6.00

Prices are subject to change withoutnotice and without incurring obligation.

Orders are mailed within 10 days. Pleaseallow adequate time for delivery.

Monday-Friday 8:00 A.M. 6:00 P.M. EST

By completing this form you can order the materials desired. You canpay by check or money order, or charge to your credit card. Mail toHelm Incorporated at the address shown on the back of the order form.

Prices are subject to change without notice and without incurringobligation.

01/04/26 22:42:59 31S84640_362

－

－

－

ＳＨＩＰ

ＴＯ

ＰＡＹＭＥＮＴ

This manual complements the Service Manual byproviding in-depth troubleshooting information for eachelectrical circuit in your vehicle.

This manual describes the procedures involved in thereplacement of damaged body parts.

This manual covers maintenance and recommendedprocedures for repair to engine and chassis components.It is written for the Journeyman mechanic, but is simpleenough for most mechanically-inclined owners to under-stand.

Authorized Manuals

Service Manual:

Electrical Troubleshooting Manual:

Body Repair Manual:

360

NOTE: Dealers and Companies please provide dealer or company name,and also the name of the person to whose attention the shipment shouldbe sent. For purchases outside U.S.A. please write to the address shownbelow for a quotation.

P.O. BOX 07280·DETROIT, MICHIGAN 48207·1-800-782-4356

Customer Name Attention

Apartment Number

State & Zip CodeCity

Daytime Telephone Number

Check or money order enclosed payable to Helm Inc U.S. funds only.Do not send cash

MasterCard

VISA Check here if your billing address is differentfrom the shipping address shown above.

Account Number Expiration: Mo. Yr.

CUSTOMER SIGNATURE DATE

Street Address No P.O. Box Number

( )

These Publications cannot be returned for credit without receiving advance authorization within 14days of delivery. On returns, a restocking fee may be applied against the original order.

01/04/26 22:43:10 31S84640_363

CONTINUED

...Accessories and Modifications . 202................................Accessories . 202

...Additional Safety Precaution . 202............................Modifications . 202

ACCESSORY (Ignition Key.......................................Position) . 73

.............Accessory Power Socket . 100....................Additives, Engine Oil . 252

.....................................Airbag (SRS) . 9.....................Air Cleaner Element . 269

............................Air Conditioning . 104..............................Maintenance . 281

.........................................Usage . 104.......................Air Pressure, Tires . 284.......................Alcohol in Gasoline . 347

......................................Antifreeze . 255Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)

................................Description . 220...............................Indicator . 57, 221

...................................Operation . 220.Anti-theft Steering Column Lock . 72

..........................Appearance Care . 303........Audio System . 119, 131, 147, 164

.............Automatic Speed Control . 185

..............Automatic Transmission . 212..........................Capacity, Fluid . 342

.......Checking Fluid Level . 263, 264.......................................Shifting . 212

.Shift Lever Position Indicator . 213................Shift Lever Positions . 213

....................Shift Lock Release . 216

Battery......Charging System Light . 56, 326

............................Jump Starting . 320..............................Maintenance . 276............................Specifications . 343

..............................Before Driving . 193..........................................Belts, Seat . 8

.............................Beverage Holder . 98...................................Body Repair . 310

Brakes...........Anti-lock System (ABS) . 220

.............Break-in, New Linings . 194....................Bulb Replacement . 295

...........................................Fluid . 267.........................................Parking . 95

.........................System Indicator . 57

........................Wear Indicators . 219.............................Braking System . 219

........................Break-in, New Car . 194..Brightness Control, Instruments . 65

........................Brights, Headlights . 64Bulb Replacement

..........................Back-up Lights . 295..............................Brake Lights . 295..............................Ceiling Light . 298

..........................Courtesy Light . 299................Front Parking Lights . 294

........Front Side Marker Lights . 293.................................Headlights . 292

.........High-mount Brake Light . 297.................License Plate Lights . 297

............................Specifications . 343.....................................Spotlight . 299

...............................Trunk Light . 300....................Turn Signal Lights . 293

..............................Bulbs, Halogen . 292

Index

A

B

I

01/04/26 22:43:16 31S84640_364

＊

............................Capacities Chart . 342.............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 51

.............................Carrying Cargo . 204Cassette Player

............................................Care . 181...........Operation . 124, 142, 152, 178

..............CAUTION, Explanation of . ii..........CD Changer . 127, 138, 156, 174

..............................CD Player . 136, 172........................Certification Label . 340

............................................Chains . 289....................Changing a Flat Tire . 313

............Changing Engine Coolant . 257Changing Oil

........................................How to . 252......................................When to . 240

...Charging System Indicator . 56, 326............Checklist, Before Driving . 208

..................Childproof Door Locks . 79.......................................Child Seats . 26

..........Tether Anchorage Points . 39...................................Cleaner, Air . 269

Cleaning....................Aluminum Wheels . 305

...................................Carpeting . 306......................................Exterior . 304

.........................................Fabric . 307.......................................Interior . 306

...................................Seat Belts . 307...........................................Vinyl . 307

......................................Window . 308...............Climate Control System . 111

...........................Clock, Setting the . 96...................................Clutch Fluid . 268

........................CO in the Exhaust . 349..........................................Coin Box . 97

............Cold Weather, Starting in . 210..............................Compact Spare . 312

...................Console Compartment . 97...............Consumer Information . 355

.............Controls, Instruments and . 53Coolant

........................................Adding . 255....................................Checking . 200

.........................Proper Solution . 255...................Temperature Gauge . 61

....................Corrosion Protection . 309Crankcase Emissions Control

........................................System . 349............Cruise Control Operation . 185

..........Customer Relations Office . 356

................DANGER, Explanation of . ii.......................................Dashboard . 54

................Daytime Running Lights . 65............Defects, Reporting Safety . 358

................Defogger, Rear Window . 68....................................Dimensions . 342

...............Dimming the Headlights . 64Dipstick

.Automatic Transmission . 263, 264..................................Engine Oil . 198

..........................Directional Signals . 66........Disc Brake Wear Indicators . 219

.....................Disposal of Used Oil . 254Doors

..............Locking and Unlocking . 73......................Power Door Locks . 74

..........DOT Tire Quality Grading . 345Downshifting, 5-speed Manual

.............................Transmission . 211.....................................Drive Belts . 282

...........Driver and Passenger Safety . 5

Index

C

D

II

01/04/26 22:43:21 31S84640_365

CONTINUED

...........................................Driving . 207....................................Economy . 201

.........................In Bad Weather . 225................In Foreign Countries . 348

..................Dust and Pollen Filter . 282

............................Fabric, Cleaning . 307...................................Fan, Interior . 104

Features, Comfort and..............................Convenience . 103

....................Filling the Fuel Tank . 194Filter

.........................Dust and Pollen . 282...............................................Oil . 252

5-speed Manual Transmission...............Checking Fluid Level . 265

5-speed Manual Transmission................................Shifting the . 211

.............Flashers, Hazard Warning . 68...................Flat Tire, Changing a . 313

Fluids.Automatic Transmission . 263, 264

..........................................Brake . 267.........................................Clutch . 268

..............Manual Transmission . 265..........................Power Steering . 268

..................Windshield Washer . 262FM Stereo Radio

...................................Reception . 170...........................Folding Rear Seat . 87

.....Foreign Countries, Driving in . 348..........................Four-way Flashers . 68

.................................................Fuel . 194......................Fill Door and Cap . 194

...........................................Gauge . 61................Octane Requirement . 194

...............................Oxygenated . 347........................Tank, Filling the . 194

.....................Fuses, Checking the . 332

..............................Economy, Fuel . 201............Emergencies on the Road . 311.............Battery, Jump Starting . 320...........Brake System Indicator . 329

................Changing a Flat Tire . 313.....Charging System Indicator . 326

..................Checking the Fuses . 332.....Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 325...Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 327...Manually Closing Moonroof . 330

..................Overheated Engine . 323...........................Emergency Brake . 95

......................Emergency Flashers . 68......................Emergency Towing . 336.......................Emissions Controls . 349

Engine............................................Belts . 282

....Coolant Temperature Gauge . 61

Malfunction Indicator................................Lamp . 56, 327

........Oil Pressure Indicator . 56, 325

..............Oil, What Kind to Use . 250...............................Overheating . 323

............................Specifications . 343

....................Speed Limiter . 212, 216.......................................Starting . 209

..........Engine Speed Limiter . 212, 216......................Ethanol in Gasoline . 347

.Evaporative Emissions Controls . 349...............................Exhaust Fumes . 51

Expectant Mothers, Use of Seat........................................Belts by . 19

..................Exterior, Cleaning the . 304

Index

E

F

III

01/04/26 22:43:28 31S84640_366

...............Gas Mileage, Improving . 201..........................................Gasohol . 347.........................................Gasoline . 194...........................................Gauge . 61

................Octane Requirement . 194........................Tank, Filling the . 194

................Gas Station Procedures . 194Gauges

...Engine Coolant Temperature . 61...............................................Fuel . 61

...............................Speedometer . 60.................................Tachometer . 60

Gearshift Lever Positions..........Automatic Transmission . 213

5-speed Manual.........................Transmission . 211

..............................Glass Cleaning . 308........................................Glove Box . 81

.............Halogen Headlight Bulbs . 292..............Hazard Warning Flashers . 68

........................................Headlights . 64........................................Aiming . 292

..............Automatic Lighting Off . 65............Daytime Running Lights . 65............Low Beams, Turning on . 64

.........................Reminder Chime . 64........Replacing Halogen Bulbs . 292

...................................Turning on . 64..............................Head Restraints . 86

.....................Heating and Cooling . 104.............High Altitude, Starting at . 210

HomeLink Universal...............................Transmitter . 188

.......................Hood, Opening the . 196...........................Hydraulic Clutch . 268

.................................Hydroplaning . 226

...Identification Number, Vehicle . 340Ignition

..............................................Keys . 70...........................................Switch . 72

............Timing Control System . 350........................Immobilizer System . 71

.........Important Safety Precautions . 6

.........Indicators, Instrument Panel . 55...............................Infant Restraint . 30

......................................Infant Seats . 30..........Tether Anchorage Points . 39

...................Inflation, Proper Tire . 284...................................Inside Mirror . 93

.............................Inspection, Tire . 286............................Instrument Panel . 55

........Instrument Panel Brightness . 65...........................Interior Cleaning . 306

...............................Interior Lights . 101........................................Introduction . i

........................Jacking up the Car . 315.......................................Jack, Tire . 314

................................Jump Starting . 320

..................................................Keys . 70

Index

G

H

I

J

K

IV

01/04/26 22:43:36 31S84640_367

CONTINUED

..................................Maintenance . 235...Owner Maintenance Checks . 247

........................................Record . 245......................Required Indicator . 62

..........................................Safety . 236.............................Schedule . 240-244

.Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 56, 327...................Manual Transmission . 211

........Manual Transmission Fluid . 265...............................Meters, Gauges . 60

...................Methanol in Gasoline . 347..........................Mirrors, Adjusting . 94

.........................................Moonroof . 92......................Closing Manually . 330

.....................................Operation . 92

...................Neutral Gear Position . 214..................New Vehicle Break-in . 194

.....................Normal Shift Speeds . 212..................NOTICE, Explanation of . ii

...............Numbers, Identification . 340

...Octane Requirement, Gasoline . 194.........................................Odometer . 60

...............................Odometer, Trip . 61Oil

........................Change, How to . 252......................Change, When to . 240......................Checking Engine . 198..............Pressure Indicator . 56, 325

Selecting Proper Viscosity......................................Chart . 251

...........ON (Ignition Key Position) . 73..Operation in Foreign Countries . 348

..............................Outside Mirrors . 93....................Overheating, Engine . 323

.......Owner Maintenance Checks . 247..........................Oxygenated Fuel . 347

..............Panel Brightness Control . 65........................Park Gear Position . 214

...........................................Parking . 218

.......................Label, Certification . 340.................Lane Change, Signaling . 66

........................Lap/Shoulder Belts . 42Lights

....................Bulb Replacement . 292.......................................Indicator . 55

.........................................Parking . 64..................................Turn Signal . 66

......LOCK (Ignition Key Position) . 72Locks

.......Anti-theft Steering Column . 72............................Fuel Fill Door . 194

....................................Glove Box . 81.................................Power Door . 74

...........................................Trunk . 79........................Low Coolant Level . 200

...Lower Gear, Downshifting to a . 211...Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 56, 325

...Lubricant Specifications Chart . 342.........................................Luggage . 204

Index

L M

N

O

P

V

01/04/26 22:43:45 31S84640_368

＊

＊

.................................Parking Brake . 95

.................................Parking Lights . 64..Parking Over Things that Burn . 351

.............................PGM-FI System . 350..................Polishing and Waxing . 305

...................................Pollen Filter . 282............Pre-Drive Safety Checklist . 11

.........Pregnancy, Using Seat Belts . 19............................Protecting Adults . 12

...Additional Safety Precautions . 20.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 19

........................Protecting Children . 21.......................Protecting Infants . 30

.......Protecting Larger Children . 36.........Protecting Small Children . 33

Using Child Seats with.....................................Tethers . 39

.................................Using LATCH . 40

........................................Safety Belts . 8

.........Safety Defects, Reporting . 358.................................Safety Features . 7

...........................................Airbags . 9..................................Door Locks . 10

..........................Head Restraints . 10.......................................Seat Belts . 8

.....................Seats & Seat-Backs . 10.............Safety Labels, Location of . 52

...............................Safety Messages . ii...........................................Seat Belts . 8

...............Additional Information . 42Automatic Seat Belt

...............................Tensioners . 43.....................................Cleaning . 307

......................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 42................................Maintenance . 44

Reminder Light and................................Beeper . 42, 56

...................System Components . 42...............Use During Pregnancy . 19

........................Seats, Adjusting the . 82............................Security System . 184

...............................Serial Number . 340...........................Service Intervals . 240...........................Service Manual . 359

.........Service Station Procedures . 194

...................Radiator Overheating . 323...Radio/Cassette Sound System . 119..Rear Lights, Bulb Replacement . 296

..........................Rear Seat Armrest . 88

..........................Rear Seat, Folding . 87

............................Rear View Mirror . 93.................Rear Window Defogger . 68.........Reclining the Seat Backs . 82, 85

.......Recommended Shift Speeds . 212.............................Reminder Lights . 55

.......................Remote Transmitter . 75Replacement Information

.................Air Cleaner Element . 269.......................................Coolant . 257

................Engine Oil and Filter . 252..........................................Fuses . 332

................................Light Bulbs . 292....................................Schedule . 240

.......................Spark Plugs . 272, 274...........................................Tires . 287

.............................Wiper Blades . 279Replacing Seat Belts After a

............................................Crash . 44.................Reserve Tank, Coolant . 200

...............................Restraint, Child . 21..................Reverse Gear Position . 214

................................Rotation, Tire . 287

Index

R

S

VI

01/04/26 22:43:51 31S84640_369

CONTINUED

.....................................Tachometer . 60......Taillights, Changing Bulbs in . 295

.Taking Care of the Unexpected . 311...........Tape Player . 124, 142, 152, 178

Technical Descriptions......DOT Tire Quality Grading . 345.....Emissions Control Systems . 349

.....................Oxygenated Fuels . 347Three Way Catalytic

...............................Converter . 351.......................Temperature Gauge . 61

.............Tether Attachment Points . 39..Three Way Catalytic Converter . 351

............................Time, Setting the . 96....................................Timing Belt . 283....................................Tire Chains . 289

.........Tire, How to Change a Flat . 313

............................Setting the Clock . 96.....Shift Lever Position Indicator . 213

........................Shift Lock Release . 216....................................Side Airbags . 47

...How Your Side Airbags Work . 47How The Side Airbag off

...........Indicator Light Works . 48Side Marker Lights, Bulb

..............................Replacement . 293...............................Signaling Turns . 66

.....................................Snow Tires . 289...................Solvent-type Cleaners . 304

.......Sound System . 119, 131, 147, 164Spare Tire

......................................Inflating . 312............................Specifications . 344

........Spark Plugs, Replacing . 272, 274....................Specifications Charts . 342

................................Speed Control . 185

........................Speed Limiter . 212, 216...................................Speedometer . 60

..........SRS, Additional Information . 45...Additional Safety Precautions . 50

.....How Your Airbags Work . 45, 47How Your SRS Indicator

.......................................Works . 47

........................SRS Components . 45..................................SRS Service . 50

.............................SRS Indicator . 47, 57....START (Ignition Key Position) . 73

.......................Starting the Engine . 209In Cold Weather at High

..................................Altitude . 210................With a Dead Battery . 320

........Steam Coming from Engine . 323Steering Wheel

..................................Adjustment . 69.............Anti-theft Column Lock . 72

Stereo Sound...............System . 119, 131, 147, 164

...........................Storing Your Car . 301..........................................Sun Visor . 99

........................Sunglasses Holder . 100Supplemental Restraint System

......................................Servicing . 50.........................SRS Indicator . 47, 57

...................System Components . 45..................................Synthetic Oil . 251

Index

T

VII

01/04/26 22:43:56 31S84640_370

＊

...............................................Tires . 283..............................Air Pressure . 284

.........................Checking Wear . 286..........................Compact Spare . 312

......DOT Tire Quality Grading . 345......................................Inflation . 284

..................................Inspection . 286...................................Replacing . 287

......................................Rotating . 287...........................................Snow . 289

............................Specifications . 344...................Tools, Tire Changing . 313

Towing.....................................A Trailer . 227

................Emergency Wrecker . 336..............Traction Control System . 222

......................TCS Indicator . 58, 223...............TCS ON/OFF Switch . 223

TransmissionChecking Fluid Level,

......................Automatic . 263, 264Checking Fluid Level,

...................................Manual . 265..................Fluid Selection . 263, 265

..............Identification Number . 339.............Shifting the Automatic . 212

..................Shifting the Manual . 211.....................................Treadwear . 345.......................................Trip Meter . 61

................................................Trunk . 79....................Emergency Opener . 80

.................................Opening the . 79...................Open Monitor Light . 58

....................................Turn Signals . 66.............WARNING, Explanation of . ii.........Warning Labels, Location of . 52

..................Warranty Coverages . 357Washer, Windshield

........Checking the Fluid Level . 262.....................................Operation . 68

.........................................Washing . 304..................Waxing and Polishing . 305

Wheels...............Adjusting the Steering . 69............Alignment and Balance . 286

..........................Compact Spare . 312......................................Wrench . 314

Windows.....................................Cleaning . 308

..................Operating the Power . 91...........................Rear, Defogger . 68

Windshield.......................................Cleaning . 66.......................................Washers . 68

..................................Vanity Mirror . 99.................Vehicle Capacity Load . 205

......................Vehicle Dimensions . 342....Vehicle Identification Number . 340

.............................Vehicle Storage . 301

.................................................VIN . 340...............................Vinyl Cleaning . 307

..................................Viscosity, Oil . 251

.....................Underside, Cleaning . 309Unexpected, Taking Care

..........................................of the . 311....Uniform Tire Quality Grading . 345

........................Unleaded Gasoline . 194.....................Upholstery Cleaning . 306

.......Used Oil, How to Dispose of . 254

Index

U

V

W

VIII

01/04/26 22:44:03 31S84640_371

＊

Wipers, Windshield.......................Changing Blades . 279

.....................................Operation . 66....................................Worn Tires . 286

.....Wrecker, Emergency Towing . 336

: U.S. and Canada only

Index

IX

01/04/26 22:44:06 31S84640_372

Service Information Summary

Gasoline:

Fuel Tank Capacity:

Recommended Engine Oil:

Tire Pressure (measured cold):5-speed Manual TransmissionFluid:

Power Steering Fluid:

Brake Fluid:Automatic Transmission Fluid:

Unleaded gasoline, pump octanenumber of 86 or higher. 29 psi (200 kPa , 2.0 kgf/cm )Honda Manual Transmission

Fluid preferred, or an API serviceSG, SH or SJ, SAE 10W-30 or10W-40 motor oil as a temporaryreplacement (see page ).

Capacity:2.0 US qt (1.9 , 1.7 Imp qt)

Honda Power Steering Fluidpreferred, or another brand ofpower steering fluid as atemporary replacement. Do notuse ATF (see page ).

Honda Heavy Duty Brake FluidDOT 3 preferred, or a DOT 3 orDOT 4 brake fluid as a temporaryreplacement (see page ).

API Premium grade 5W-20detergent oil (see page ).

Oil change capacity (includingfilter):

4.5 US qt (4.3 , 3.8 Imp qt)

4.6 US qt (4.4 , 3.9 Imp qt)

30 psi (210 kPa , 2.1 kgf/cm )

Honda ATF-Z1 (AutomaticTransmission Fluid) preferred, ora DEXRON III ATF as atemporary replacement (seepages and ).

4-cylinder models

6-cylinder models

250

263 264

265

268

267

U.S. DX, and Value Package

Except U.S. DX, and ValuePackage

17.12 US gal (64.8 , 14.26 Imp gal)

01/04/26 22:44:21 31S84640_373

Documents

Owner’sIdentification - Hondaowners.honda.com/assets/OWNERLINK/Model/own_man/2002Accord… · Owner’sIdentification SiprefiereesteManualdel Propietarioenespañol,comuníquese